Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology, Second Edition

MARYANNE TATE MALTBY

WHURR PUBLISHERS

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology Second Edition

This page intentionally left blank

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology MARYANNE TATE MALTBY DASED, BA, MEd, MSc, FSHAA, EdD, RHAD. HEARING AID AUDIOLOGIST AND AUDIOLOGICAL SCIENTIST Active Hearing, Boston Spa, W. Yorkshire and TRAINING OFFICER Ultravox Group, Wilmslow, Cheshire.

W WHURR LONDON

PUBLISHERS

AND

PHILADELPHIA

First Edition published 1994 by Chapman & Hall © Second edition 2002 Whurr Publishers Second edition published by Whurr Publishers Ltd 19b Compton Terrace, London N1 2UN, England and 325 Chestnut Street, Philadelphia PA 19106, USA

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of Whurr Publishers Limited. This publication is sold subject to the conditions that it shall not, by way of trade or otherwise, be lent, resold, hired out, or otherwise circulated without the publisher’s prior consent in any form of binding or cover other than that in which it is published and without a similar condition including this condition being imposed upon any subsequent purchaser. British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library. ISBN: 1 86156 257 8

Printed and bound in the UK by Athenaeum Press Ltd, Gateshead, Tyne & Wear

Contents

vii ix

Foreword Acknowledgements Part one: Fundamental Sciences 1 2 3 4 5 6

1

Acoustics Anatomy and physiology of the ear Medical aspects of hearing loss Speech and intelligibility The basic hearing aid system Digital hearing aids

3 21 45 67 80 106

Part two: The Practice of Hearing Aid Audiology

123

7 The assessment procedure 8 Hearing aids and their performance 9 Selection and fitting 10 Earmoulds 11 Evaluation 12 Client management and rehabilitation

125 154 185 204 219 235

Part three: Special Aspects of Hearing Aid Audiology

257

13 Assessment and management of special problems 14 Paediatric provision

259 290

Glossary References Index

314 325 331

v

This page intentionally left blank

Foreword

The second edition of Maryanne Maltby’s text Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology is both welcome and timely. At a time when we are seeing major changes in the UK in provision, technology and rehabilitative approaches in hearing aid audiology, students in training and experienced practitioners alike will find this text a mine of useful information. The text has been totally rewritten and updated from the first edition and contains elements basic to the practice of hearing aid audiology, together with a clear exposé of advanced modern thinking. Written by a person with a wealth of experience in both training and practical hearing aid fitting, Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology is a must for all prospective and practising hearing aid audiologists. It is absolutely relevant to the needs of today’s hearing aid dispenser who has a responsibility to furnish patients with ongoing experiences of excellence in clinical practice. The presentation of the material is clear and precise yet not excessively technical in style. A welcome addition to the recommended reading list of all major training courses for hearing aid dispensers, Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology will prove to be a cornerstone in training and ongoing education in both the UK and further afield. Michael Nolan BSc, PhD, MSHAA Registrar of the British Society of Hearing Aid Audiologists

vii

This page intentionally left blank

Acknowledgements

I greatly appreciate the assistance given in the preparation of this new edition by: David Gaszczyk (BMI Healthcare) – graphs, computer diagrams and index. Karen Shepherd (A&M Hearing Ltd) – digital hearing aids. Roger Lewin (Phonak UK Ltd) – algorithms. Lesley Pestell (Starkey Ltd) – impressions. Peter Bodo (Rayovac UK Ltd) – battery specifications. I should also like to express my sincere thanks to all those who helped or encouraged me in any way and especially to Roger Lewin, David Gaszczyk, Paul Weston and Robert Rendell for their comments. Maryanne Tate Maltby

ix

This page intentionally left blank

PART ONE Fundamental Sciences

1

This page intentionally left blank

Chapter 1 Acoustics

1.1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SOUND 1.1.1 Sound generation Sound requires a source, a medium through which to travel and a detector. The detector is usually a listener but could be a sound measuring device (for example, a sound level meter). Sound is generated by a vibrating object and is transmitted through an elastic medium or substance: gas, liquid or solid. In air, the sound source sets the air particles into vibration, in the same back and forth motion as that of the vibrating sound source. The medium itself is not transferred to the detector; each particle is displaced only a very small distance from its resting position (equilibrium). The energy is passed across the medium as a series of compressions and rarefactions (Figure 1.1). This constitutes a sound wave. In compressions, the air particles move closer together and the air pressure is slightly higher than normal; in rarefactions, the particles move away from each other and the air pressure is slightly lower than normal. The speed of sound varies with the density of the medium through which it travels. The denser the medium, the faster sound travels. For example, the speed of sound in air is approximately 340 metres per second but in water, which is a denser medium, sound travels at approximately 1450 metres per second. Sound becomes weaker with increasing distance from the source. If there are no obstacles to affect the progress of the sound waves, the decrease in intensity will be in accordance with the inverse square law. This states that the intensity varies inversely with the square of the distance from the sound source (Figure 1.2). In other words, doubling the distance decreases the intensity by a factor of 4 (22).

3

4

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 1.1. The tines of the tuning fork move alternately towards and apart from each other causing alternate regions of compression and rarefaction that move outwards through the air.

Figure 1.2. As distance away from the sound source increases, the sound level falls in accordance with the inverse square law.

Acoustics

5

1.1.2 Properties of sound The simplest waveform is a sine wave or sinusoid. A sine wave is produced by simple harmonic motion, where each vibration is repeated back and forth. This motion repeats itself exactly in equal periods of time and is known as periodic motion. Sinusoidal sound waves are very clean or pure sounds and are therefore termed simple or pure tones. A pure tone can be described by three characteristics: frequency, intensity and duration. (a) Frequency The frequency of a sound is denoted by the number of cycles of vibration that occur in one second. A cycle consists of one compression and one rarefaction of air particles. It can perhaps be better visualized as the movement of a pendulum. In a complete cycle, the pendulum would move from its resting position A to a position to one side B, then back through the resting position A to the other side C, and back to the resting position (Figure 1.3). If it takes one second to complete one full cycle, the frequency is 1 cycle per second (cps) or 1 hertz (Hz); 10 Hz, therefore, means 10 cps. Cycles per second are termed hertz after Heinrich Hertz, a nineteenthcentury German physicist. The more cycles that occur in one second, the higher is the frequency of the sound. An electric motor, for example, can readily be heard to produce a higher frequency sound as its speed is increased. Pitch is the subjective attribute of frequency and is closely related to frequency. The higher the frequency, the higher the pitch. However, as pitch is subjective, it cannot be measured directly. The piano produces its lowest note at 27.5 Hz and its highest at 4186 Hz; middle C is 261.63 Hz (Somerfield, 1987). The human ear can detect a

Figure 1.3. A complete cycle of the pendulum is shown by movement from A to B, from B to C and from C back to A.

6

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

much wider frequency range than this and the young healthy ear can perceive a frequency range from approximately 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz (20 kHz). Sounds below this frequency range are called infrasonic and those above this range are called ultrasonic. The wavelength is defined as the distance covered by one complete cycle. Wavelength is inversely proportional to frequency and can be determined using the formula: wavelength (λ) =

speed (v) frequency (f)

As frequency increases, wavelength decreases. The speed of sound in air is approximately 340 metres per second (m/s). So, for example, if the frequency of a sound wave is 850 Hz, the wavelength in air will be: 340 m/s = 0.4 m 850 Hz (b) Period The time required for one cycle is known as the period (Figure 1.4). The relationship between frequency and period can be expressed as: Frequency =

Figure 1.4. One cycle of a pure tone.

1 period

Acoustics

7

(c) Intensity Intensity is defined as the amount of energy transmitted per second per unit area. In the SI system, energy per second is measured in joules per second (J/s) or watts (W), area is measured in square metres (m2), therefore the unit of intensity is the watt per square metre (W/m2). Frequently, we measure the sound pressure level at a given point and not the intensity, although it can be shown that, in free-field conditions, the intensity is proportional to the square of the pressure: intensity α (pressure)2 This is a little beyond the scope of this book so, to avoid confusion, we will consider only the sound pressure level. Sound pressure level is the amount of pressure variation about the mean (shown by ‘amplitude’ in Figure 1.4). The greater the force or energy applied to the vibrating body, the more intense the vibrations. The intensity is governed by the distance the air particles move from their place of rest. With increased force, they will move further and thus cause increased compressions and rarefactions. In the SI system, pressure is expressed in pascals (Pa). A vibrating source sets up small, localized changes in the air pressure. These changes can be so small they are measured in terms of micro pascals (µPa), which are millionths of a pascal. The human ear can accommodate pressure changes from approximately 20 µPa to approximately 20 Pa. In other words, the greatest pressure change the human ear can withstand is a million times greater than that which is just audible. The range of hearing is so great that the numbers involved are very large and it is more convenient to describe intensity using a logarithmic scale – the decibel scale. Decibels (dB) are units of relative intensity. The number of dB describes how much greater is the intensity of a measured sound than a fixed reference level. The dBSPL scale (decibels sound pressure level), for example, uses 0.00002 Pa as its fixed reference level, so that 0 dBSPL = 0.00002 Pa. 0 dBSPL approximates to the minimum audible sound pressure at 1 kHz 30 dBSPL approximates to a whisper 60 dBSPL approximates to quiet conversation 90 dBSPL approximates to a shout 120 dBSPL is uncomfortably loud for most people. Decibels are considered in more detail in section 1.2.

8

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

1.1.3 Complex sounds Pure tones can be produced artificially using a tuning fork or an electronic sine-wave generator, but they rarely occur naturally. Most sounds consist of a number of different tones, although these can be broken down into the component pure tones using frequency analysis. Each component pure tone may vary in amplitude, frequency and phase.

1.1.4 Phase When we consider the phase of a wave, we are simply referring to the position at any point in its cycle. Generally, it is of more relevance to consider phase differences between waves. Phase and phase difference are expressed in degrees (˚), analogous to the mathematical relationship between circles and sine waves. Any circle corresponds to 360˚ rotation. The degrees of rotation are used to denote the position in the cycle, where 0˚ is the starting point, 90˚ is a quarter of the way around the circle, 180˚ is half-way around and so on. Thus, a quarter of a cycle of a (sine) wave is denoted by 90˚, half a cycle by 180˚ and so forth. Tones are exactly out of phase if they differ from the standard starting point by 180˚. Figure 1.5 illustrates tones that are out of phase.

Figure 1.5. Pure tones out of phase by 180˚.

1.1.5 Periodic sounds Complex sounds may have a waveform that repeats itself over time. Such sounds are called periodic. Periodic sounds are musical or harmonic. Musical notes are an example of complex periodic sounds. In such sounds, all frequencies present are harmonics. These are whole number multiples (integers) of the fundamental frequency. The lowest frequency

Acoustics

9

of the tones presented determines the fundamental frequency. A 1 kHz tone has harmonics at 2 kHz, 3 kHz, 4 kHz and so on, although not all the harmonics are necessarily present. Two instruments playing the same note sound different because their sound contains different harmonics, although the fundamental frequency remains the same. The pitch of a note is recognized by its fundamental frequency. Thus middle C, for example, can be recognized regardless of whether it is played on a piano or a violin. Harmonics are denoted by number. The fundamental frequency (f) is the first harmonic (1 × f). The second harmonic is twice the fundamental (2 × f); the third harmonic is three times the fundamental (3 × f). The fundamental frequency does not necessarily have to be heard for recognition. Our minds can determine the fundamental from the pattern of harmonics.

1.1.6 Aperiodic sounds Aperiodic or non-periodic sounds do not have regularly repeating waveforms. They consist of more than one frequency and are not harmonically related. This random and unstable waveform has no stated period or repetition and is perceived as noise (Figure 1.6). Certain particular types of noise may be used in audiometry, for example: • White noise consists of all the frequencies of the audible spectrum present at equal intensities. • Pink noise consists of equal energy per octave (an octave interval is given by the doubling of frequency). This is perceived as a lower frequency noise than white noise since each octave contains equal energy but the octave intervals are wider at higher frequencies resulting in less energy at any single frequency. For example, the octave 250 Hz to 500 Hz contains 250 discrete frequencies, whereas the

Figure 1.6. Waveforms of noise and periodic sound: (a) an aperiodic (or noise) waveform (b) a periodic waveform.

10

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

octave 2 kHz to 4 kHz contains 2000 discrete frequencies; yet each of these contains the same amount of energy.

1.1.7 Wave motion In an environment where there is no interference from reflections (a free sound field or ‘free-field’), sound waves will spread in all directions and gradually lose energy as they move away from the sound source. The intensity of the sound decreases proportionally to the square of the distance from the sound source. This is the inverse square law (Figure 1.2) and in practice it means that a doubling of distance will produce a reduction of 6 dB in the sound pressure level. In an enclosed field, hard surfaces will reflect sound waves. Sound reflections can increase the sound level within a room, making it easier to hear, as long as the reflections follow the original sound very rapidly. When the time between the incident wave (sound source) and the reflection is prolonged to a degree that is noticeable, it is termed reverberation. A reflected sound that occurs some time after the original is heard as an echo. When a reflection follows closely, it adds to the direct sound; reverberation follows with a short time delay, which may be destructive to intelligibility; with a greater delay, a distinct echo may be heard. In a large, empty room, the reverberation effect may last for several seconds, which will make speech indistinct. Soft furnishings will absorb sound and help to reduce reverberation. Reverberation is particularly destructive to intelligibility for hearing aid users. It is not, however, desirable to cut out all reflection (except for research purposes, as in an anechoic chamber) as this makes the room very quiet and ‘dead’. Standing waves are caused when incident waves and reflected waves meet and combine to affect the sound level at that particular point. The interference that this creates may be constructive (increase the sound level) or destructive (decrease the sound level) (Figure 1.5). When a standing wave is formed within the confines of an object, resonance occurs as, for example, in a pipe or in the ear canal. The length of the pipe or canal will affect the frequency of the standing waves formed within it. For example, if the length of a pipe is halved, the fundamental frequency of the air column within it is doubled and the resonant frequency will rise by one octave.

1.1.8 Warble tones Warble tones are often used in free-field audiometry to reduce the risk of standing waves affecting test results. A warble tone is a frequency modulated tone. The tone has a base or centre frequency, around which it varies. For example, a 1 kHz warble

Acoustics

11

tone might vary from 950 Hz to 1050 Hz, which would be a frequency deviation of ±50 Hz or 5%. The tone therefore consists of frequencies above and below its centre frequency and it changes rapidly between these limits. The number of frequency changes occurring in one second is termed the ‘modulation rate’ and is itself quoted in hertz (Hz).

1.2 THE MEASUREMENT OF SOUND 1.2.1 Decibel scales The decibel scales express a ratio between two numbers. Logarithms are used as a convenient method of expressing a ratio. A logarithm (log) tells us how many times the base number is multiplied by itself, 102 means 10 to the power of 2, that is, 10 is multiplied by itself once, and 103 is multiplied by itself twice, as follows: 101 = 10 therefore log10(10) = 1 2 10 = 10 × 10 therefore log10(100) = 2 103 = 10 × 10 × 10 therefore log10(1000) = 3 The wide range of intensities involved is compressed by transforming it to a logarithmic scale. The unit of relative intensity is the bel, named after Alexander Graham Bell, who first patented the telephone. One bel equals ten decibels. The bel is rather too large a unit to reflect the accuracy required for audiometry. In measuring sound intensity or sound pressure level, the decibel scale is therefore used. Any tenfold increase in sound pressure corresponds to 20 dB. For example, a noise level of 80 dB has a sound pressure that is 1000 times greater (103) than a noise of 20 dB. Subjectively, 10 dB appears as a doubling of loudness, whereas 1 dB is equivalent to the smallest change of intensity we can detect in ideal conditions. In mathematical terms, for a measured sound pressure P1 (in pascals) the dBSPL value is given by the formula: 20 log10

( ) P1 Pref

where Pref = the audiological reference pressure = 0.00002 pascals. So, for example, if: P1 = 0.002 Pa

12

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

using the formula: dBSPL = 20 log10

( ) P1 Pref

gives us 20 log10

(

)

0.002 0.00002

= 20 log10 100 = 20 × 2 (since the log of 100 to base 10 = 2) = 40 dBSPL. For those who are less able mathematically, it may be helpful to show the relationship between dBSPL and pascals as follows: Sound pressure level (dBSPL) 120 100 80 60 40 20 0

Sound pressure (Pa) 20.0 2.0 0.2 0.02 0.002 0.0002 0.00002

Equivalent to

Discomfort Pneumatic drill Shouting Quiet conversation Loud whispering Rustling leaves (Standard audiological reference)

The range of pressures to which the average normally hearing person is sensitive starts at just above 0 dBSPL (0.00002 Pa) and has a limit, where sound becomes uncomfortably loud, of 120 dBSPL (20 Pa). This range is called the dynamic range of hearing. Since decibels express a ratio between two sound pressures, their values in decibels cannot simply be added together. Two sound sources of 40 dBSPL, for example, do not equal 80 dBSPL; in fact, this results in an increase of 3 dB, producing 43 dBSPL overall. To be meaningful, a ratio must have a reference level. It is pointless to say that a sound is 10 times greater unless we also state what it is greater than. In audiometry, a number of different decibel scales are used and each has its own reference level. For example, the dBSPL scale (dB sound pressure level) expresses the pressure of a sound in relation to the

Acoustics

13

standard audiological reference pressure, 0.00002 Pa, which is the minimum pressure required to cause the sensation of hearing in the midfrequency region. The dBSPL scale compares with a flat or ‘absolute’ reference: it takes no account of the way hearing varies with frequency. Other decibel scales used include dB(A), dB(B), dB(C), dB(D) and dBHL. A range of scales are used because the human ear is not equally sensitive at all frequencies or intensities. The different decibel scales attempt to reflect these changes. For audiometric purposes dB(A) and dBHL (dB hearing level) scales are important. The dBHL scale is used when sounds are presented monaurally through air conduction headphones or bone conduction transducers. The dB(A) scale is used when the sound level is presented ‘free-field’ in a room. The two scales are very similar but the dB(A) scale provides values that are about 4 dB greater than dBHL values. The SPL (sound pressure level) values for audiometric zero (0 dBHL) for people aged 18 to 30 years at each frequency are given in BS EN ISO 389-1: 2000. The values are the recommended equivalent threshold sound pressure levels (RETSPL) in a 9A acoustic coupler. The RETSPL values provide average minimum audible pressure (MAP) under headphones, which may be illustrated as a hearing threshold curve (Figure 1.7) or a table providing values at the various audiometric frequencies (Table 1.1).

Figure 1.7. A diagrammatic representation of the dynamic range of normal human hearing.

14

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Table 1.1. Recommended reference equivalent threshold sound pressure levels (RETSPL) in a 9A coupler (British Standards Institution, 2000) Frequency (Hz)

RETSPL dB (Reference 20 µPa)

125 250 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 6k 8k

45.0 25.5 11.5 7.0 9.0 10.0 9.5 15.5 13.0

Pattern of earphone: Telephonics TDH39 with MX41/ AR cushion

The values were established on the basis of a statistical average obtained by testing many otologically normal people between the ages of 18 and 30 years. A similar method was used to obtain the minimum audible field (MAF), which sets out thresholds obtained binaurally, in response to sound pressures presented through loudspeakers. Thresholds taken from the MAF curve are an average of about 6 dB more sensitive than the normal MAP thresholds. The normal increase observed in the threshold of hearing with age can be found in ISO 7029 ‘Statistical distribution of hearing thresholds as a function of age’.

1.2.2 The sound level meter A sound level meter is a precision instrument used for sound measurement. A precision microphone converts the sound signal to an electrical signal, which is amplified by a pre-amplifier before being processed. The signal may be displayed in dBSPL or it may pass through a weighting network. This is an electronic circuit that varies in sensitivity across the frequency range to simulate the sensitivity of the human ear (Figure 1.8). The weighting networks are termed A, B, C and D. The A weighting network corresponds to an inverted equal loudness contour (section 1.4.2) at low sound pressure levels. The B network corresponds to medium SPLs and the C network to high SPLs. The D network is used for aircraft noise measurements.

Acoustics

15

Figure 1.8. Constituent parts of a sound level meter using the A weighting network.

1.3 THE AUDIOMETER 1.3.1 Introduction Hearing is a subjective sensation and therefore cannot truly be ‘measured’. Audiometry measures the stimulus that causes the sensation of hearing. An audiometer is an instrument of comparison, which indicates the difference between the sound pressure level required to produce hearing in the individual under test and that required to produce hearing in an average normal young person. An audiometer generates pure tones at specified points within a restricted range of frequencies considered important for communication, usually the octave intervals from 125 Hz to 8 kHz. An octave is a doubling of frequency. Most audiometers also produce tones at the half-octave intervals, 750 Hz, 1.5 kHz, 3 kHz and 6 kHz. The sound level can also be varied, usually in 5 dB steps, from –10 dBHL to 110 dBHL or more. An interrupter switch controls the duration of the tones. The audiometer is provided with two types of transducer: a pair of headphones and a bone vibrator. A block diagram of a basic audiometer is shown in Figure 1.9.

1.3.2 Audiometer calibration An audiometer must be accurate to be of value and, to this end, all audiometers are calibrated to British Standards when new and the calibration should be re-checked at least once a year. The standard BS EN 606451: 1995 defines the levels of pure-tone audiometer accuracy with which manufacturers should comply.

16

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 1.9. Constituent parts of an audiometer.

The main points of this standard, for our purposes, can be summarized as follows: • The attenuator 5 dB steps must be correct within ±1 dB. • Unwanted sound from the audiometer should be inaudible up to and including the dial setting 50 dBHL over the main frequency range. • The narrow band noise filters must be centred on the frequency (according to a given table). • The rise and fall times of the signal tone for air conduction should not exceed 200 ms and for bone conduction should be at least 20 ms. • The hearing level (reference tone) must be accurate to within ±3 dB from 500 Hz to 4 kHz and to within ±5 dB at the remaining frequencies. • Total harmonic distortion (THD) should not exceed 2.5% for air conduction and 5.5% for bone conduction. Laboratory calibration is carried out for the complete audiometer. The transducers (headphones and bone vibrator) are a part of the audiometer and should not be exchanged unless the audiometer is recalibrated with the new transducers. In addition to calibration, the audiometer should be checked daily as described in the following section.

1.3.3 Daily audiometer checks • Straighten any tangled leads. Ensure that all connections are firm and giving good contact. Flex the leads for possible intermittency. • Check that all knobs and switches are secure and function in a silent, smooth and click-free manner.

Acoustics

17

• Check function of response button. • Check tension of AC and BC headbands. • Check output levels for all tones at 10–15 dB above own known threshold for AC (each earphone) and BC. Your own audiogram should be used for this approximate calibration check. • Check at 60 dBHL for all tones on AC (each earphone) for noticeable distortion, intermittency and so forth. Repeat at 40 dBHL for BC. • Check masking noise over a range of outputs, also loudness balance and other facilities, if they are to be used. • Check battery condition, if appropriate. • Generally ensure that the audiometer and all its attachments are clean. Wipe earphones and BC receiver with clean, dry tissues. Alcohol wipes may also be used as necessary.

1.3.4 Rise and fall times The audiometer output signal is not an instantaneous event. The signal rises until it reaches its maximum and falls off in a similar manner when the tone is switched off (Figure 1.10). Rise time is defined as the time taken for the signal to rise from –60 dB to within 1 dB of its steady state. Fall time is defined as the time taken for the signal to decay by 60 dB from its steady state. This rise and fall (decay) should be correctly timed or it may affect the results of the audiometric test. Too slow a rise time may result in erroneously poor thresholds, because this does not elicit the maximum on-effect of the ear. (The oneffect is the phenomenon whereby the initial onset of a sound is, subjectively, the loudest).

Figure 1.10. The rise and fall envelope of test tones. Between the dotted lines sound should rise or fall in a progressive manner. (After BS EN 60645-1: 1995.)

18

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Too brief a rise time produces an overshoot that may be heard as a click. This may result in erroneously good thresholds if the patient responds to the click rather than the test tone. An overshoot should never be greater than 1 dB.

1.4 THE PSYCHOLOGICAL PROPERTIES OF SOUND 1.4.1 Psychoacoustics The study of the psychological properties of sound is known as psychoacoustics. The way in which we hear sound is subjective and cannot be directly measured. Subjective qualities are compared with reference levels obtained by averaging the judgements of a large number of normally hearing people. Sensorineural hearing loss may reduce the ability to discriminate pitch. It may also increase the sensation of loudness, such that a small increase in objective intensity results in a large increase in subjective loudness. This abnormal loudness growth is termed recruitment.

1.4.2 Loudness Loudness is the subjective perception of sound in terms of intensity. The relative loudness of pure tones is normally expressed as equal loudness contours. Each contour represents sounds that appear equally loud. Each contour or curve has a loudness value given in phons, which can be defined as the sound pressure level of a 1 kHz tone judged to be of equal loudness. The 40 phon curve, for example (Figure 1.7), represents pure tones across the frequency range, which are judged equally loud as a 1 kHz tone at an intensity of 40 dBSPL. An inverted 40 phon curve is used for the A weighting scale of a sound level meter. ISO 389-7 gives normal equal loudness contours. Another unit of loudness, the sone, is used for the purpose of providing a scale to define loudness. This numerical scale of loudness is based on judgements of average listeners as to when sounds are ‘twice as loud’ or ‘half as loud’. One sone is taken to be the loudness of a 1 kHz tone at 40 dBSPL. Thus, 1 sone has a loudness level of 40 phons. A sound that has a loudness of 2 sones is one that is judged to be twice as loud. In terms of sound pressure level, an increase of 10 dB corresponds to a doubling of loudness.

Acoustics

19

1.4.3 Pitch Pitch is the subjective perception of sound in terms of frequency. The unit of pitch used is the mel. One thousand mels represents the pitch of a 1 kHz tone presented at 40 phons. The ability to recognize the pitch of sounds of different frequencies is known as ‘frequency resolution’. The average normal person can discriminate a frequency difference where a change of 3 Hz occurs, although this varies across the audible spectrum.

1.4.4 Temporal integration The effect of duration on the recognition of sound is known as ‘temporal integration’. Tone presentations that are very brief may not be heard. The shorter a tone presentation, the more intense must be that sound if it is to be perceived. Duration also has an effect on the apparent pitch of a sound. Tones that are of very short duration will be perceived as a click.

1.5 SUMMARY For sound to exist it must be in our audible frequency range, which is normally 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz, and there must be an elastic medium to convey the vibrations. Simple harmonic motion produces a pure tone, which is a sound of one frequency. Sound is created by a vibrating object, which produces alternate compressions and rarefactions in the medium, which is usually air. The frequency of vibration is calculated by the number of vibrations or cycles in 1 second. The time taken for 1 cycle is known as the period. The unit of frequency is hertz; 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second. The decibel scale is used to describe the intensity of sound. Decibels are not absolute units of measurement but provide a ratio between a measured quantity and an agreed reference level, which must be specified. An audiometer provides a comparison between the hearing of the subject under test and average normal hearing as set out in the relevant British Standard. Audiometers must be regularly checked and calibrated to ensure accuracy. Sound can be measured objectively in terms of frequency, intensity or pressure and duration. Hearing is subjective and may be described in terms of pitch and loudness.

20

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

FURTHER READING Foreman, JEK (1990) Sound Analysis and Noise Control. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. Moore, BCJ (1997) An Introduction to the Psychology of Hearing. 4 edn. San Diego: Academic Press. Pickles, JD (1988) An Introduction to the Physiology of Hearing. 2 edn. London: Academic Press. Speaks, CE (1992) Introduction to Sound. London: Chapman & Hall.

Chapter 2 Anatomy and physiology of the ear

2.1 ANATOMY OF THE EAR The ear (Figure 2.1) can be thought of as consisting of three parts known as the outer, the middle and the inner ear.

Sebaceous, apocrine and ceruminous glands

Hairs

Figure 2.1. The outer, middle and inner ear.

21

22

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

2.1.1 The outer ear The outer or external ear is divided into two parts: the pinna or auricle and the external auditory meatus. (a) The pinna The first part of the external ear is the pinna or auricle. This is formed of irregular-shaped cartilage covered by firmly adherent skin. The dependent lobule is mainly fat. Anteriorly the cartilage forms the tragus, which covers the entrance of the external auditory meatus. The main anatomical features of the pinna are shown in Figure 2.2. Attached to the pinna are three vestigial muscles, all supplied by the facial nerve. In some animals they function to direct the pinna towards the direction of a sound source but in humans they are mostly redundant.

Figure 2.2. Anatomical features of a right pinna.

(b) The external auditory meatus The cartilage of the pinna extends inwards to form the first one-third of the external auditory meatus (ear canal). This horizontal curved canal (Figure 2.3) is usually about 2.5 cm long in an adult. It is closed at its medial end by the tympanic membrane (eardrum). The outer one-third curves inwards, slightly upwards and backwards, and is lined by skin richly endowed with

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

23

hairs and apocrine (sweat), sebaceous (oil) and ceruminous (wax) glands. The inner two-thirds of the canal is bony, formed from the squamous temporal bone. This part of the canal runs downwards and forwards and is lined with thin, closely adherent skin, largely devoid of hairs and glands. About 5 mm from the tympanic membrane the floor of the canal dips to form a recess; debris often collects here and is difficult to remove.

Tympanic membrane

Figure 2.3. Diagrammatic representation of the external auditory meatus.

The external ear has an extensive sensory nerve supply from branches of three cranial nerves (V, VII and X). The inner part of the canal is particularly sensitive and can produce a cough reflex when stimulated due to its innervation from the tenth cranial (Vagus) nerve. It is important to remember the close proximity to the external auditory meatus of three cranial structures: the mastoid air cells (behind), the middle cranial fossa (above) and the temporomandibular (jaw) joint (in front). Injury or infection in the canal can extend to involve these.

2.1.2 The middle ear cleft The middle ear cleft is made up of five anatomical parts: the tympanic cavity, the auditory or Eustachian tube, the aditus, the mastoid antrum and the mastoid air cells. (a) The tympanic cavity The tympanic cavity is the part of the middle ear cleft, which is usually thought of as ‘the middle ear’. It is separated from the external ear by the tympanic membrane (eardrum) and from the internal ear by the round and oval windows of the cochlea (see 2.1.3). It has connections with the

24

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

nasopharynx via the Eustachian tube and with the mastoid cavity via the aditus. It houses the ossicles and their muscular attachments and has many important anatomical landmarks. The cavity (Figure 2.4) may be thought of as a narrow room, the height and length of which is about 15 mm, with medial and lateral walls that curve inwards towards the centre; this makes them about 2 mm apart in the middle and 6 mm apart at the roof. The lateral wall is formed mainly by the tympanic membrane. This translucent membrane is set at an angle of about 55°, such that the roof and posterior wall of the external auditory meatus are shorter than the floor and anterior wall. The membrane consists of three layers – that is, a middle (incomplete) fibrous layer, which is covered with skin on the outer surface, and the mucous membrane of the middle-ear cavity on the inner surface. The area of drum containing the fibrous layer is known as the pars tensa (Figure 2.5) and, where this is deficient, the pars flaccida. The

Figure 2.4. Diagrammatic representation of the tympanic cavity.

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

25

handle of the first auditory ossicle, the malleus, is attached in the centre of the pars tensa on the medial surface and produces a small elevation on the drum, easily seen with an otoscope. The medial wall separates the middle ear from the inner ear. It has a central bulge, the promontory, which is formed by the first turn of the cochlea. Above and behind the promontory lies the oval window, which is closed by the footplate of the stapes, the third of the auditory ossicles. This window separates the middle ear from the scala vestibuli of the cochlea. Below and behind the promontory is the round window, which separates the middle ear from the scala tympani; this is closed by a fibrous disc. The seventh cranial (facial) nerve passes across the medial wall, lying in a bony canal above the promontory. The anterior wall has two important landmarks: • The opening of the Eustachian tube, which connects the middle ear with the nasopharynx. • The bony canal for the tensor tympani muscle. This muscle attaches to the malleus and tenses the eardrum. The tensor tympani is innervated by the fifth cranial (trigeminal) nerve.

Long process of incus

Lateral or short process of the malleus

Figure 2.5. Right tympanic membrane. Broken lines indicate the ossicles in the middle ear cavity.

26

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

High up on the posterior wall is the aditus, which connects the middle ear cavity with the mastoid antrum. Below this is the pyramid, a projection of bone from which the second muscle of the middle ear, the stapedius, arises. This muscle is attached to the third ossicle, the stapes, and is supplied with motor fibres from the seventh nerve (facial), which passes down this wall. A branch of the seventh nerve, the chorda tympani, comes out through a small hole lateral to the pyramid and runs across the eardrum to the tongue. A further description of the middle ear muscles will be found in section 13.2.7. The roof separates the cavity from the middle cranial fossa and is formed from just a thin plate of the petrous temporal bone. The floor is only a thin plate of bone. Below and behind is the jugular foramen, through which passes the major vein of the head and neck. Below and in front is the canal containing the carotid artery. This four-walled ‘room’ is normally filled with air and contains the three auditory ossicles (Figure 2.6) that serve to transmit sound energy from the tympanic membrane across the middle ear cavity to the cochlea. The first, the malleus (hammer), is attached to the tympanic membrane laterally and articulates with the incus (anvil) medially. The incus has a body and two processes, one of which articulates with the stapes, the other rests on the posterior wall. Finally the part of the stapes (stirrup), known as the footplate, closes the oval window and therefore communicates with the perilymph of the cochlea. The two middle ear muscles, the

Figure 2.6. The middle ear ossicles.

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

27

tensor tympani and the stapedius, have already been described; these modify the transmission of sound energy across the ossicular chain. As with the external auditory meatus, it is very important to remember the close proximity of the middle ear cleft to several important anatomical structures: • the temporal lobe of the brain lies above and behind is the cerebellum, both separated only by a layer of bone; • the facial nerve passes through the cleft in a bony canal, the bone may be very thin; • both major vessels of the head and neck, the carotid artery and the jugular vein, run close to the floor of the cleft; • lying medially is the inner ear. All these are susceptible to spread of infection or disease from the middle ear. (b) The Eustachian tube In an adult the Eustachian tube is about 3.5 cm long. It connects the nasopharynx with the tympanic cavity and in health provides regular ventilation and mucosal drainage of the middle ear. It also, however, provides a pathway for disease to spread from the nose and throat to the ear. It is normally closed at rest but opens temporarily during yawning or swallowing. At its lower end it is formed of cartilage and membrane. It opens behind the nasal cavity and then passes upwards and outwards and enters the tympanic cavity. The upper one-third of the tube is bony. In a young child the Eustachian tube is shorter, narrower, more horizontal and less rigid and is much more prone to dysfunction. (c) The mastoid antrum and mastoid air cells A short tube, the aditus, leads from the back of the tympanic cavity to the mastoid antrum. The antrum is a cavity within the part of the bony skull known as the petrous temporal bone. It communicates posteriorly through several openings with the mastoid air cells (Figure 2.7). The number and size of air cells varies considerably among individuals. The mastoid air cells are very susceptible to spread of disease from the rest of the middle ear cleft. The whole of the middle ear cleft is lined with a continuous layer of cells (epithelium), some of which provide lubrication (in the Eustachian tube), and others of which are normally flattened and do not produce mucus (for example, in the tympanic cavity). These cells are prone to change in shape and function if the cleft is unhealthy.

28

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 2.7. A deep section of the middle ear, showing the mastoid antrum and the path of the facial nerve.

2.1.3 The inner ear The inner ear, known as the labyrinth because of its complicated structure, lies entirely within the temporal bone of the skull. It comprises a membranous sac filled with a clear fluid (endolymph) contained within a bony cavity. The space between the sac and the bone is also filled with fluid (perilymph). Endolymph is very similar to intracellular fluid and is therefore high in potassium and low in sodium; conversely, perilymph is similar to cerebrospinal fluid and, as with all extracellular fluid, is high in sodium and low in potassium. (a) The bony labyrinth The bony labyrinth is a continuous cavity that communicates functionally with the middle ear via the oval and round windows. It begins medially with the cochlea, which is about 1 mm wide at its base and 4 mm high and is best understood by considering the shell of a snail. Looking into the empty shell it is a tube that twists around a central pillar; the cochlea does exactly this, spiralling around a central bony pillar, the modiolus, for two and three-quarter turns. From the modiolus, a narrow plate of bone, the spiral lamina, projects into the cavity of the tube along its whole length, partly dividing it into an upper and lower chamber. The basal end of the cochlea opens into the middle part of the cavity called the vestibule. There are several openings from the vestibule: two into the middle ear cleft, one closed by the foot of the stapes and its annular ligament (the oval window), the other by a fibrous disc (the round window); five into the three semicircular canals; and one into the intracranial cavity by a bony aqueduct allowing drainage of perilymph into the cerebrospinal fluid.

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

29

The semicircular canals lie posteriorly and each forms two-thirds of a circle. They lie in three planes at right angles to each other; the anterior and posterior canals are set vertically and the lateral horizontally. (b) The membranous labyrinth This saccular membrane (Figure 2.8) forms a series of communicating sacs and ducts lying within the bony labyrinth. The utricle and saccule lie within the vestibule. They communicate with the three semicircular ducts, the Y-shaped endolymphatic duct (which ends in the endolymphatic sac) and the duct of the cochlea. The whole labyrinth is filled with endolymph. The cochlear duct extends along the bony tube lying on the spiral lamina and stretches across to be attached to the outer wall by the spiral ligaments. This forms a triangular-shaped channel with its apex at the modiolus, which effectively forms three chambers within the cochlea (Figure 2.9). The middle chamber formed by the duct and therefore filled with endolymph is called the scala media. The upper chamber is called the scala vestibuli and the lower is the scala tympani; as these lie outside the membranous labyrinth they contain perilymph. These two connect at the apex of the cochlea via a small gap, the helicotrema, and at the basal end of the cochlea they end in the vestibule, the scala tympani at the round window and the scala vestibuli at the oval window. The upper wall of the membranous duct is called the vestibular or Reissner’s membrane and the lower wall, which extends from the free edge of the spiral lamina, is the basilar membrane. Lining the outer side of the duct is the stria vascularis,

Figure 2.8. The right membranous labyrinth.

30

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

which maintains the ionic concentration of the endolymph; as the name suggests, this area is very vascular being rich in capillaries. (c) The organ of Corti The organ of Corti is a specialized structure of cells that forms the sensory organ of hearing. It is situated within the scala media on the basilar membrane (Figure 2.9). Between the basilar membrane and the tectorial membrane are hair cells, so called because they have fine hair-like structures, stereocilia, projecting from their upper surface. These cells are arranged into a single row of inner hair cells and three to five rows of outer hair cells, separated from each other by a rigid triangular arch called Corti’s arch. Within this arch is cortilymph, a fluid that chemically resembles perilymph. The specialised hair cells are themselves surrounded by various supporting cells. Electron studies have shown the shape of the inner and outer hair cells to be different and also the arrangement of their stereocilia. The inner cells are fatter at the base, resembling a tenpin, and have about 40 stereocilia in two rows forming a double V, with the apex directed away from the modiolus. The outer cells are more cylindrical, resembling a test tube, and have more stereocilia, about 140, arranged to form a wide triple ‘W’; again the apices are directed away from the modiolus. The stereocilia gradually

Figure 2.9. Cross-section of the cochlear duct.

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

31

reduce in height, the tallest being on the outside of the V or W. Lying over the top of the whole structure is the reticular lamina and above this a gelatinous membrane, the tectorial membrane, with which the outer hair cells make contact and into which the longest of the stereocilia are embedded. The tectorial membrane is attached to the inner side of the cochlea just above the spiral lamina. The estimated number of hair cells per ear is about 3,500 inner hair cells and about 12,000 outer hair cells (Wright, 2001). The shape of the organ of Corti, and the basilar membrane on which it lies, changes along the length of the cochlea, being widest (and most flaccid) at the apex and becoming progressively narrower (and stiffer) towards the base. The nerve supply to the cochlea is via the eighth cranial nerve (vestibulocochlear). There are both afferent nerves, carrying information to the brain, and efferent nerves, taking information from the brain, serving the cochlea. Efferent nerves are mainly motor in function. They are fewer (about 1800) than the afferent fibres; approximately half connect with the inner cells, and half with the outer cells. They also differ in that the terminal branches (dendrites) serving the inner hair cells end on the dendrites of the afferent fibres, and those serving the outer cells tend to envelop the base of the cell and its afferent fibres. Each inner hair cell has about 20 afferent nerve fibres synapsing with it, which account for 90% to 95% of the 30,000 to 40,000 afferent fibres leaving the cochlea. The remaining 5% to 10% synapse with the outer cells, each fibre being heavily branched and serving up to ten hair cells. The cell bodies of the afferent nerves are found grouped together in the spiral ganglion. (d) The vestibular organ of balance Each of the semicircular canals expands into an ampulla at one end. It is here that a special sensory epithelium called the crista is found. A patch of similar epithelium is found at the macula of the utricle and saccule, the former being on a horizontal plane and the latter vertical. Together these form the vestibular receptor organs. There are two types of specialized cells, type 1 and type 2. Type 1 cells are flask-like and surrounded at the base by a nerve ending shaped like a chalice. Type 2 cells are straighter and more cylindrical with no nerve chalice. Protruding from the cuticular plate is a bundle of sensory ‘hairs’. This bundle consists of one kinocilium, an additional longer and thicker hair, and 50 to 110 stereocilia. These project into a mucus-like substance, which is domeshaped in the ampullae and cylindrical in the utricle; a number of calcareous particles called the otoliths are also contained here. The stereocilia become progressively smaller with increased distance from the kinocilium. When there is displacement towards the kinocilium the cell is

32

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

depolarized and produces an increased electrical discharge rate in the afferent nerve fibres; when displaced away from the kinocilium there is a decreased discharge rate. As with the cochlea, there are both afferent and efferent fibres supplying the vestibular sensory cells. These fibres gather together to become the vestibular branch of the eighth nerve. 2.1.4 The pharynx The pharynx (Figure 2.10) is a fibromuscular tube that forms the upper part of the respiratory and digestive tract (see also Figure 4.3); in an adult the whole is about 10 cm long. It opens into the nose, mouth and larynx and is thus divided downwards into three parts: the nasopharynx, the oropharynx and the laryngopharynx. The nasopharynx opens anteriorly into the nasal fossae, bounded above by the base of the skull and below by the soft palate. The lower opening of the Eustachian tube is situated in the lateral wall and immediately adjacent is the nasopharyngeal tonsil (adenoids). The isthmus of the nasopharynx leads from the oropharynx and is closed during swallowing by raising the soft palate and contracting the palatopharyngeal muscles. The oropharynx opens anteriorly into the mouth and is bounded above by the soft palate and below by the upper border of the epiglottis. The only major anatomical structures are the palatine tonsils, which lie between the muscular faucial pillars on the lateral walls. The laryngopharynx opens anteriorly into the larynx through a sloping laryngeal inlet. It is bounded above by the epiglottis and below by the cricoid cartilage. The pyriform fossae are small recesses lying on each side bounded by cartilaginous and membranous folds. Collectively the scattered lymphoid tissue throughout the nasopharynx forms a protective ‘ring’, known as Waldeyer’s ring, which helps prevent the spread of infection into the middle ear and lower respiratory tract.

2.2 THE PHYSIOLOGY OF HEARING The ear is a remarkable device that is able to detect, collect, amplify and encode acoustic information in order to transmit it to the centres of the brain where it can be decoded and utilized by the listener. For physiological purposes the ear can be thought of as two functional pieces of apparatus; one that conducts the sound and another that perceives or ‘analyses’ the sound reaching it.

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

33

Figure 2.10. The pharynx.

2.2.1 The conduction of sound This apparatus consists of the pinna, the external auditory canal, the tympanic membrane, the chain of ossicles and the cochlear fluids. (a) The pinna The prime function of the pinna is to act as a sound collection device. It also aids localization of sound in both the horizontal and vertical planes. The shape of the pinna enables it to funnel the sound towards the external meatus and its forward-tilted angle helps to focus on sound from the front. The pinna also amplifies the sound signal slightly, providing gain of about 5 dB, depending on the frequency of the sound. Vertical localization is helped by the time delay between the main signal and the pinna echoes. This can be as efficient monaurally as binaurally.

34

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The echoes result from reflections of sound within the pinna; sound arriving from above will produce an echo faster than that from below, at about 100 and 300 microseconds respectively. Horizontal localization is mainly a function of balanced binaural hearing and is due to: • The head shadow effect (see also section 9.1.3). This arises when short wavelength sound, that is the higher frequencies above approximately 1500 Hz, are attenuated by reflection off the head. An average intensity difference of about 6 dB occurs between the two ears in this way. The longer wavelength lower frequencies tend to bend around the head (diffract) so are not attenuated significantly. • Difference in time of arrival. This has an effect on the lower frequencies, which bend around the head to reach the opposite ear. A difference of about 600 microseconds will arise between the ears. • Phase difference. As a consequence of difference in time of arrival, sound waves will be at different phases in their progression. This provides useful localization information for sounds below 1500 Hz – that is those with a wavelength greater than the distance between the ears. (b) The external auditory meatus The ear canal has two main functions. Firstly, it is involved in protection; the cerumen and hairs along its outer lining help to protect the ear from foreign bodies and to prevent dirt from reaching the tympanic membrane. Being curved, it can also protect the drum and middle ear from trauma. Secondly, the canal acts as a resonance tube. The average canal is about 2.5 cm long, and at this length the resonant frequency lies at about 3 kHz. Sound around this frequency is amplified, usually by about 10 dB to 15 dB, although wide inter-individual variations do occur. (c) The middle ear Once the sound has reached the tympanic membrane, the alternating compressions and rarefactions of the sound wave move the drum in and out and with it the handle of the malleus. The actual movement of the drum is quite complex and varies with different frequencies. The incus moves with the malleus, rocking on a linear axis running through the neck of the malleus and the body and short process of the incus. These movements are transmitted to the stapes, which also has a complex mode of movement, sometimes in and out as a piston or more of a rocking action; this, too, is frequency and intensity dependent.

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

35

The function of the middle ear is to conduct sound to the cochlea efficiently. In order to do this it must overcome the impedance mismatch between air and the cochlear fluids. It takes considerably more force to disturb fluid molecules than those of air and the middle ear acts as a transformer to build up the pressure to a sufficient level. The overall gain is between 25 dB and 30 dB. This is achieved in several ways: • Areal ratio. The tympanic membrane has a much larger area than the oval window, 65 mm2 and 3.2 mm2 respectively, which represents a ratio of 20:1. The effective area of the drum, that is excluding the pars flaccida, is about two-thirds of the total, giving an actual ratio of about 14:1. The force is therefore concentrated on to a much smaller area. • Leverage action. Due to the relative position of the ossicles, the malleus and incus tend to move together as a single unit with the effective fulcrum lying nearer to the stapes. This produces an increase in leverage at the stapes footplate of 1.32:1. • Characteristics of the tympanic membrane itself. The conical shape of the drum tends to concentrate sound energy, particularly high frequencies, at the umbo. As the drum is set at an oblique angle in the meatus, this effectively increases the surface area. These contributions are fairly minimal. The two muscles of the middle ear, the stapedius and the tensor tympani, have an important role to play in the conductive function of the middle ear. They produce an increase in the impedance of the ossicular chain by introducing stiffness into the system. The overall acoustic impedance of the middle ear is dependent on the resistance or friction, which is independent of frequency, and reactance (a combination of stiffness and mass), which is frequency dependent. A system with high reactance due to stiffness will impede the lower frequencies far more than the higher frequencies. The more important of the two muscles is the stapedius. On contraction, this pulls backwards and slightly outwards, thus reducing movement of the stapes in the oval window. This is most effective for lower frequency sounds. In normally hearing ears, pure tone stimuli between the range 70 dB to 90 dB above threshold will cause the muscle to contract in both the ipsilateral and the contralateral ear; the level may be lower for noise. The predictable nature of this response, the stapedial reflex, is used diagnostically (section 13.2.7). More reliable contraction is obtained below 250 Hz and attenuation here can be in the order of 20 dB to 30 dB. Above 1000 Hz it becomes unreliable, producing minimal attenuation.

36

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The tensor tympani contracts as part of the overall ‘startle’ response. The muscle requires sound at high intensity to produce contraction, which then pulls forwards and slightly inwards, tensing the drum and producing more reflection of sound. The tensor tympani will also contract following tactile stimuli, such as puffing air on the cornea or touching the meatus. It is less predictable than the stapedial reflex but at high sound levels it is difficult to separate the two responses. The reflexes serve to protect the ear from high-intensity sound. However, this is ineffective with very transient noise, such as gunfire, as there is a delay in muscle contraction. There is certainly a function in protecting the ears from continuous acoustic trauma and from one’s own voice when shouting. The reflex is also thought to improve speech intelligibility in noise, as the higher frequencies are attenuated less and the masking effect is thus reduced. Most conduction of sound to the inner ear is by the route described, across the middle ear; this is called air conduction. Some sound energy, however, is transmitted directly to the cochlea through the bones of the skull, bypassing the middle ear. This fact is used clinically to assess the ability of the inner ear to hear sound without any interference from the outer or middle ear functions. Bone conduction is one of the normal routes of hearing for some sound, particularly for hearing one’s own voice. The cochlea is stimulated by bone conduction in three ways: • Direct stimulation from vibrations of the skull. The round window is less rigid than the oval window, so pressure release is possible; this is the compression effect. • The natural resonance of the ossicular chain (around 2kHz) adds to sound reaching the cochlea directly via the skull. This is known as the inertial effect. The effect is lost with otosclerosis (Carhart’s notch). • Sound radiates into the meatus and produces pseudo-air conduction. This is linked with the occlusion effect, where occlusion of the meatus produces an enhancement of low frequency sound within the meatus, together with a reduction in masking by ambient noise. Malformation, damage or disease in any part of the conduction apparatus produces a conductive hearing loss.

2.2.2 The perception of sound The apparatus for perception of sound is the sense organ of hearing, the organ of Corti, contained in the cochlea. Here sound is first analysed into its component frequencies before being relayed to the auditory areas of the brain via the cochlear nerve.

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

37

Cochlear function can be thought of as two essential processes, transmission and transduction. Transmission is the transference of acoustic energy from the oval window to the organ of Corti. Transduction is the means by which this sound energy is converted to electrical impulses in the auditory nerve fibres. (a) The transmission process The theories of von Békésy, first described in 1943, still form the basis of our understanding of this process. His ‘travelling wave theory’ describes how vibrations at the oval window of a frequency greater than 20 Hz, set up a wave along the basilar membrane beginning at the base of the cochlea and travelling towards the apex. At some point, the wave attains a maximum displacement. The mechanical properties of the basilar membrane vary along its length. The point at which the peak displacement of the wave arises is dependent on the frequency of the sound and how the varying mass and stiffness of the membrane impede its passage. The base of the basilar membrane is relatively narrow and stiff, which causes it to respond best to high frequencies. The apex of the basilar membrane is wider and less stiff, which causes it to respond best to low frequencies. Thus, lower frequencies pass further along the membrane and reach a peak nearer the apex, whereas the peak for high frequencies lies nearer the base. The narrowness of the peak or area on the basilar membrane that responds indicates the sharpness of the tuning. The position of the peak is normally very highly tuned and is determined very precisely by the frequency of the stimulating sound (Figure 2.11). This is known as the characteristic frequency (CF). The basilar membrane may be likened to a piano keyboard in as much as one end is concerned with the high frequencies and the other with the low frequencies. The tuning of the basilar membrane is important for frequency discrimination. In effect the basilar membrane works as a frequency analyser. Experiments have shown that tuning is even more precise, actively involving groups of outer hair cells in addition to the ‘passive’ mechanical properties of the basilar membrane. The outer hair cells, activated by efferent nerve fibres, contract and selectively stiffen the basilar membrane, which sharpens its response by ‘vibration amplification’. This causes a small region of the cochlea to vibrate in response to low intensity (weak) sounds. In other words, with weak sounds the cochlea is finely tuned to individual frequencies. High intensity (strong) sounds cause a wider region to vibrate and fine-tuning is reduced. The pattern of vibration on the basilar membrane is resolved as an excitation pattern of neural firing. The wide range of signals encountered in daily life cannot be encoded directly into neural responses since most neurons have a dynamic range in

38

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 2.11. Békésy’s travelling wave concept: the movement of the stapes in the oval window creates a travelling wave (a), which moves along the basilar membrane. Pressure is released via the round window (b).

the order of 30 dB. The cochlea provides compressive action through the mechanical effects of the outer hair cells. The structural role of the outer hair cells results in the cochlea having greater basilar membrane movement with low input levels. With a low sound input level (below 30 dBSPL) the active outer hair cell mechanism amplifies the response on the basilar membrane by a maximum of about 50 dB. Thus the system is most sensitive in quiet and compresses at a ratio of about 3:5 for mid level inputs. As the sound input level increases the amplification decreases until, with a sound input greater than about 90 dBSPL, there is no additional amplification and the response is linear once more (Ruggero and Rich, 1991). Damage to the outer hair cells will therefore result not only in reduced audibility but also in a loss of compression giving rise to recruitment. Tuning curves (Figure 2.12) are graphs that show how finely tuned are the nerve fibres of the cochlea. Each tuning curve refers to the threshold of a single fibre and is usually plotted as a function of frequency. The frequency at which the threshold is lowest is known as the characteristic frequency. A logarithmic scale is used for tuning curves because the frequency response relates to distance on the basilar membrane in a way that is approximately logarithmic. The tuning curve will therefore usually appear steeper on the high frequency side than on the low frequency side. Curves obtained above threshold are known as iso-rate contours.

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

39

Figure 2.12. A tuning curve. This single nerve fibre is finely tuned to around 4 kHz threshold but will respond to a wider range of frequencies when the sound level is greater.

A normal tuning curve will have a sharply tuned tip and a broadly tuned tail. The outer hair cells are responsible for the sharp tips of the tuning curves. When outer hair cells are damaged, the active amplification is reduced. Sensitivity to weak sounds is reduced and sounds must be more intense to be heard. The tuning curve will lose its sharp tip and appear more broadly tuned. The shape of the tuning curves can be associated with certain types of damage (see Figure 2.13). Otoacoustic emissions or ‘cochlear echoes’, which are by-products of the outer hair cells’ contribution to vibration, can be measured in the ear canal. Otoacoustic emissions are linked to hearing ability and are used to provide an objective method of screening hearing in babies, see Chapter 14. When two tones are close in frequency, the nerve fibre firing rate increases. However, if the frequency of the second tone is just outside the area covered by the tuning curve, the first tone will be reduced; this is known as two-tone suppression. Where tones are below about 5 kHz the nerve fibres appear to fire at the same time, which is known as being phase-locked. This is thought to be important in localization and in coding

40

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 2.13. Abnormal tuning curves associated with (a) intact inner hair cells, and widespread loss of outer hair cells and (b) severe damage to both inner and outer hair cells. (After Moore, 1998.)

the formant frequencies in speech. Damage to the outer hair cells may affect speech understanding as well as hearing threshold levels. Other mechanisms are involved further along the auditory pathway to increase the accuracy of information reaching the auditory cortex. (b) The transduction process within the cochlea The tectorial membrane does not move in the same way as the basilar membrane; when the wave travels along it causes the tectorial membrane to move forwards as well as upwards, then backwards as well as downwards. The stereocilia of the hair cells are embedded in the tectorial membrane and this shearing motion bends them first one way, towards the tallest stereocilia, and then the other way, away from it. Joining their tips are transduction links (Figure 2.14) and the tension on these is alternately tightened and released. Normally in the resting position the

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

41

endolymph outside the hair cell has a positive charge of approximately 80 millivolts (mV), while the inside of the cell has a negative charge of approximately –60 mV. It is thought that as the transduction links tighten it is as if a ‘trap door’ opens at the top of each cilia. An electrical potential gradient is thus set up, which causes an ionic interchange and results in the hair cell becoming more positively charged. This, in turn, stimulates release of neurotransmitters at the base of the cell, which fire the nerve impulse; a wave of depolarization passes down the length of the axon. This nerve impulse is called the action potential and can be recorded by placing electrodes in the cochlea. The value of the potential is a few mV and is fixed; that is, a higher intensity sound produces more firing of the action potentials but not larger potentials.

mV

mV

Figure 2.14. The transduction links between the stereocilia of a hair cell (an inner hair cell is shown). Shearing of the stereocilia is thought to cause ‘trapdoors’ to open and the intracellular potential is driven more positive.

42

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Other potentials have been found in the cochlea by using recording electrodes: • The cochlear microphonic. This has a maximum value of 3 or 4 mV and is an alternating current (AC) potential, which arises in the outer hair cells in response to a sound stimulus. It is a voltage analogue of the original waveform, which remains linear to about 100 dBSPL and then saturates. It has proved valuable in research and also in assessing cochlear function in diagnostic investigation. • Summating potential. This again arises from the outer hair cells. It is a direct current (DC) potential that is usually negative. It tends to occur in response to high intensities and is the sum of various responses to the travelling waveform envelope. Understanding of the perception of sound is increasing with new research. Since the concept of von Békésy was published there have been many refinements. It is now known that the nerve fibres themselves show frequency selectivity and that they have a spontaneous firing rate of just above 0 to 150 per second. Firing of the nerves occurs only at particular phases of the waveform, allowing a temporal regularity in response to a periodic stimulus. The fibres themselves are distributed in an orderly manner in the main auditory nerve bundle. Fibres that respond to high frequencies are on the periphery, graduating to those responding to the lowest frequencies right in the centre. This is known as tonotopic organisation. Malformation, damage or disease occurring in any part of the perceptive apparatus may cause sensorineural hearing loss. (c) The central connections of the cochlear nerve The nerve cells that supply the cochlea are described as bipolar. That is, they each have a body and two axons. One axon terminates at the base of a hair cell and the other in the cochlear nucleus of the brainstem. The cell bodies themselves are grouped together in the osseous spiral lamina of the cochlea and therefore called the spiral ganglion. All groups of nerve cell bodies in the peripheral nervous system are called ganglia, whereas in the central nervous system they are called nuclei. From the spiral ganglion, the nerve fibres join together to form the cochlear nerve and pass through the internal auditory canal to enter the brainstem. From here the nerve divides into two and terminates in the ventral and dorsal cochlear nuclei. Most fibres from these nuclei cross over to the superior olivary nucleus of the opposite hemisphere. The

Anatomy and physiology of the ear

43

pathway continues via the lateral lemniscus, the inferior colliculus, the medial geniculate body and then on to the auditory cortex. There is also crossing of fibres at the level of the inferior colliculus. Some fibres follow this pathway on the same side, thus the cortex of each hemisphere receives information from both ears, but the majority of information received in the left auditory cortex will have originated in the right ear (Figure 2.15).

Superior olivary nucleus

Figure 2.15. The pathways to the auditory cortex.

44

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

FURTHER READING Berlin CI (1997) Neurotransmission and Hearing Loss. Basic science, diagnosis and management. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group. Graham J, Martin, M (eds) (2000) Ballantyne’s Deafness. 6 edn. London: Whurr. Luxon, LM, Davies, RA (1997) Handbook of Vestibular Rehabilitation. London: Whurr. Moore BCJ (1998) Cochlear Hearing Loss. London: Whurr. Pickles JO (1988) An Introduction to the Physiology of Hearing. 2 edn. London: Academic Press. Sahley TL, Nodar RH, Musiek FE (1997) Efferent Auditory System. Structure and function. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group.

Chapter 3 Medical aspects of hearing loss

3.1 INTRODUCTION Hearing loss may be due to a wide variety of pathological processes occurring in any part of the ear. ‘Pathology’ means the study of disease. Diseases or disorders can be considered under the following headings: • • • •

traumatic or from injury; infective or from micro-organisms; tumours; iatrogenic caused by physician or surgeon by use of medication, surgical accident or unsterile operation; • idiopathic or of unknown cause; • physiological disorders including degenerative effects of ageing; • congenital or from birth whether inherited or caused by environmental factors. Human cells contain 23 pairs of chromosomes. Twenty-two pairs are known as autosomes and are numbered 1 to 22. The remaining two chromosomes (one pair) are known as sex chromosomes. Abnormalities may involve the autosomes or the sex chromosomes or they may involve only individual genes. All hereditary characteristics, for example eye colour, are carried by genes on the chromosomes. Congenital defects may be due to ‘environmental’ factors (such as illness during pregnancy), but a high proportion of congenital deafness is inherited. In some inherited conditions the symptoms may not be apparent at birth but may develop later in life. Many malformations or traits occur together and these may be termed as a syndrome. A family history will generally determine whether an inherited trait is dominant, recessive, or sex-linked. 45

46

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

3.2 PATHOLOGY OF THE OUTER EAR 3.2.1 Congenital conditions of the outer ear (a) Malformation of the pinna Sometimes children are born with an accessory or extra pinna or with a tag of soft tissue and cartilage. This may be large or quite small and it may be situated away from the normal site of ear formation. Treatment is by removal. Both microtia (poorly developed pinna) and anotia (no pinna) may be associated with other abnormalities of the conductive auditory system and are therefore indicators for further investigation. (b) Aural fistula An aural fistula or sinus may be present. This can be quite a deep channel leading from the skin surface. Deep removal may be necessary or it can become cystic. The operation must be very carefully done as the facial nerve runs past this area and damage can lead to facial paralysis and permanent disfigurement. (c) Atresia Atresia can be present, in which case there is complete closure or absence of the external auditory meatus, and an operation is required to make an opening. There may be a partial closure or extreme narrowness (stenosis) of the canal by an overgrowth of bone in or along the meatus, and this may go with a partial lack of development of the midface. (d) Hereditary conditions Hereditary conditions are those that are passed down to children from their parents due to genetic defects. There are a number of conditions that are hereditary and culminate in a lack of growth of parts of the face; probably the best example that affects the outer ear is Treacher Collin’s syndrome. The main defects in this case may be poorly formed cheek bones, poorly formed pinnae, sloping eyes with nicks in the eyelids (colobomas) and hearing impairment (see also section 3.3.1).

Medical aspects of hearing loss

47

3.2.2 Acquired conditions of the outer ear (a) Injury to the pinna The pinna may be damaged by injury or trauma. The most common injury is a bruising or haematoma, which is a collection of blood in the tissues, often caused by boxing or an assault. Treatment should be carried out as early as possible, by aspirating away the blood with a syringe or by making an incision to drain it. If this is not undertaken, the pressure of the contained blood can cause a local death of the tissues and formation of scar tissue, which may result in a ‘cauliflower ear’. Sometimes an earlobe is torn, often when wearing earrings. There may even be the complete loss of a pinna. If possible, any cartilage should be retained for later plastic surgery reconstruction. It is difficult to apply a plastic false ear to the side of the head securely, so either a loop of tissue is formed or dental osseo-integrated implants are inserted into the mastoid bone to aid retention. (b) Injury to the tympanic membrane Most commonly this is caused by children poking objects into their own or other people’s ears. It can also be caused by unskilled treatment or syringing, or by a slap or blow on the ear. Gunfire or explosion can cause even greater damage as the initial explosive pressure is followed by an air vacuum and suction, (blast trauma). In a similar way, the eardrum can be damaged by barotrauma, which is a rapid alteration in air pressure caused by the sudden descent of an unpressurized aircraft or rapid ascent from deep sea diving. The drum may also be involved when the temporal bone of the skull is fractured by a sideways blow. The symptoms are usually pain with minimal bleeding, deafness, tinnitus and vertigo. The signs are bleeding or a visible tear on the drum. It is best not to syringe or clear the ear but to give systemic antibiotics and leave it to heal. (c) Foreign bodies Objects in the ears are relatively common, especially in children. Hard objects, such as beads, can be hooked out. Soft objects of any sort, except vegetable matter, which can swell up when wetted, can all be syringed out, as shown in Figure 3.1. Forceps and tweezers are not generally used as

48

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

these may push objects even further in but a special loop can sometimes be used successfully. All such removals should be undertaken by a medically qualified person. Insects occasionally enter the ear and cause intense irritation by their buzzing. This can be deadened by pouring warm olive oil into the canal. (d) Excessive wax Wax may accumulate in the external auditory meatus. New wax is soft and moist, and light in colour. With age, wax becomes dark and hard. It may sometimes block the meatus and, if impacted, it may press on the drum. Excessive wax can disturb hearing. Tinnitus may also occur, usually of low frequency. Wax may be removed by syringing, (Figure 3.1) often after it has been softened using drops of warmed olive oil, or similar, for a few days. Syringing should not be undertaken if there is any suspicion of a perforation and otologists generally remove wax dry, often using a wax hook or by suction.

Figure 3.1. Syringing the ear.

(e) Infection of the outer ear Generally speaking, infections may be caused by all kinds of micro-organisms, bacteria, viruses, fungi, lice, worms and so on. Infection in the nasal passages and sinuses is controlled by the mucous cells lining these areas, which have myriads of small moving hair-like processes called cilia. These

Medical aspects of hearing loss

49

all act in unison to clear bacteria away. In the ears, bacteria and dust are extruded in the soft wax. In the mouth and throat, bacteria can be washed away in the saliva, which itself has some antiseptic properties as do the tears in the eyes. The reaction of the tissues to infection is known as inflammation. The blood vessels enlarge, lymphocytes and macrophage cells collect in the area and migrate through the vessel walls to mop up the infective organisms (phagocytosis). Drainage of the infected area is via the lymphatic vessels to the relevant lymph nodes, which can become enlarged and tender. Whether the inflammation controls the infection depends on the virulence of the organism and also on the health and resistance of the individual. If the person is unfit, perhaps on a poor diet, anaemic or diabetic, resistance will be impaired and the infection could therefore worsen. Some bacteria give off toxins that lower the resistance of the tissues and facilitate the spread of the infection. Viruses are smaller particles than bacteria and have no cell membranes of their own; they can only live and multiply in the cells of the host. Viruses do not respond to ordinary antibiotics. Treatment can be by antivirals and analgesics and by boosting the patient’s general fitness. Otitis externa or acute dermatitis of the outer ear is an inflammation of the skin covering the pinna or lining the external auditory meatus. The condition often occurs in conjunction with dandruff of the scalp. It can cause extreme irritation of the area, which may be due to staphylococcus, or to fungi, which collect in any cracks. This can be remedied by treating the dandruff and by local application of antibiotic creams or fungicides. Eczema or sensitization dermatitis is an allergic form of skin inflammation that can cause vesicles and oozing. (A vesicle is a small swelling filled with a clear exudate – not with pus.) The ear should be cleaned carefully and any general allergy should be treated. Herpes is an infection with a particular virus of the herpes family. Herpes simplex may cause a bright red inflammation and ulceration but usually heals within 10 days. Furunculosis is the presence of a furuncle or boil, which is caused by infection of the hair follicle by staphylococcus bacteria. Boils within the cartilage in the external auditory meatus are excruciatingly painful and any swelling may cause a hearing loss. Treatment is with antibiotics and the application of warm glycerine and antiseptic on the area using a soft cotton wool wick in the ear passage. Otomycosis is a fungal infection and is treated by keeping the ear dry and applying nystatin or other antifungal ointments.

50

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(f) Tumours Tumours may be either benign or malignant (cancerous). Benign tumours are commonly exostoses or outgrowths of normal bone and are usually referred to as osteoma. These may be left alone if small but, if large and interfering with hearing, they can be removed with a small dental-type drill, using an operating microscope. The most common malignant tumour in this area is the basal cell carcinoma, or rodent ulcer. This usually affects the upper edge of the pinna probably being brought on by ultraviolet sunlight. It may appear as an ulcer that fails to heal and, if left, it can spread to the scalp and inner ear and cause great destruction of the tissues. Malignant skin cancer can spread via the lymphatic scavenger system and can appear in the auricular or cervical lymph nodes. Early removal is made by cutting a V-shaped notch in the pinna including a 10 mm surround of healthy tissue to prevent recurrence. If left, it can involve the facial nerve and cause a facial palsy and unbearable pain. Any affected lymph nodes in the area of the neck must also be removed by an extensive operation.

3.3 PATHOLOGY OF THE MIDDLE EAR 3.3.1 Congenital conditions of the middle ear In certain disorders, which are mainly hereditary genetic abnormalities, there may be a malformation of the middle ear, such as a lack of, or malformation of, one or more of the ossicles. Some examples include: • Treacher Collin’s syndrome. Autosomal-dominant genetic defect, leading to poorly formed cheek-bones, fish-like mouth, sloping eyes, nicks in the eyelids (colobomas), poorly developed outer and middle ears, often with atresia of ear canals. Hearing defects are mainly conductive. • Crouzon’s syndrome. Autosomal-dominant. Lack of growth mid-face, abnormally shaped head with central prominence in the frontal region. Hearing defects that are mainly conductive. • Down’s syndrome. Chromosomal abnormality (the presence of an extra number 21 chromosome), resulting in learning difficulties and classic facial features including small pinnae and narrow ear canals. High incidence: about 1 in 700 live births; risk increases with age of mother. Hearing defects may be conductive, sensorineural or mixed.

Medical aspects of hearing loss

51

• Paget’s disease. Autosomal-recessive skeletal disorder. Although the condition is present from birth, the progressive deformities only become apparent around the second year of life. Mixed progressive hearing loss due to continued new bone formation at base of skull.

3.3.2 Acquired conditions of the middle ear (a) Traumatic conditions Trauma may be direct – for example damage caused by poking an object into the middle ear – or it may be indirect, often due to a blow on the side of the head, which may cause damage to the temporal bone. Symptoms of the latter are usually bleeding from the ear, bruising over the mastoid bone, pain and deafness. Signs may include a split in the tympanic membrane, haemorrhage in the ear canal, facial palsy and other signs of local nerve damage. Radiographically there may be signs of fracture in the temporal area, which is confirmed by a computerized tomogram (CT) scan. Treatment is by cleaning the ear canal and giving antibiotics systemically. Syringing should not be undertaken. (b) Infective conditions Otitis media Otitis media is an inflammation of the middle ear, which is usually accompanied by some temporary loss of hearing. Air enters the Eustachian tube during swallowing in order to balance the air pressure in the middle ear with ambient atmospheric pressure. If the Eustachian tube is blocked, which is often due to infection, normal middle ear pressure cannot be maintained because oxygen is absorbed by the tissues. The resultant ‘negative pressure’ (or partial vacuum) causes fluid to exude from the walls of the middle ear. The fluid may be sterile or infected (pus) and it may build up sufficiently to cause painful pressure on the eardrum. If the eardrum bursts, the fluid is released, the pain subsides, and the Eustachian tube gradually clears and opens again. A perforation in the lower part of the eardrum is considered safe and will usually heal uneventfully, although it may leave an area of weakened scar tissue. A perforation in the upper part of the eardrum is considered dangerous because of its close proximity to important structures (see Figure 3.2). Middle ear infection is treated by antibiotics and painkillers. Children are very prone to otitis media because their Eustachian tubes are more horizontal and less rigid than those of adults and their immune

52

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

systems are less well developed. Where the condition is recurrent, a sticky residue may adhere to the ossicles, inhibiting their movement and causing a hearing loss. This condition is commonly known as ‘glue ear’. Where otitis media is long-standing or repeated, or in cases of glue ear, a myringotomy may be undertaken. A small incision is made in the lower part of the drum to release the fluid and a plastic grommet may be inserted in the eardrum (Figure 3.2) to ventilate the middle ear and thus prevent recurrence.

Figure 3.2. ‘Glue ear’ – secretory otitis media and its treatment.

If not treated early enough, middle ear infection may spread and can result in major dangerous disease, such as meningitis or a brain abscess (see Figure 3.3), symptoms being acute headache and very high temperature. Before the use of antibiotics, middle ear infection often caused an infection of the mastoid air cells (mastoiditis) and the best cure at that time was a mastoidectomy, which was a painful and dangerous operation to open up and drain the area. Early recognition and treatment with antibiotics is therefore of great importance and may be life saving. Cholesteatoma Dangerous chronic (long-standing) otitis media usually occurs in a middle ear where the Eustachian tube is never fully open. The air pressure is lower in the middle ear than in the external ear canal, thus the greater external air pressure gradually pushes into the soft, flaccid upper part of the drum to

Medical aspects of hearing loss

53

Figure 3.3. Otitis media with complications.

form a pouch. Epithelial skin cells lining the ear canal are continually being shed and migrate naturally out of the ear canal, but those within this pouch cannot be cleared away by natural migration. Gradually an accumulation of skin cells, wax, dust and bacteria builds up into a sticky mass, which is termed a cholesteatoma. This builds up further, becomes more infected, pushes into the outer attic wall and begins to discharge a foul-smelling pus. As it enlarges further it can destroy the ossicular chain and may even erode the roof of the middle ear and cause intracranial infections. It may also burst through and damage the labyrinth and/or the facial nerve to cause a facial palsy. Symptoms and signs are of a recurrent foul discharge, pain, deafness and possibly vertigo. Treatment is by operating, opening the area widely and cleaning the whole middle ear and mastoid air cells, cleaning out the cholesteatoma and drying up any discharge. If untreated, the complications can be very serious indeed. (c) Facial paralysis Facial paralysis may arise from damage to the facial nerve via the mastoid air cells (Figure 2.7), or the nerve may be damaged in an accident or operation. Paralysis of the muscles of facial expression results, causing marked asymmetry of the face with possible loss of taste and salivation. People thus affected cannot smile, raise their eyebrows or close the eye of the affected side. If long term, the eyelids may have to be sewn together to protect the

54

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

eye. If the cause is unknown, it is termed a Bell’s palsy. Treatment is often with steroids. There is also a surgical procedure, called facial hypoglossal anastomosis, to re-route the facial nerve. In addition, these patients may be referred to a physiotherapist or speech and language therapist for facial exercises and/or electrical or thermal stimulation. (d) Otosclerosis Otosclerosis is an exuberant growth of normal bone, the cause of which is unknown. It usually affects the middle ear but may also affect the inner ear. Extra spongy-type bone is produced, especially around the oval and round windows. This spongy bone gradually hardens. The stapes may therefore become immovable causing deafness. The condition occurs in young adults and there may be a family history. It may be accelerated during pregnancy, probably due to hormonal activity. A conductive hearing loss will be present, which is greatest in the low frequencies. A dip in the bone conduction threshold at 2 kHz is often noted (Figure 3.4 (a)). This is known as Carhart’s notch. In later stages of otosclerosis, there may be sensorineural involvement as the bony growth invades the inner ear. Treatment is by microscopic surgery, the stapes being removed wholly or partly and replaced with a prosthesis, which may be a small metal or Teflon plunger wedged into place at the oval window with a piece of foam or fat (Figure 3.5). The operation is all done through an incision in the tympanic membrane and the working end of the piston is usually hooked around the bottom end of the incus. The operation is termed a stapedectomy.

3.4 PATHOLOGY OF THE INNER EAR In the inner ear, disease may produce dizziness due to a disturbance of fluid levels in the labyrinth, or it may affect the cochlea or the auditory nerve causing sensorineural hearing loss. As before, diseases may be classified as congenital or acquired.

3.4.1 Congenital conditions of the inner ear Congenital hearing loss may be caused by maldevelopment of the inner ear, as in hereditary genetic abnormalities, or by environmental damage such as occurs when infectious diseases in the mother cross over the placenta to affect the unborn child – for example, syphilis, cytomegalovirus (CMV), or German measles (rubella). Development can also be affected by severe jaundice, such as that due to rhesus factor antibodies in the mother’s blood, or by other neonatal/perinatal factors such as anoxia, or use of antibiotic drugs. Many congenital hearing losses

Medical aspects of hearing loss

55

(a)

(b)

(c)

Figure 3.4. Audiograms for the left ear illustrating (a) otosclerosis. (b) typical noise damage. (c) presbyacusis.

56

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 3.5. The middle-ear operation of stapedectomy.

of ‘unknown’ cause are non-syndromic genetic losses. Examples of congenital conditions associated with sensorineural hearing loss include: • Usher’s syndrome. Autosomal recessive genetic condition. Moderate to severe bilateral sensorineural hearing loss is present at birth. Progressive blindness usually starts in teens due to retinitis pigmentosa. • Waardenburg’s syndrome. Autosomal dominant genetic condition. Features include a white forelock of hair, different coloured segments in the eyes, and mild-to-profound hearing loss, which may be unilateral or bilateral and sometimes progressive. • Turner’s syndrome. Sex chromosome defect, which is not inherited. Features include low hairline, webbed neck, short stature, kidney

Medical aspects of hearing loss

57

defects and mild sensorineural and conductive hearing loss. Occurs only in females. • Rubella (German measles). Viral infection contracted from the mother during pregnancy. Defects vary depending on the stage of development of the embryo/foetus when the infection occurs. Features include hearing loss, heart disease, eye disorders, psychomotor problems and behavioural disorders. • Cytomegalovirus (CMV). Viral infection contracted from the mother during pregnancy or during birth. The disease in the mother may present very mild symptoms, such as a runny nose. In the baby, CMV affects the nervous system. Possible defects include hearing loss, learning difficulties, spasticity, convulsions and hyperactivity. • Syphilis. Bacterial infection contracted from the mother during pregnancy. Defects include slow progressive deafness and other sensory defects.

3.4.2 Acquired conditions of the inner ear Acquired inner ear diseases are those caused after birth, possibly by infection from mumps or meningitis, or they may be caused by an accident, blow or explosion, or by exposure to loud noise. (a) Noise damage Noise-induced hearing loss (NIHL) This is caused by long exposure to high levels of noise, such as those found in certain industrial situations, especially prior to the Noise at Work regulations (Health and Safety Executive, 1989). At first the noise will cause a temporary threshold shift (TTS), which is followed by full recovery after a period away from the noise, but after years of exposure the damage becomes permanent. The longer the duration and the more intense the noise, the greater will be the damage. All possible steps should be taken to reduce noise at source and ear protection should be used where noise exceeds certain levels. These are specified by law. The protection offered by different types of ear protection varies widely and the type of protection used should be chosen according to the attenuation required, based on an analysis of the noise. Types of noise protection include: • Disposable earplugs. These are commonly made of plastic foam, which can be squashed to fit the ear and which then expands to fit the shape of the individual ear canal. The degree of attenuation will vary. The maximum attenuation of low frequency will usually be less than 30 dB.

58

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

• Prefabricated earplugs. These are commonly made of soft flexible plastic. They can be washed with soap and water, although they will harden over time. Attenuation is similar to disposable plugs. • Personally moulded plugs. These are commonly made of silicone rubber and are produced in the same way as an earmould. Some earplugs are manufactured specifically for certain noises. The limit of attenuation of low frequency noise is usually around 35dB. • Ear defenders or ear muffs. These have the appearance of headphones. The headband is spring loaded to maintain pressure against the sides of the head and maintain a seal. The degree of attenuation is usually in the region of 50 dB at certain frequencies. These are the most effective general type of ear protection. However, if the fit is not tight, air leaks may typically reduce attenuation by about 5 dB to 15 dB. Some ear defenders are manufactured for certain noise situations – for example they could include a peak limiting device to allow speech to be heard whilst protecting against intermittent loud noise. Such ear defenders must only be used for the situations for which they are intended. The European Commission’s Physical Agents Directive applying to noise (2001) specifies action levels for employers: • The first action level is 80dB(A), at which ear protection must be made available. • The second action level is 85dB(A), at which ear protection must be worn and, where practicable, noise must be reduced. • The equivalent action levels for impulse noise are 112Pa and 200Pa. • There is a limit on personal noise exposure (taking ear protection into account) of 87dB(A). For impulse noise the limitation is 200Pa. The greatest effect on hearing is in the high frequency region. The audiogram often shows a ‘notch’ at 4 kHz (Figure 3.4(b)) and the hearing loss is frequently accompanied by tinnitus, which is often near in frequency to the area of greatest hearing loss. One theory to help explain the ‘notch’ is that the natural resonant frequency of the cochlea may be at 4kHz. Acoustic trauma This is a term normally reserved (Martin and Summers, 1999) for damage caused by intense short-duration sound, such as gunfire and resulting in a sudden high frequency hearing loss. The 4 kHz ‘notch’ is usually present. (b) Presbyacusis and circulatory disorders Presbyacusis is the term given to degeneration of hearing in old age. This is the most common general cause of hearing loss and results in a progres-

Medical aspects of hearing loss

59

sive bilateral sensorineural hearing loss, mainly in the high frequencies (Figure 3.4(c)). Presbyacusis can be thought of as the cumulative effect of living and may include a variety of causes, such as: • circulatory disorders, including arteriosclerosis, thrombosis and vascular spasm; • noise damage, including long exposure at normal levels; • poor diet; • normal use of drugs; • lack of exercise; • stress. Circulatory disorders are the most common specific cause of hearing loss. The cochlea requires a constant, sufficient supply of oxygen and nutrients to maintain its function. This supply is dependent on the condition of the heart, the blood vessels and the stria vascularis. Degenerative changes in the blood vessels, blood clots, high or low blood pressure, and damage due to elevated blood glucose levels in diabetes may all affect hearing. Even a brief interruption to the blood supply may cause permanent damage. (c) Infections Infections affecting the inner ear are mainly viral or bacterial, although they may be due to other micro-organisms (section 3.2.2(e)). Viral infections include: • Mumps and measles may cause a sensorineural loss. The hearing loss caused by mumps is often unilateral. Measles may be complicated by otitis media. • Shingles (herpes zoster) causes inflammation of the nerves and, if this involves the auditory nerve, will cause sensorineural loss with pain. Herpes zoster (shingles) is similar to the virus of chickenpox. It causes an acute inflammation of the sensory nerve ganglions and when this occurs in the auditory, facial and trigeminal nerves it causes vesicles and severe pain in the area of the face that is innervated by the particular nerve affected. The disease may continue for a long time and may recur despite treatments. • Influenza can affect the cochlea via the bloodstream, often with an additional temporary conductive loss due to otitis media. Bacterial infections include: • Diphtheria may cause a sensorineural loss with secondary otitis media.

60

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

• Meningitis may cause sensorineural loss, which can be total. The meninges or brain lining is inflamed due to direct infection or neglected otitis media. The condition can be life threatening and is usually treated with antibiotics. Some cases of meningitis are of viral origin. Infections from the inner ear must be diagnosed and treated early because there can be a very dangerous spread of infection to the middle cranial fossa causing meningitis or a brain abscess, or the infection may spread into the neighbouring mastoid air cells, or infect the facial nerve to cause a palsy. Early treatment with antibiotics and surgical drainage may be life saving. (d) Ototoxic drugs Hearing loss due to drugs is usually bilateral, may be sudden or progressive, and is often accompanied by tinnitus. Some losses tend to recover (unless the dosage is very high) when the drug is withdrawn. For example, analgesics, such as aspirin, cause a reversible high frequency loss; diuretics, such as frusemide, cause a reversible low to mid frequency loss; and quinine causes a reversible low frequency loss. Other drugs, such as the powerful antibiotic streptomycin, cause permanent damage. Some examples of ototoxic drugs are given in Table 3.1. Table 3.1. Some examples of ototoxic drugs Drug type

Examples

Analgesics & anti-inflammatories

Salicylates – Aspirin Ibuprofen – Motrin, Advil etc. Naproxen – Anaprox, Naprosyn Aminoglycosides – Streptomycin, Kanamycin, Neomycin, Gentamycin,Tobramysin, Amikacin, Nentimicin Erythromycin – EES, ERY-C, E-mycin, llosone, Pediazole Vancomycin – Vancocin Ethacrynic acid – Edecrin Frusemide – Lasix Bumetanide – Bumex Cisplatin Nitrogen mustard Vincristine Quinine Steroids Alcohol

Antibiotics

Loop diuretics

Chemotherapeutic agents

Other

Medical aspects of hearing loss

61

(e) Conditions involving vertigo Vertigo may occur in a number of conditions, most commonly through blockage of the Eustachian tube, suppuration in the labyrinth, tumours affecting the VIII cranial nerve, after operations on the ear and when affected by Ménière’s disorder. Vertigo may be accompanied by nausea and vomiting, and nystagmus or vibrating movements of the eyes. Assessment will involve investigation of auditory and vestibular function. Tests usually include noting spontaneous and induced nystagmus, which provides valuable diagnostic information. Ménière’s disorder This is also known as idiopathic episodic endolymphatic hydrops and usually occurs in middle age. It is idiopathic as the cause is unknown but it is known to be associated with a raised pressure on, and distension of, the membranous labyrinth (hydrops) (Figure 3.6).

Figure 3.6. Cross-section of the cochlea to show expansion of the endolymphatic compartment in Ménière’s disorder and vestibular neuronitis.

Symptoms are recurrent sudden attacks of dizziness, tinnitus and deafness. Nystagmus may also be present and attacks may be nocturnal. The hearing loss is sensorineural and fluctuating. It is usually low frequency and may be unilateral. The condition must be referred for

62

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

medical care. Hearing aids should only be recommended with the doctor’s or ENT consultant’s consent, as amplification can induce attacks. Treatment is usually by medication with anti-sickness and antidepressant drugs. Alternative treatment can be by surgical decompression or by destruction of the labyrinth e.g. with an ultrasonic beam or a laser. Surgical decompression involves making an incision in the endolymphatic sac (Figure 2.8) to increase drainage. An endolymphatic-mastoid shunt may be used. Surgical decompression often provides remission, sometimes for a number of years. Surgical destruction may stop the symptoms but deafness thereafter will be complete. Other treatment includes reduction of fluid, restricting salt in the diet and prescribing diuretics, which increase fluid excretion. Vestibular neuronitis This is a condition similar to Ménière’s disorder but the cause (a virus) is known and it normally affects younger people. Acoustic neuroma Acoustic neuroma is a benign (local, slow-growing) tumour or neurofibroma of the VIII cranial nerve. The condition is relatively rare, having an incidence of 1 in 100,000 population (O’Donoghue, 1993) but may be fatal if it is not surgically treated. Its symptoms may be similar to Ménière’s disorder and clinical assessment includes tests (described in Chapter 13) to distinguish these conditions. Diagnosis is usually by a CT scan and treatment is by neurosurgery. An acoustic neuroma is actually an overgrowth of the Schwann cells of the outer sheath of the nerve trunk and has to be approached by drilling a hole in the skull. Other causes of vertigo with hearing loss can be: • • • • • • •

postural after head injuries; impaired blood supply to the brain; infections such as syphilis; tumours such as cancer; obstructed Eustachian tubes; build up of wax causing pressure; the taking of ototoxic drugs.

3.5 OTHER CONDITIONS OF THE EAR 3.5.1 Operations on the ear • Myringotomy is an operation for treating secretory otitis media (glue ear), carried out under general anaesthetic, in which a curved incision is made low down in the drum using a tiny, long-handled myringotomy

Medical aspects of hearing loss

•

•

•

•

•

63

knife. A Teflon drain or grommet may be put into the incision to keep the drain-hole open and thus provide ventilation (Figure 3.3). This grommet will normally be shed naturally within six months. If symptoms recur, the operation is repeated and in some cases ‘long stay’ grommets or tympanostomy tubes (‘T’ tubes) may be used. A cortical mastoidectomy is not often used since the advent of powerful antibiotics. A curved incision is made behind the ear down to the mastoid process. The mastoid air cells and antrum are removed with bone drills and the cavity is left to drain. Great care must be taken to avoid damage to the facial nerve. A radical mastoidectomy is undertaken in dangerous chronic disease. In this case, the entire mastoid and middle ear are drilled away, including the malleus and incus. The base of the stapes is left sealing the oval window. The wound is protected with a gauze pad until the infection is controlled and then the area is grafted over with skin. Tympanoplasty is reconstructive surgery performed under an operating microscope to repair problems within the tympanic cavity and/or to repair a torn or missing tympanic membrane. Stapedectomy is an operation in which the eardrum is removed to provide access to the ossicles. It is undertaken using an operating microscope. The stapes is broken off the oval window and an artificial stapes is inserted. This may be a stainless steel or Teflon piston held in place by a fat graft or foam pad. The other end of the piston is hooked on to the incus. The drum is then replaced and packed with a sterile dressing to keep it in place for 48 hours, after which time the dressing is carefully removed. Results are normally very good. Labyrinthectomy is usually undertaken to treat Ménière’s disorder or intractable tinnitus or vertigo. The horizontal semicircular canal is drilled open so that the membranous labyrinth can be removed. As the middle ear is not opened in this operation healing should be quite quick, but hearing loss will be permanent. Alternatively, the labyrinth may be destroyed by lasers or drugs; hearing loss is still permanent.

All these operations have a much greater success rate since the advent of suitable antibiotics and with the use of operating microscopes and microsurgical techniques.

3.5.2 Pain in the ear Otalgia or pain in the ear may be of local cause or referred from other areas. (a) Local pain The common local causes of earache are:

64

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

• a boil in the external auditory meatus (a boil in the cartilage is especially painful); it is caused by an infection of a hair follicle by staphylococcus bacteria; • otitis media, infection of the middle ear; • mastoiditis, infection of the mastoid air cells; • malignant disease of the ear. (b) Referred pain Pain may be referred from: • • • • • • • • • •

decayed and infected molar teeth; impacted wisdom teeth; sinusitis, particularly from the maxillary sinus; herpes zoster (shingles), viral infection of the nerves; neck lesions, such as trapped cervical nerves; quinsy or tonsillar abscess; tongue with posterior ulcers or cancer; ulcers and cancers of the pharynx, larynx and palate; glossopharyngeal neuralgia (this is extremely painful); tempero-mandibular joint dysfunction – also known as Costen’s syndrome. In this disease, pain from the joint arises from a malfunction due to damage, malformation, poor dental occlusion, loss of teeth or over-closure. Cases should be referred to an oral surgeon; • temporal arteritis occurs when the outer wall of the temporal artery becomes diseased. The artery is swollen and painful to touch. A biopsy is taken and steroids prescribed or surgery advised; • malignant diseases of the neighbouring areas, in particular the nasopharynx, the back of the tongue, the palate or the floor of the mouth, may cause referred pain. A biopsy is required to confirm the diagnosis, followed by radiotherapy, chemotherapy, surgery or a combination thereof. Diagnosis must be early or the prognosis is very poor.

3.5.3 Conditions involving tinnitus In these cases the clients complain of noises in the ear or head, possibly of pulsation, ringing, hissing or buzzing, usually associated with some loss of hearing. Any abnormal condition of the ear can bring this on but the main causes are: • otosclerosis – overgrowth of bone; • wax secretions;

Medical aspects of hearing loss

• • • • • • • •

65

tumours, benign and malignant; Ménière’s disorder; fevers; raised blood pressure (pulsating tinnitus); anaemia; nervous diseases (such as multiple sclerosis); taking drugs and alcohol; over-smoking.

Surgery is not usually required, treatment being with sedatives, psychotherapy, kindness and care. For further information see section 13.1.

3.6 SUMMARY Hearing loss may be conductive or sensorineural in type, or a mixture of these two. Conductive hearing loss is caused by some abnormality of the outer or middle ear. The principal causes are: • • • • • •

impacted wax blocking the ear canal; otitis externa or inflammation of the outer ear; otitis media or inflammation of the middle ear, glue ear if chronic; otosclerosis; atresia or stenosis; foreign bodies in the ear canal.

Treatment of any condition of the ears should only be undertaken by, or under the direction of, a medically qualified person. Sensorineural hearing loss is caused by some abnormality of the cochlea, auditory nerve or the hearing centres of the brain. Most sensorineural hearing loss is caused by defects or damage to the cochlea, due to: • • • • • •

presbyacusis or the effects of age; vascular causes; excessive noise; hydrops or excessive fluid pressure in the inner ear; ototoxic drugs; congenital, hereditary and ‘environmental’ causes.

66

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

FURTHER READING Health and Safety Executive, (1989) Noise at Work. London: Her Majesty’s Stationery Office. Ludman H (1988) ABC of Ear, Nose and Throat. London: British Medical Association. Luxon L, Hinchcliffe R, Williams RG (2000) Noise Induced Hearing Loss. London: Whurr. Martini A, Stephens D, Read A (1996) Genetics and Hearing Impairment, London: Whurr. Prasher D, Luxon L (eds) (1998) Biological Effects of Noise. London: Whurr. Prasher D, Luxon L (eds) (1998) Protection Against Noise. London: Whurr. Simson Hall I, Colman BH (1987) Diseases of the Nose, Throat and Ear. 13 edn. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.

Chapter 4 Speech and intelligibility

4.1 THE SPEECH CHAIN Speech is an efficient means of communication that is resilient to background noise, interference and distortion. It can be understood despite different voices and accents, even on the telephone with no visual cues and a very restricted frequency range. When most people consider speech, they think only of the lip and tongue movements and the sounds that they link with them; but speech is much more than just the act of speaking. It is concerned with both the production and the reception of spoken messages. The speaker must decide what he wants to say and form it into words and sentences according to the rules of English. He must then send impulses via his nervous system to the vocal organs to produce the speech sounds that travel through the air to the listener. The listener’s ear receives the sounds and passes the messages to the brain, where they are finally decoded. Speech is a chain of events linking the speaker and the listener and is often called the speech chain (Figure 4.1).

Figure 4.1. The speech chain. (Diagram by Russ Tate.)

The study of speech, which is known as phonetics, can be broken down into three main parts: • articulatory phonetics is concerned with speech production; 67

68

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

• acoustic phonetics is concerned with the waveform, which provides the link between the speaker and the listener; • auditory or perceptual phonetics is concerned with listening skills. Written language is made up of a series of symbols or letters joined together to form words. These words are both formed and used according to certain rules, which are learned in early school and which can be used later with ease. Similarly, speech is made up of a series of sounds, which are formed into words. The individual sounds are called phonemes and these are the smallest units of sound that carry meaning; for example, the words c-a-t, c-o-t, c-u-t, are all made up of three phonemes. In each of these words, it is the medial phoneme which alters the meaning. Phonemes are not identical to written letters, although there is much overlap. There are very approximately 40 phonemes in English, 20 vowels and 20 consonants, and an international phonetic alphabet (IPA) exists to symbolize these. Phonemes are built up into syllables; for example, planet is one word but made up of two syllables and six phonemes. The phonemes can be likened to the bricks that build up into the walls (syllables), which are linked to make the buildings (words) (Figure 4.2).

Figure 4.2. The ‘building bricks’ that make up words.

In English, as in other languages, there are rules that constrain the way we build words from the individual sounds or phonemes and we cannot use them in any order; for instance, ‘klr’ does not exist in English, while ‘ng’ only occurs at the end of a syllable, never at the beginning. Words too are joined together into sentences using certain rules of grammar (syntax) and meaning (semantics). Grammatical rules will tell us the order of words that is acceptable; for example, we know at once that ‘horse the I ride’ is incorrect. However grammar alone is not sufficient, as sentences must also make sense. ‘The babysitting is high’, for example, is meaningless, and so we can see that word order is constrained by both grammatical and semantic rules.

Speech and intelligibility

69

Most people could not state the rules of English but nevertheless rarely break them because they have an unconscious awareness of them.

4.2 THE VOCAL TRACT The organs involved in speech production (Figure 4.3) are the lungs, trachea (windpipe), larynx (containing the vocal cords or folds), pharynx (throat), mouth and nose. The lungs produce the airstream or power to vibrate the vocal folds, which provide the source of sound. This is resonated by the vocal tract to produce recognizable speech sounds.

Figure 4.3. The organs of the vocal tract and their role in the production of the speech signal.

The airstream travels from the lungs up the trachea, through the larynx to the nose and mouth. The larynx acts as a valve between the throat and the lungs, able to open and close to control the airflow from the lungs. This action is largely dependent on the vocal cords, which are really folds of ligament, hence they are also known as the vocal folds. The space between the vocal folds is called the glottis and when the vocal folds are open the glottis forms a ‘V’-shape (Figure 4.4) because the vocal folds move away from each other only at the back of the trachea. As we speak,

70

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 4.4. Opening the vocal cords. (a) When lightly closed the cords vibrate. (b) When spaced apart, the airflow is unimpeded.

the air pressure from the lungs vibrates the vocal folds rhythmically. The frequency of the vibration depends upon how quickly the folds vibrate and can be altered within a range of about an octave and a half. The pharynx or throat connects the larynx with the mouth and nose. The nasal cavity extends from the pharynx and is divided by the septum into two sections leading to the nostrils. The walls of the two sections are not flat but have ridges and folds known as the turbinates. At the back of the nose and throat are the tonsils and adenoids. The nasal cavities can be closed off by raising the soft palate, in which case the airflow is directed through the mouth. The shape and size of the cavities of the mouth can be widely varied by moving the lips, teeth and tongue.

4.3 SPEECH READING The lips can be rounded, spread or closed and in ‘lip-reading’ a deaf person watches the position of the lips and teeth to add information to the reduced sounds he or she hears. As well as watching the lip and teeth positions, most deaf people will also obtain other clues or cues from facial expression, posture, context and so on; this is often therefore called ‘speech reading’. Lip-reading alone is not sufficient because groups of sounds, known as visemes look the same on the lips; for example ‘p’, ‘b’ and ‘m’ cannot be told apart by lip-reading. Discriminating individual sounds is made even more difficult in running speech, where the amount of lip-read information diminishes as we run one sound into another. Running speech is only easier to understand because other linguistic cues are present, not because of the lip-read patterns available. When visual cues are combined with some hearing, there can be very good speech perception; for example, lip-reading can disambiguate sentences that would sound the same, such as ‘I’ll have to see’ and ‘I’ll have to sue’. These sentences can easily be differentiated by lip-reading. Other linguistic cues are also important to comprehension, and language is rich in cues that we, as hearing people, do not often need to use. These cues are said to be redundant. Redundancy is present in all

Speech and intelligibility

71

levels of language; for example, grammatical cues are signalled more than once in a sentence. The following sentences include a number of grammatical cues that signal plurality: This man is working. These men are working. Redundant cues are used as and when they are needed, for example, in background noise. High redundancy makes language very efficient because if we do miss parts, we can still understand the whole. The hearing-impaired cannot use all the cues available to the normally hearing and evolve their own set, which is very individual. This is one reason why some hearing-impaired people do so much better than others.

4.4 SPEECH SOUNDS 4.4.1 The formation of vowels and vowel-like sounds The vocal tract is really a tube running from the lips at one end to the vocal cords (or vocal folds) at the other (Figure 4.3). A steady airstream, provided by the lungs, is set into vibration by the vocal cords, which are part of the larynx. The vocal cords open and close rapidly to create a sound, rather like a low frequency buzz, which is known as the fundamental laryngeal tone. This is the fundamental frequency of speech and it determines the pitch of the speaker’s voice. The actual frequency or pitch is not fixed and depends on the rate of vibration of the vocal cords – the faster they vibrate, the more cycles per second and the higher the pitch. The average pitch is given in Table 4.1 but individuals can vary their voice pitch within a certain range. Table 4.1. The average frequency of vocal cord vibration. Subject

Frequency (Hz)

Man Woman Child

120 (B2) 220 (A3) 260 (C4)

Pure tones rarely occur in nature and the sound source produced by vocal cord vibration contains nearly all possible harmonics. These reduce in intensity with increasing frequency, by about 12 dB per octave.

72

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The vocal tract can be altered in shape by moving the lips, tongue and other articulators. The variation in shape modifies the sound spectrum by resonating some frequencies, thus increasing their amplitude, while damping, or reducing, others. When the neck of an empty bottle is blown across and then that of one partially filled with liquid, the changing column of air alters the resonant frequency and the resulting difference in pitch can readily be heard. The sound from the vocal cords is modified in a similar manner, especially by the mouth. The tongue effectively divides the vocal tract into two cavities – front and back (Figure 4.5), and the bigger the cavity, the lower is the resonant frequency produced. The resonating cavities concentrate energy in particular frequency regions. These concentrations of energy into narrow bands are the basis of the vowel formants. The size and shape of the cavities determine the resonant frequencies or formants. The vocal tract is highly variable and is changed primarily by the tongue and the lips. The first two formants are important in the recognition of vowels, the other formants are mainly used to distinguish who is speaking. Vowels are formed by altering the shape of the vocal tract without causing any constriction that would create friction or aperiodic noise.

Figure 4.5. The resonating cavities of the mouth.

The vocal cord vibration is known as the fundamental frequency, which gives rise to the pitch of the voice. The shape of the vocal tract resonates the fundamental frequency, concentrating energy, into narrow bands – formants. The fundamental frequency is not a formant. Different speakers each produce slightly different sounds but we all interpret what we hear because the relationship between the formants remains unchanged. Each vowel can be likened to a chord in music, where the three notes played together can be recognized as a particular chord,

Speech and intelligibility

73

no matter in what key it is played. Examples can be seen in Figure 4.6; the precise frequency values are not important. All vowels contain the low frequency voicing, below 400 Hz, produced by vocal cord vibration – the fundamental frequency – but they also have a formant structure, created by resonances of the vocal tract. The harmonics are still present but certain ones have been amplified by resonance into peaks of energy or formants, whereas others have been damped or filtered.

Figure 4.6. The cavities of the mouth and the resultant formants of the vowels (a) ‘ee’ and (b) ‘aw’.

4.4.2 The formation of aperiodic consonants Some consonants, such as the nasal consonants ‘m’, ‘n’ and ‘ng’, are vowellike but most consonants are aperiodic – that is they have a noise component. There are two methods by which these consonants can be produced. • The vocal tract is narrowed at some point so that the air has to push past, creating turbulence or friction. Consonants formed in this way are called fricatives. The waveform is irregular and aperiodic, that is it has a noise component. Some fricatives, such as ‘s’, consist only of noise, others have a voiced component in addition, for example, ‘z’. It is often helpful to think of consonants in terms of voiced and voiceless pairs, for example: ‘s, z’ and ‘f, v’. Voicing is a low frequency component caused by the vocal fold vibration.

74

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

• The vocal tract is blocked at some point, such as at the lips, allowing the air pressure to build up, followed by a sudden release or plosion (Figure 4.7). These sounds are called plosives, for example ‘p’, and again they can be formed with or without accompanying vocal cord vibration (voicing), for example ‘b, p’ and ‘d, t’.

Figure 4.7. The basic phases of a plosive.

Consonants are usually described by the place and the manner in which they are formed. The important places of articulation in English are the lips, teeth, palate and glottis, although it is often sufficient to state the place of articulation as front, middle or back. The manner of articulation may be plosive, fricative, nasal or ‘semivowel’. Nasals and semi-vowels are produced without turbulence and closely resemble vowels. They are voiced and have a formant structure. Nasals are produced when the soft palate, or velum, is opened to permit airflow through the nose. The complete description should include whether the sound is voiced or not, for example: p can be described as a front voiceless plosive; b can be described as a front voiced plosive; f can be described as a front voiceless fricative.

4.4.3 Understanding running speech In running speech, not every sound is formed carefully and precisely, but rather each individual sound is qualified by the sounds that come before and after. This requires less effort from the speaker and, in rapid speech, a movement is often not finished but only started and then carried on towards the next. Speech is a continuum of rapid finely skilled movements with much overlapping, of which the speaker is unaware but which is reflected in the acoustic spectrum.

Speech and intelligibility

75

Time is a very significant aspect of sound perception and the sounds of speech change continually. The formants of the vowels show some variation depending on the adjoining sounds. The articulators do not move instantaneously but rather ‘glide’ from one position to another. This can be observed on a spectrogram. The middle of the vowel, where the frequency is relatively stable, is called the steady state. The changing part is called the transition or glide. The transitions (Figure 4.8) are most obvious in formant two of the vowel, but are present to a lesser extent in other formants.

Figure 4.8. Examples of transitions in the vowel formants.

The transitions reflect the movement from one place of articulation to another. The noise of a consonant is normally the primary cue in recognition, but the transitions can be very important. Transitions exist in all formants but those in the second formant are the most important. However, it is likely that the hearing-impaired may use the transitions in formant one, which are not important with normal hearing. Time factors are also important in the recognition of speech and these can be carried at all levels of signal, so should be useful even to profoundly deaf people. In general, vowels are longer than consonants, although of course not all are the same length; some are very long and some relatively short, so, for example, ‘ee’ is almost twice the length of ‘i’ (‘ee’ is approximately 180 milliseconds in length, ‘i’ is only approximately 100 milliseconds). Diphthongs are formed by the union of two vowel sounds and are therefore the longest of all vowel sounds. The length of a vowel is to some

76

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

extent governed by the following consonant. A vowel will be longer if it is followed by a short consonant, and vice versa (Figure 4.9). These relative intensity cues are very important, especially to the hearing-impaired. Vowels have greater intensity than consonants. The strongest sound in English is the vowel ‘aw’, the weakest is the consonant ‘th’; hence the word ‘thaw’ contains the greatest possible intensity variation, about 30 dB. The level of intensity varies constantly as we make our voices louder or quieter but the relative difference between the sounds remains the same, whatever intensity is used.

Figure 4.9. Vowel length is influenced by the length of the following consonants. The vowel in ‘knees’ is much longer than the same sound in ‘niece’ where the following consonant is long.

The average intensity of speech ranges from about 35 dBA to 65 dBA, that is, it has a range of about 30 dB. This varying intensity can also be shown in the ‘average speech spectrum’, which is sometimes drawn on the audiogram, where the average intensity range of speech energy, expressed in dBHL, can be used to predict what a hearing impaired individual is likely to hear (see Figure 7.12). The following list gives the approximate order for intensity from loudest to quietest speech sounds: 1. vowels such as ‘aw,’ ‘ee’; 2. vowel-like, such as ‘l’, r’; 3. nasals, such as ‘m’, ‘n’; 4. voiced plosives and fricatives, such as ‘v’, ‘g’; 5. voiceless plosives, such as ‘p’, ‘t’; 6. voiceless fricatives, such as ‘f ’, ‘s’.

4.5 HEARING LOSS AND SPEECH PERCEPTION Most hearing-impaired people have hearing for vowels but unfortunately vowels give little meaning to the sentence. Although a gross oversimplification, it is often helpful to think of the written pattern, and if a sentence is presented without consonants it is very difficult to understand:

Speech and intelligibility

77

- - e -u- i- - -i-i- If the same sentence is presented without vowels, the picture is much clearer: Th- s-n -s sh-n-ng The high information content of consonants is unfortunate as they are largely high in frequency and low in intensity, making it difficult for the hearing impaired to perceive speech clearly. Vowels are largely low in frequency and high in intensity. They are easier to hear than consonants and they may also make hearing of consonants more difficult through the upward spread of masking (low frequency sounds may linger and tend to mask weak high frequency sounds). Hearing for vowels alone is not enough but even if hearing is defective, speech can be a successful means of communication because it is so rich in redundant cues. To some extent, it is possible to predict what a person can hear from the audiogram. (a) Vowels • To hear vowels, the first two formants must be perceived and therefore hearing to 3 kHz is needed. • Hearing up to 2 kHz only, cuts off formant two and therefore creates difficulties in hearing front vowels ‘ee’ and ‘i’. • With hearing only below 1 kHz, vowel discrimination becomes very difficult as nearly all of the second formant is gone, but some back vowels can be discriminated. • With hearing only below 500 Hz, there remains a thread of pitch variation and detection of whether a sound is voiced. (b) Fricatives Fricatives will only be heard with some high-frequency hearing present since they have little energy below 2 kHz. To hear fricatives adequately, hearing up to at least 6 kHz is required. (c) Plosives These short bursts of sound are difficult to hear but cues are available in the preceding silence or stop, in the length and in the transitions to the vowel formants. Hearing up to about 800 Hz is required to hear front plosives, mid-plosives are higher in frequency, needing hearing up to about 2 kHz, back plosives higher still, up to about 4 kHz.

78

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The articulation index (AI) (Pavlovic, Studebaker and Sherbecoe, 1986) or speech intelligibility index (SII) can also be used to predict intelligibility from the audiogram – see Figure 4.10. An AI of 0.40, for example, means that approximately 60% of the speech signal should be available to the listener at normal conversational levels.

Figure 4.10. The count-the-dot audiogram form for calculation of the Articulation Index (after Mueller and Killion, 1990). The number of dots falling within the residual hearing area indicates the percentage of the speech signal available to the listener.

4.6 HEARING LOSS AND SPEECH PRODUCTION Where hearing is available it is used not only to hear others but, unconsciously, to monitor the speaker’s own speech. This is known as auditory feedback. A speaker hears his or her own speech partly by air conduction but also all voiced sounds are heard by bone conduction. This is the reason why people may not immediately recognize their own voices when they are played back from a tape recorder – they are not used to hearing them by air conduction only. If there is a hearing impairment, auditory feedback is less reliable and individuals with a sensorineural loss usually speak loudly, so they can hear themselves. Those with a conductive loss often speak too quietly because they continue to hear their own voice well by bone conduction, whilst hearing other people more quietly by air conduction. With a severe

Speech and intelligibility

79

hearing loss, monitoring speech through auditory feedback becomes very difficult and speech production may be severely affected. Some profoundly deaf people use their nasal and sinus cavities to resonate the lower frequency sounds, which may be audible to them. Other feedback mechanisms also become of greater importance. Tactile feedback uses the sense of touch and an unconscious knowledge of where the speech organs should be positioned. The motion of the muscles and the joints can also be monitored and this is known as kinaesthetic or proprioceptive feedback.

4.7 SUMMARY Speech perception is really the recognition of patterns. All languages have a high degree of redundancy, which makes them easy to understand. The speech message contains many redundant cues, both acoustic and nonacoustic, on which a person can draw when the need arises. The hearing impaired must process language in a different way, evolving their own set of cues to help them. It is possible to predict, to some extent, what a person can hear from their audiogram; it is much more difficult to predict how they will use what they may hear because each person varies in their sensitivity to the cues available.

FURTHER READING Martin M (ed.) (1997) Speech Audiometry. 2 edn. London: Whurr. Moore BCJ (1997) An Introduction to the Psychology of Hearing. 4 edn. San Diego: Academic Press. Sanders D (1982) Aural Rehabilitation. Parts I and II. Englewood Cliffs NJ: PrenticeHall. Schow RL, Nerbonne MA (1996) Introduction to Aural Rehabilitation. 3 edn. Boston MA: Allyn & Bacon.

Chapter 5 The basic hearing aid system

5.1 THE BASIC COMPONENTS OF A HEARING AID 5.1.1 Introduction A hearing aid is simply a miniature public address system (Figure 5.1). Sound waves strike a microphone, which converts this energy into a weak electrical signal. The signal is fed into an amplifier. The amplified signal is used to drive a loudspeaker, which converts the electrical signal back into acoustic energy. The sound waves generated are then ‘piped’ into the external ear canal. The acoustic energy delivered to the ear is always greater than that received by the microphone. This additional energy is provided by the battery.

Figure 5.1. A hearing aid system.

80

The basic hearing aid system

81

Hearing aids are signal processors in that they alter the input signal with the aim of improving it for the user. Unfortunately it is not yet possible to increase the signal strength without introducing some distortion – that is, the output signal differs from the input signal in parameters other than intensity. In some applications the signal is deliberately modified with the aim of improving speech intelligibility. The following sections describe the basic components used in a simple hearing aid system.

5.1.2 The microphone (a) Introduction A transducer is a device that converts energy from one form to another form. A microphone is a transducer. It converts acoustic energy into electrical energy, either by direct contact with the vibrating source or, more usually, by intercepting sound waves radiating from a source. Microphones that pick up sound waves from the air have diaphragms to collect the acoustic energy. They fall into two basic categories according to whether one or both sides of the diaphragm are exposed to sound waves. Pressure microphones These are microphones that have only one side of their diaphragm exposed to the sound waves. The other side is sealed off, except for a small aperture to allow the atmospheric pressure to equalize on both sides on a long-term basis (like the Eustachian tube in the ear). These microphones respond to minute variations in the surrounding air pressure. They therefore operate irrespective of the direction of the sound source – unless their physical characteristics dictate otherwise – and are said to be omnidirectional. Pressure gradient microphones These are microphones that have both sides of their diaphragms exposed to the sound waves. They operate by virtue of the difference in pressure existing between the front and the back at any given moment. This difference is a function of the different path length for the sound waves between the front and the back of the diaphragm. Obviously this path length difference will vary with the angle of incidence; this type of microphone has therefore a directional response.

82

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(b) Types of microphones There are four main types of microphone: • The carbon microphone. In the carbon microphone sound pressure variations, acting on a diaphragm, are applied to a collection of carbon granules, thereby varying their resistance to an electrical current due to an applied voltage. This type of microphone has a high output and a non-linear characteristic, which tends to mute low level noise and saturate when subjected to very loud sounds. It is thus very suitable for use in telephones but, due to its high noise level and variable output, is not often used for other purposes. • The piezo-electric (crystal) microphone. The crystal microphone works on the principle that certain crystalline materials such as quartz generate small electrical signals when physically stressed. Various configurations are produced in which the movement of a diaphragm causes a wafer of the crystal to either twist or bend (Figure 5.2). Crystal microphones have a very high impedance. They must be connected to an amplifier (usually a field effect transistor – FET) with a matched impedance otherwise the high frequency response will be lost. Low frequency response is generally good and the very nature of the design means that they are robust and stable.

Figure 5.2. A piezo-electric (crystal) microphone. (After Davis and Silverman, 1978.)

• The dynamic (moving coil) or electromagnetic microphone. The dynamic microphone consists of a fine coil of wire around a balanced armature, which is attached to a diaphragm and suspended in a permanent magnetic field (Figure 5.3). When sound pressure waves hit the diaphragm, the diaphragm moves the coil in proportion to the wave

The basic hearing aid system

83

intensity and causes the coil to cut across the fixed lines of magnetic flux supplied by the permanent magnet. This induces a current in the coil, the amplitude of which is proportional to the distance moved and the speed of movement. In order to reduce unwanted resonance (vibration) of the diaphragm, the coil must be kept light, consequently the impedance of moving coil microphones tends to be low. Stray magnetic fields can cause interference.

Figure 5.3. A dynamic (moving coil/balanced armature) microphone (After Davis and Silverman, 1978.)

• The capacitor (condenser) microphone. The capacitor microphone uses electrostatic principles rather than the electromagnetic principles used by a dynamic microphone. The microphone consists of two very thin plates, one moveable and one fixed, which form a capacitor (formerly called a condenser, hence the name condenser microphone). Variations in the sound pressure cause the diaphragm to move with respect to the back plate so that the capacitance varies in relation to the sound wave. The capacitance is determined by the composition and the surface area of the plates (which are fixed), the dielectric or substance between the plates (which is air and fixed), and the distance between the plates (which varies with sound pressure). In order to obtain an output, the variable capacitance must be turned into an electromotive force (emf). This is done by applying a polarizing potential through a high resistance. Variations in capacitance caused by the movement of the diaphragm are thus converted into a voltage across the resistor, which is then applied to an amplifier (usually an FET). Some capacitor micro-

84

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

phones employ electret diaphragms (Figure 5.4). These are commonly known as ‘electret microphones’. The term ‘electret’ describes a dielectric substance that exhibits a continuing polarization after an electric field is applied and then withdrawn. The electret polarization is analogous to the magnetic retention of a permanent magnet. From the viewpoint of a designer, a significant advantage of the electret principle is that it obviates the need to supply the capacitor/diaphragm with a polarizing voltage. Compared to the conventional capacitor microphone, the electret offers a potentially higher signal-to-noise ratio, is less susceptible to arcing and exhibits excellent frequency response characteristics. However, the performance tends to deteriorate with time. The electret microphone is the one most commonly used in modern hearing aids. It is particularly suitable for miniaturization.

Figure 5.4. An electret microphone. (After Davis and Silverman, 1978.)

(c) Directional microphones Directional microphones can improve speech recognition in noise by improving the signal-to-noise ratio. Directional microphones may consist of: • One directional microphone, which has two sound entry ports (Figure 5.5). Sound from the front is given prominence over that from the rear by the inclusion of a time-delay network so that sound from the rear is slightly delayed. If the delay is such that sound from the rear enters both sound ports at the same time, the sound waves will cancel each other out. Some low-frequency reduction is also built into the microphone. The degree of extra benefit afforded is probably

The basic hearing aid system

85

only about 3 dB or 4 dB in reverberant conditions (Madison and Hawkins, 1983).

Figure 5.5. A directional microphone system.

• One directional and one omnidirectional microphone. This system switches between the microphones so that only one microphone is effective at any one time. • Two omnidirectional microphones. This dual microphone system (Figure 5.6) replicates the directional microphone with a time delay to the rear microphone. The directional pattern is determined by the distance between the two microphones and by the internal time delay. Variations in the time delay can produce different directional responses. An adaptive digital microphone system is one in which the directional response pattern is automatically altered so that the area of

Figure 5.6. A dual microphone system. (After Csermak, 2000)

86

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

minimum sensitivity is always directed at the most dominant noise source in the rear plane. A single omnidirectional microphone is preferable in some situations (for example in the street or listening to music) and produces less circuit noise than a directional microphone. One of the dual microphones can be switched off to give an omnidirectional response. • A microphone array, which can ‘beam’ into the sound giving an advantage of several decibels. A polar plot, Figure 5.7, is often used to illustrate the effect of a (single or dual) directional microphone. A polar plot is a graph showing the output of the hearing aid, whilst a sound source rotates from 0˚ to 360˚ around the microphone of the aid. Sound arriving at the front, that is at 0˚, is used as the reference point.

degrees angle of rotation

Figure 5.7. A polar plot illustrating a ‘cardioid’ directional response. A cardioid response is one with maximum suppression to the rear (180˚).

5.1.3 The amplifier (a) Introduction Amplifiers are one of the most common of all electrical building blocks. By definition an amplifier is any circuit that provides gain – that is a device

The basic hearing aid system

87

that delivers a higher energy output than the energy input. Of course, amplifiers do not produce energy! The energy source for the output power is an external one, which in the case of hearing aids is a battery. Electronic amplifiers are not used with digital circuitry. Hearing aids are complex pieces of equipment and contain many electronic components. Among these components is the important semiconductor device called the transistor. This device is an amplifier in itself, but it needs to be connected to many other transistors and other components to provide the sophisticated level of control and amplification demanded of a hearing aid. Many transistors are housed in a single ‘integrated circuit’ component in modern electronics. The bipolar junction transistor is an ‘active’ device that can be used to control the flow of current through a load resistor by means of a small power signal applied to its control terminal. One of the most common applications of the transistor is as a voltage amplifier. Modern amplifier circuitry often employs the use of a field effect transistor (FET, also known as a ‘unipolar’ transistor). The FET is a semiconductor device that depends, for its operation, on the control of a current by an electric field. The FET acts as a pre-amplifier because it is able to amplify small signals that are too weak for direct transmission to the amplifier. (b) Amplifier classification and specification In order to describe the requirements of an electronic amplifier for an application it is necessary to specify certain parameters and its class of operation. Amplifiers can be described according to: • • • •

the electrical quantity they amplify; the frequency range over which they amplify; their relative input and output impedance; the class of operation.

The ‘class of operation’ is of particular interest and is therefore considered in detail. Class A Class A operation of a power amplifying transistor is illustrated in Figure 5.8. With this class of operation the transistor is provided with a forward bias so that a current flows without any signal present. The bias current drain is related to the maximum current the receiver will handle. The bias, or no signal, current exists even when there is no signal input and remains independent of signal input level and of volume control setting.

88

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Theoretically, an efficiency of 50% is possible. However, actual operating efficiencies can be less than 25%. When signals are present, the current drain fluctuates within certain defined limits, but the average drain is still the same. Battery life is therefore fairly predictable. In the case of hearing aids, the fact that the power from the battery is being constantly dissipated, even where there is no input signal, is a major disadvantage.

Figure 5.8. Class A and class AB (class B) amplifiers.

Class B A true class B amplifier is one in which the transistor is biased so that zero current flows when no signal is present but there is considerable distortion.

The basic hearing aid system

89

In high-power hearing aids, a modified version of the class B amplifier is used. This modified version is correctly known as a class AB amplifier (Duncan, 1988) but is more commonly referred to simply as class B. In a class AB amplifier (see Figure 5.8) the transistor is provided with a small amount of bias, just sufficient to allow the device to conduct slightly. Compared to a true class B, there is no distortion; however there is a low current drain when no signal is present. When a signal passes through, the current drain depends on the required output level. The higher the output required, the higher will be the current drain. Two transistors can be connected in a push–pull circuit in order to supply more power to the load than can be provided by a single-ended amplifier (single-ended means that only one output transistor is used). The output from the previous amplifier stages passes to a phase splitter, which separates the positive and negative phases of the signal. The positive phase is fed to one output transistor, the negative phase is fed to the second output transistor. The positive and negative phases are amplified separately and then combined to deliver a full wave to the receiver. A push–pull circuit is shown in Figure 5.9.

Figure 5.9. A push–pull amplifier.

The advantages of class AB push–pull amplifiers are: • a greater power output is possible for a given transistor; • the efficiency is greater;

90

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

• there is negligible power loss when the input signal is zero; • because of circuit symmetry, distortion is reduced since it may be shown that even numbered harmonics cancel out. The current drain is proportional to the output signal. As a result, the gain control setting directly affects battery life. Class D Classes A, B and AB amplifiers increase the input signal without significantly altering its shape in the process. This is not so with the class D amplifier. The input signal is transformed into pulses, the time duration of which depends on the instantaneous amplitude of the signal. The process begins with a triangular wave with a frequency that is at least 10 times that of the input signal, typically 500 kHz. The input signal is then added to this triangular wave. The difference between the two signals emerges from a fast voltage comparator as a square wave with a duty cycle proportional to the amplitude. This square wave is then used to switch two output devices, which are either fully on or fully off, the difference being that the times they are on and the times they are off are varied so that the averaged effect can be made to replicate the input signal. Class D amplifiers are very efficient, particularly at high gain, and can produce something like a 50% increase in battery life. Class D amplifiers are increasingly being used in more complex analogue hearing aid circuits. The ‘K-amp’ is not a class of amplifier but uses a class D output amplifier.

5.1.4 The receiver (a) Introduction In the hearing aid industry, the output transducer is usually called the ‘receiver’, whereas in the audio industry it is usually called the ‘loudspeaker’. In principle, a receiver is a microphone in reverse. It converts the amplified electrical signal into acoustic or sound energy and transmits it to the ear. The receiver is the last and often the weakest link in the hearing aid system. Problems stem from the need to produce a relatively wide range of frequencies from such a small component. (b) Air conduction receivers The BTE and ITE receivers are generally of the balanced-armature type (Figure 5.10). The alternating current output from the amplifier is fed to the coil surrounding the armature, which causes it to move within the

The basic hearing aid system

91

permanent magnetic field. This movement is transferred to the diaphragm, which in turn generates sound pressure waves. An external button receiver, as used with body-worn aids, operates on a slightly different principle than that previously described. The signal current in a coil, which is fixed to a core of permeable magnetic metal, modulates the pull of a permanent magnet on a circular diaphragm made of thin magnetic metal. The modulation causes the diaphragm to vibrate, thus producing acoustic energy.

Figure 5.10. A balanced armature air conduction receiver. (After Katz, 1994.)

(c) Bone conduction receivers Bone conduction receivers operate on the ‘reaction’ principle. A mass, free to vibrate inside an enclosed case, is called to do so by a magnetic driving system (Figure 5.11). The vibrations are transmitted through the

Figure 5.11. A bone conduction receiver (After Katz, 1994).

92

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

supporting spring to the case and then to the skin and the bony structure of the head. Essentially, a bone conduction receiver is the same as an external receiver, except that the diaphragm is fixed to the housing.

5.1.5 Client controls (a) Gain (volume) control Many hearing aids have a dial or serrated wheel that serves as a gain control. It does not alter the input sound to the aid but adjusts the amount of amplification of the input signal. The gain control is a potentiometer or rheostat consisting of a fixed circular carbon track. A sliding contact arm connected to the dial moves over the track and varies the resistance to the input signal. An increase in resistance produces a decrease in amplification. The relationship between the movement of the wheel and the increase in gain is not linear. Relatively little gain is available once the volume control is beyond 50% of its total range. Most of the gain (approximately 70%) is delivered in the lower half of the control, while only a limited amount is available in the top half. This is referred to as the ‘taper effect’. Use of the upper half of the control may result in an unacceptably high increase in harmonic distortion. (b) ‘T’ switch A hearing aid can be equipped with a special circuit, which makes it sensitive to fluctuation in a given magnetic field. The circuit consists of a magnetic induction pickup coil mounted inside the case. A fluctuating magnetic field will generate a current in the coil, which is then used to produce acoustic energy. The coil takes the place of the microphone on the input component of the aid. If the ‘T’ position is chosen, the microphone is cut out of the circuit. For further information see section 12.3.2.

5.2 ELEMENTARY ELECTRICITY AND ELECTRONICS All matter can be reduced to its atomic structure. An atom consists of a nucleus, which is positively charged, and orbiting electrons, which are negatively charged. The nucleus takes its positive charge from its protons. The number of protons is the same as the number of electrons, which gives a state of electrical balance. It is a basic principle that opposite charges attract and like charges repel. In some materials, the force of attraction is strong and the electrons

The basic hearing aid system

93

cannot be detached from the nucleus. These materials are insulators. In other materials, the force of attraction is weak and the electrons are easily detached. These materials are conductors. Easily detached electrons are called free electrons. In order for free electrons to flow, an external force or electrical pressure must be applied. An electrical current is a flow of free electrons along a conductor. If the current flows only in one direction, it is a direct current (DC), such as a current from a battery. If the source of electrical pressure constantly changes its polarity from negative to positive, the current flow is alternating. Alternating current (AC) has a frequency; for example mains electricity changes its polarity 50 times per second and its frequency is therefore 50 Hz. The direction and degree of AC current flow can be represented by a sine wave. This indicates a smooth flow of energy, first one way and then the other. This is the same representation as that used to show a pure tone sound wave. Current is measured in amperes (amps), although the small flow of current found in hearing aids is measured in thousandths of an amp – milliamperes. Electrical pressure is measured in volts. This is the force that drives the current around the circuit. Voltage is really a measure of how much energy is available to force the charge from one point to another. Voltage applied to a conductor in a circuit produces a current. If there were no other component in a circuit, the current flow would be controlled by the electrical pressure. Some resistance is essential to limit the current. Resistance can be likened to a tap that affects the mains water pressure and restricts the flow of water. A resistor, as its name suggests, resists or impedes the current flow. It acts as a constriction and allows the current to flow less easily. Resistance is measured directly in ohms, for which the Greek letter omega (Ω) is used as the symbol. The controlled passage of current through a resistance is expressed in Ohm’s law, which states that the current (I) is directly proportional to the voltage (V). The ratio of V to I for a particular conductor is called the resistance (R). This can be written as an equation: R=

V I

A triangle arrangement is useful in remembering the possible variants (Figure 5.12).

94

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 5.12. A triangular aid to memory. (This triangle can be adapted for other formulae such as those used to calculate battery life or wavelength.)

A high resistance restricts the current to a low value; when resistance is small, the current is large. Resistance is one type of impedance found in DC circuits. Electrical impedance is the responsiveness, or lack of responsiveness, of an electrical circuit. In an AC circuit, impedance is termed reactance. Capacitors are passive components used in hearing aids and have the property that the greater the impedance, the higher the frequency, as in a high-pass filter. Transistors are active components, which work on the principle that a small current flowing into a base, controls a much larger current flowing into a collector.

5.3 SIGNAL PROCESSING 5.3.1 Introduction Signal processing is a generic term that includes everything beyond simple amplification (Wright, 1992). All hearing aids have some element of signal processing. Many hearing aids provide automatic signal processing (ASP). An electric current is more readily altered than an acoustic signal. Sound is therefore transduced to electrical energy before it is processed in some way. Many electronic options are available as user or dispenser modifications in addition to the main hearing aid components.

5.3.2 Tone controls Tone control is a process that provides either high (Figure 5.13) or low frequency emphasis, and is similar to the treble (high frequency) and

The basic hearing aid system

95

bass (low frequency) adjustments on a stereo system. The tone control is a filter network, usually between amplifier stages, which allows only the desired frequency to pass through the system. If high frequency emphasis is required, a high-pass filter (low frequencies attenuated) is used, and conversely, for low frequency emphasis, a low-pass filter (high frequencies attenuated) is employed. The terminology can be very confusing, for example: • low-pass filter = low frequency emphasis = treble cut = high cut = L. • high-pass filter = high frequency emphasis = bass cut = low cut = H. Tone controls can be either a switch or a potentiometer (variable resistor), which is adjusted using a small screwdriver, or a computer programmable control.

Figure 5.13. The effect of a bass cut potentiometer on the frequency response. Reduction of the low frequencies provides a subjective high frequency emphasis.

5.3.3 Variable output limiting All hearing aids have a maximum output, which cannot be exceeded whatever the input level or the volume control setting. This level is often restricted by the characteristics of the receiver. If the maximum output is such as to cause discomfort to the user, some form of output limiting should be used. There are two methods of limiting: peak clipping and automatic gain control.

96

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Peak clipping Having been converted into electrical energy within the hearing aid, the intensity of a sound wave can be thought of as being represented by its amplitude. Peak clipping restricts the amplitude of the wave by cutting off its peaks and hence reducing its intensity (Figure 5.14). Whenever the peaks in the input signal exceed the pre-set maximum output limit, these peaks will be clipped off. Peak clipping distorts the waveform by producing something nearer to a square wave. This adds considerable harmonic and intermodulation distortion (section 8.3.5). The distortion produced by peak clipping has little effect on intelligibility because quiet sounds, including the information-carrying consonant sounds (section 4.5), remain unaltered; only intense sounds are reduced, but this may affect sound quality.

Compressed wave

Figure 5.14. The effect of peak clipping and compression on a waveform.

The basic hearing aid system

97

In a class A amplifier, only the peaks on one side are clipped, which produces odd and even harmonics. In a class AB (or ‘B’) amplifier, clipping is symmetrical, producing only odd harmonics. The resulting sound quality is generally more acceptable. Peak clipping should not result in the aid constantly going into saturation; if this occurs the hearing aid audiologist should consider automatic gain control. Automatic gain control Automatic gain control (AGC) is also called compression and, less commonly automatic volume control (AVC). Automatic gain control limits the output of the aid by reducing its gain or volume in the presence of sounds above a pre-set limit (the ‘kneepoint’). The use of compression in a hearing aid is generally dependent on the user’s dynamic range, that is the difference or span between his or her threshold of hearing and his or her uncomfortable loudness level. With severe recruitment, a narrow dynamic range will mean that if peak clipping alone is used to limit the output, weak sounds will not be heard, intense sounds will be too loud and the aid will be in frequent saturation, causing distortion and loss of information from the signal. The function of compression is to control the gain automatically as the signal level changes. Up to a certain point, known as the kneepoint, the gain increases linearly, that is a 1 dB increase in input results in a 1 dB increase in output. Beyond this point, the gain is automatically reduced as the sound level increases ‘compressing’ the signal and avoiding saturation (Figure 5.15). Thus beyond the compression threshold or kneepoint, a 1 dB increase in input may result in, for example, a 0.5 dB increase in output. This produces a compression ratio of 2:1, that is the ratio of input change to output change. (For example, a compression ratio of 3:1 means that an increase of 3 dB in input produces only a 1 dB increase in output.) Compression aids may be obtained with different compression ratios or where appropriate these may be digitally programmed. Unlike peak clipping, compression has a finite onset and offset time, known as the attack and release times. Attack time is the length of time required for the controlling action to come into effect. Recovery or release time is the time taken to return to normal. The attack time should be as short as possible if it is to provide protection quickly at the onset of an intense sound. The hearing aid should also have its maximum output set such that it will provide protection against sudden intense sounds. The release time has to be slower than the attack time to prevent the aid from having an audible ‘flutter’ as the gain adjusts with the rapid changes that occur in a speech signal. An attack time of 5 milliseconds and

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Output (dB SPL)

98

a

Input (dB SPL) Figure 5.15. An input–output graph for peak clipping and compression.

a release time of 50 milliseconds could be typical for a hearing aid, although there are wide variations and adaptive compression is available with automatically varying release times. Automatic gain control provides a feedback loop from a sampling point. Below the preset limit or kneepoint the feedback is too small to affect the circuit. When the kneepoint is reached the gain is automatically adjusted. Automatic gain control may act in response to the input sound level or the output sound level.

5.3.4 Types of compression (a) Output compression Output compression acts to control the gain of the aid in such a way that the higher the signal intensity at the output stage of the amplifier, the lower will be the gain. Output compression is the simplest type of automatic gain control. The kneepoint at which compression starts to operate depends upon the level of the output signal (Figure 5.16). Reducing the kneepoint will reduce the maximum output. However, since the signal level is monitored after amplification, the maximum output is unaltered by the volume

The basic hearing aid system

99

control setting. Output compression is suitable for severe to profound hearing losses as the volume control does not reduce the maximum output. The kneepoint of compression is set at a high input level and thereafter there is a high ratio (greater degree) of compression, usually 5:1 or greater. Clients with this level of hearing loss usually have a narrow dynamic range and this type of compression gives them maximum (linear) gain until the output is close to the uncomfortable level when compression cuts in to limit the output without the distortion of peak clipping. Hearing aids with output compression cannot achieve normal loudness growth but provide strong amplification with comfort. (b) Input compression Input compression differs in that the control threshold is part of the early stages of the amplifier. It is therefore the input signal level that acts to reduce the gain. The kneepoint is set on the input level and is independent of the volume control setting. Whatever the volume setting the kneepoint remains the same. The compression kneepoint does not affect the maximum output, however the maximum output will be reduced with lower volume settings (Figure 5.16). This is unlike output compression, where the maximum output is unchanged by the volume setting. Input compression results in better sound quality than output compression because it acts prior to amplification and therefore produces less distortion.

Output (dB SPL)

Output (dB SPL)

Input (dB SPL)

Input (dB SPL)

Figure 5.16. The position and effect of the volume control in input and output AGC.

100

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(c) Special types of compression Wide dynamic range compression

Ab n (se orma nso l rine loudn e ura l he ss gro arin w g lo th ss)

Sensation level (dBHL)

Wide dynamic range compression (WDRC) uses input compression with a low kneepoint and a low compression ratio in order that the full range of sounds is ‘shrunk’ to fit within the reduced dynamic range of the listener. The hearing aid is in a ‘mild’ compression mode most of the time and weak sounds are amplified much more than loud sounds. As with all compression aids, maximum (linear) gain is provided below the kneepoint. Because the kneepoint is low in WDRC aids the compression control (sometimes also called the TK or threshold kneepoint control) is viewed as a gain booster for weak sounds. This means that weak sounds can be heard whilst loud sounds are not uncomfortable for the listener. This is an attempt to correct abnormal loudness growth (see Figure 5.17). Wide dynamic range compression is ideal for mild to moderate hearing losses.

Hearing level (dBHL)

Figure 5.17. Wide dynamic range compression seeks to correct abnormal loudness growth by providing (a) more amplification to low levels of sound and (b) relatively less amplification as the input sounds become louder.

Level dependent frequency response Level dependent frequency response (LDFR). These compression circuits vary the frequency response with the input level. There are two basic LDFR circuits: BILL (bass increases at low levels) and TILL (treble increases at low levels). Some hearing aids use both BILL and TILL, for example using BILL in the low frequency channels and TILL in the high frequency channels.

The basic hearing aid system

101

• BILL has a wide frequency response in quiet surroundings but activates a low cut filter when the input reaches a certain level. This kind of circuit is most suitable for flat or gently sloping losses and gives a high frequency emphasis to high level signals which helps in background noise. • TILL is the opposite of the BILL circuit. It provides high frequency emphasis at low input levels and a flat frequency response with high input levels. This kind of circuit provides more gain for the high frequency consonant sounds in speech than for the louder vowels, which have less information content (see Chapter 4). Frequency dependent compression In frequency dependent compression the kneepoint or threshold is not fixed but alters according to frequency. This means that compression is only used in those frequency bands where it is necessary, rather than the whole circuit going into compression. Curvilinear compression

Output dB SPL

Curvilinear compression has a compression ratio that increases as the input increases, giving the characteristic curvilinear shape, see Figure 5.18. In effect, curvilinear compression combines wide range compression

Input dB SPL

Figure 5.18. An input–output graph showing curvilinear compression.

102

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

for low intensity sounds with compression limiting (avoiding saturation) for high intensity sounds. The choice between the various modes of output limiting depends upon the hearing loss and the client’s acoustic environment (section 9.2.2(d)).

5.3.5 Multi-channel systems A multi-channel hearing aid facilitates the division of the frequency response into sections or bands, which can then be treated differently to provide a precise and complex frequency response curve that may be able to match the client’s needs more closely. ‘Channel’ refers to a frequency region that is processed independently. A ‘band’ refers to a frequency region that is filtered. Where two channels meet, the processing will be affected, which is known as ‘cross-channel coupling’. The need for a multi-channel system may be indicated by an unusual audiogram shape, which would benefit from varying treatment in the different frequency regions, as for example a steeply falling graph with a region of good low frequency hearing. More than three channels in a hearing aid may not necessarily be advantageous as, if the crossover frequencies are too close together, the same speech sounds may be acted upon in different ways causing confusion to the listener. The different channels may offer not only the facility to alter the gain but also the output and any compression in the various frequency bands. Where each channel has its own compression circuit, different kneepoints, compression ratios and attack and release times may be selected in the different bands. Shorter attack and release times are usually preferred in the higher frequencies than those used in the lower frequency channels. The kneepoint can be altered in each frequency channel to suit the user’s dynamic range. The frequency that marks each change in frequency channel is known as the ‘crossover frequency’. Twin channel aids may be relatively simple and their adjustment can be effected using trimmer potentiometers. Multi-channel systems are usually programmed via a computer, although such aids may be digitally programmable (analogue aids), most are fully digital.

5.3.6 Signal processing for noise reduction Low frequency reduction A hearing aid with a frequency response that is well suited to a quiet environment may be quite inadequate in situations of noise. Many hearing aids therefore offer some switched in bass cut or ‘noise suppression’. This

The basic hearing aid system

103

means that the aid amplifies the full frequency response in quiet conditions but operates a reduction in low frequency gain when it is necessary to reduce background noise. Some hearing aid systems provide automatic noise reduction (ANR), so that the aid automatically adapts to the level of background noise by reducing low frequency gain. When the background noise ceases, the aid returns to its normal state. This kind of ANR is only suited to clients who have a need for some low frequency gain; it cannot work where there is no gain in the low frequencies to reduce. Speech recognition Certain ASP systems use the temporal as well as the frequency characteristics to differentiate background noise. Background noise tends to produce a fairly steady sound signal unlike speech, which fluctuates rapidly. The aid may therefore reduce low frequency amplification in the presence of steady state input signals, or may reduce all steady state signals regardless of frequency. Noise reduction programmes Certain hearing aids offer a number of different frequency responses, which can be selected by the user according to the acoustic environment. The options may be selected using a switch or a remote control. Responses are often programmed for: • quiet conditions, where the full frequency response is available; • noisy conditions, where there will be some low frequency gain reduction; • listening to music, where a full flat frequency response is provided and any speech processing is inactive. Digital hearing aids are discussed further in Chapter 6.

5.4 SUMMARY A hearing aid consists of four basic parts: • • • •

microphone; amplifier (or digital ‘chip’); receiver or bone conduction transducer; power supply.

A transducer is a device that converts energy from one form to another form. In a hearing aid, the microphone and the receiver are the principle transducers.

104

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

There are four main types of microphones: • • • •

carbon; piezo-electric; dynamic; capacitor.

Some capacitor microphones employ electret diaphragms. ‘Electret’ is a term that describes a substance with a permanent electrical charge. Electret microphones are most widely used in hearing aids. The diaphragm and the back plate of an electret microphone essentially form the two plates of a capacitor separated by a small air space. The back plate is coated with an electret film, which has a permanent charge. Variation in sound pressure causes the diaphragm to move and thus varies the distance between the two plates. The varying distance causes a fluctuating voltage as an analogue of the acoustic signal. This is passed through a field effect transistor (FET) for pre-amplification and then to the amplifier. The electret microphone has a wide, flat frequency response, is accurate and sensitive, has low internal noise and is easily miniaturized for use in hearing aids. A receiver transduces electrical energy into acoustic energy (or mechanical vibration, in the case of a bone conduction aid), which is the reverse function of the microphone. Internal air conduction receivers are generally of the rocking or balanced armature type. External receivers, as for bodyworn aids, are more usually of the ‘moving iron’ type. Bone conduction receivers are essentially the same as the moving iron air conduction receiver, except that the metal diaphragm is directly connected to the receiver case and therefore results in mechanical vibration. Modifications to the hearing aid that may be available include tone controls and output limiting. Multi-channel systems divide up the frequency response into frequency bands, each of which is treated separately. Automatic or adaptive signal processing aids automatically adapt to the acoustic conditions in some way, this usually includes reducing the low frequency gain in conditions of background noise. Input compression is widely used in digital hearing aids. Where wide dynamic range compression is used the aid is in a state of ‘mild’ compression most of the time. This is most suited to mild and moderate hearing losses. Output compression tends to be used for more severe and profound losses. Output compression provides linear gain until near maximum output but then goes into ‘strong’ compression to keep the output below discomfort with the least possible distortion.

The basic hearing aid system

105

FURTHER READING Chasin M (1997) CIC Handbook. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group. Katz J (ed.) (1999) Handbook of Clinical Audiology. 4 edn. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Venema TH (1998) Compression for Clinicians. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group. Volanthen A (1995) Hearing Instrument Technology for the Hearing Healthcare Professional. Switzerland: Phonak.

Chapter 6 Digital hearing aids

6.1 ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL Since the introduction of digital hearing aids, traditional hearing aids have become known as ‘analogue’ hearing aids in order to differentiate the different type of signal processing involved. Acoustic energy is difficult to process directly. In an analogue hearing aid the acoustic signal is converted or ‘transduced’ into an analogous electrical signal, that is an electrical signal with the same waveform as the original signal. The acoustic waveform and its analogue electrical waveform are continuous signals. A digital waveform is not a continuous signal but is made up of discrete (separate) values. Digits or numbers are used to represent the electrical signal, not varying voltages as used in analogue aids. In effect, a digital hearing aid uses a computer to process the signal, which facilitates the use of mathematical techniques that would be impossible with analogue electronics. The electric current passes through the silicon chip of the computer as a series of pulses and these form a very simple code, which consists of only two signals. These are either off (no pulse) or on (a pulse). This is known as the binary code and the signals are commonly written as 0 (off) and 1 (on). Amplification and other processing of the signal takes place before the signal is converted back to an acoustic signal at the receiver. Signal processing is a general term, which is generally taken to include everything beyond straightforward amplification (Wright, 1992). All hearing aids include an element of signal processing but in digital hearing aids the signal processing is very sophisticated. A conventional analogue hearing aid can offer adjustments using resistor or ‘trimmer’ controls. However, the space required by the resistors restricts the degree of flexibility. Digital signal processing (DSP) is controlled within a tiny silicon ‘chip’ and can offer numerous strategies, parameters and programs without compromising space. The increased 106

Digital hearing aids

107

flexibility and accuracy offered by digital signal processing means that one digital hearing aid fulfils the requirements previously met only with several different analogue hearing aids.

6.2 SAMPLING AND QUANTIZATION 6.2.1 Introduction Digital signal processing involves converting an analogue signal into a digital format. This occurs in an analogue to digital converter (A/D) located at the beginning of the circuit, see Figure 6.1. The process consists of two parts: • sampling (concerned with time); • quantization (concerned with amplitude). When the signal has been converted or digitized, it can be processed by predetermined instructions, which are referred to as algorithms.

Analogue– digital converter

Software (alrorithm)

Digital– analogue converter

Figure 6.1. Block diagram of a digital hearing aid. (After diagram supplied by A&M Hearing Ltd.)

6.2.2 Sampling Sampling measures the signal at equally spaced moments of time. Any amplitude values that occur between these spaces of time are not measured and this information is lost. The sampling rate is important as the signal must be sampled often enough to provide sufficient information to recognize the original signal. The sampling frequency is the number of

108

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

times per second that the amplitude value of the signal is measured. Each cycle of a wave must be represented by at least two sampling points (at the peak and at the trough) to recognize the presence of a particular frequency component. Many more samples are required to capture the wave shape, see Figure 6.2. The Nyquist frequency is the highest frequency component that can be captured by a given sampling rate. For example, with a sampling rate of 2 kHz, the Nyquist frequency is 1 kHz. The minimum sampling rate must be more than twice the Nyquist frequency (called after Harry Nyquist who observed and published his sampling theorem in 1928 after work with maximum transmission rates of telephone channels).

Figure 6.2. Although two sampling points are the minimum to allow us to recognize a particular frequency component more sampling is required to represent the wave shape. (After diagram supplied by A&M Hearing Ltd.)

A sampling rate that is too low will result in the points being joined up in such a way that they represent a completely different frequency. Transformation of sinusoids into different frequencies in this way is referred to aliasing and obviously is not desirable, see Figure 6.3. When considering complex sound made up of multiple frequencies it is necessary to decide what bandwidth of frequency is required. Any frequencies that are higher in frequency than the half sampling frequency will be aliased (transformed into another frequency) causing error. An anti-aliasing

Digital hearing aids

109

Figure 6.3. An aliased signal. (a) A very slow sampling rate is used. (b) Under-sampling produces too few points to provide an accurate representation of the original signal. (c) Errors arise when the points are joined together. (After diagram supplied by A&M Hearing Ltd.)

filter (low pass filter) is used to filter away signals of frequency above half the sampling rate. Obviously the rate must be set so that important information will be available and what is filtered away is of little consequence. In a compact disc recording, information is required up to 20 kHz so the sampling rate must be higher than 40 kHz (twice the highest frequency to be preserved: 2 × 20 kHz) and usually the rate chosen is 44.1 kHz. In hearing instrument technology, where the bandwidth of speech preservation is important, the sampling frequency rate is typically between 10 kHz and 20 kHz.

110

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

6.2.3 Quantization The purpose of quantization is to assign a recognizable mathematical value to the amplitude of the sinusoidal wave at each point of time. Whereas we usually count in base 10 (which involves using numbers 0 to 9), it would be difficult for a machine to work in a complex number base. However, the binary (or base 2) system of counting uses only noughts and ones. As it is easy for a machine to detect whether a signal is off or on, this is used to represent 0 or 1. For example: 0 in base 10 is 0 in binary format 1 in base 10 is 1 in binary format 2 in base 10 is 10 in binary format 3 in base 10 is 11 in binary format 4 in base 10 is 100 in binary format 5 in base 10 is 101 in binary format 6 in base 10 is 110 in binary format 7 in base 10 is 111 in binary format 8 in base 10 is 1000 in binary format. Just as in base 10 we can create very complex numbers with a series of digits between 0 and 9, so in base 2 very complex numbers can be created with a series of noughts and ones. Figure 6.4 shows this graphically. The term ‘bit’ is used to refer to how many binary digits are available to represent a value. The number of bits corresponds to the power of the number in base 2. For example, three-bit processing would mean there were 23 (2 × 2 × 2 = 8) quantization levels available. Ten-bit processing would mean there were 210 (1024) quantization levels available. The more levels there are available, the more accurate will be the representation of the original signal. At present, digital hearing aids use between 16-bit and 32-bit processing. The flow of pulses is controlled by transistors or ‘gates’, which switch the flow off and on. Thousands of gates are arranged in circuits to create patterns of pulses that can carry out very complex calculations by working through them step by step (Reffin-Smith and Watts, 1992). A sound wave (sinusoidal signal) is converted into a series of levels that correspond to specific amplitude values. The more levels there are, the more amplitude values can be represented. Low quantization levels means less accurate representation of the original signal as information is lost and therefore errors can be observed in the quantized signal, see Figure 6.4. A high bit system will produce a highly quantized signal that can be

Digital hearing aids

111

Figure 6.4. Quantization error (or quantization noise) reduces as the number of quantization levels used increases. Each diagram shows different quantization levels with the same sampling rate. If a signal is highly quantized, it can be viewed as a continuous signal. (After diagram supplied by A&M Hearing Ltd.)

112

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

viewed as a continuous signal, although each amplitude measurement is represented in binary format.

6.3 PROCESSING THE DIGITAL SIGNAL As the information entered into the system exists as mathematical values occurring at discrete time intervals, it is much easier to identify exact sections of the signal. Decisions or instructions can be made based on the mathematical identification. Instructions referred to as processing ‘algorithms’ are programmed into the chip and will dictate how the hearing aid treats the incoming signals. Some of the instructions are ‘built in’ but many of the processing strategies can be configured by the hearing aid audiologist to meet the individual’s requirements. The hearing aid is programmed via a personal computer (PC) using the industry standard ‘Hi-pro’ box as the interface between the hearing instruments and the PC, see Figure 6.5. The software database used as standard in the hearing aid industry is ‘NOAH’. NOAH is the platform on to which hearing instrument software is loaded. Each manufacturer has its own fitting software with associated ‘first fit’ algorithms, see Figure 6.6. After the entry of the audiogram the selected hearing instruments are connected to the Hi-pro by the appropriate cables. It is usual for the software to compute the setting of the hearing instrument as governed by the fitting philosophy or algorithm being observed. Thereafter it is the hearing aid audiologist’s role to evaluate the effectiveness of that first fit and make any parameter adjustments required.

Figure 6.5. The ‘Hi-pro’ interface. ‘Hi-pro’ is short for ‘hearing instrument programming’.(Photograph courtesy of A&M Hearing Ltd.)

Digital hearing aids

113

Figure 6.6. Software showing the first fit response of a digital hearing aid using DSL I/O targets. (Photograph courtesy of A&M Hearing Ltd.)

In DSP hearing aids, the input signal is filtered into distinct areas or channels. Different processing can then take place in each defined channel. The use of multi-channels is not particular to digital instruments but the accuracy is greater than in analogue counterparts. Having discrete areas or channels in which to operate provides the flexibility to reduce or enhance specific parts of the signal. Although sometimes used interchangeably, the term: • ‘channel’ refers to a frequency region where there is active automatic signal processing; • ‘band’ refers to a frequency region that is shaped by passive filters. A positive speech-to-noise ratio (to provide the optimum listening environment for hearing impaired users) is partly achieved in DSP instruments by noise reduction algorithms. Different strategies exist but most noise reduction algorithms will identify the spectral frequency of noise

114

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

and that of speech in each channel. Where noise only is detected the gain for that channel will be reduced. Multiple channels make it easier to act independently on speech and noise. There is disagreement as to how many channels are required to optimize listening. A variety of strategies are used in the different systems. These involve combinations of some or all of the following: • • • • • • • • •

input compression (AGCi); output compression (AGCo); kneepoints; compression ratios; attack/release timings; cross-channel coupling; feedback management systems; twin microphone systems; transient speech enhancement.

Some of these features are available in analogue systems but the flexibility and accuracy are much improved when used with DSP. Noise reduction strategies aim to preserve the speech components comfortably within the wearer’s dynamic range and to mimic normal cochlear function. There is some disagreement regarding the number of AGC regions and the attack/release times that should be employed. Other strategies may also be used to enhance various speech components, for example by detecting specific soft components of speech such as plosives and fricatives and enhancing them with a short-term boost of gain. Digital signal processing works to enhance signal quality and to maximize speech intelligibility in noise. Processes can be accurately applied to specified regions because DSP identifies exact frequency domains in the same way as the grid reference on a map. However, DSP strategies are of no help if the surrounding noise is speech (‘cocktail party’ noise). To combat this situation a dual microphone option (see section 5.1.2) is often used in DSP instruments. This provides the flexibility of switching between omnidirectional and directional microphones. If users can position themselves directly in front of their conversational partners, use of directional microphones will give enhanced gain to their partner’s speech even in situations of ‘cocktail party’ noise. After the signal has been processed it must be converted back to analogue format before being sent to the receiver. This is essentially the reverse of analogue-to-digital conversion: • The processed signal is converted back to quantized levels by reversing the effect of the sampler using the same sampling rate. The resultant

Digital hearing aids

115

waveform will show steps, not because of the quantization levels, which are fine enough not to be noticed, but because the signal was digital and as such only exists at specified times not continuously as the original analogue signal. • The steps are smoothed out. This is achieved using a low pass filter, set to half the sampling rate such that only the original waveform content remains.

6.4 FITTING PHILOSOPHIES 6.4.1 Introduction The aim of fitting a hearing instrument is to compensate for the individual hearing loss and to resolve the issues of handicap that arise as a consequence. Despite the fact that the hearing loss itself can be described objectively by measuring threshold, loudness sensation and uncomfortable loudness levels (ULLs), the individual needs of the client cannot be easily predicted. Fitting based on the description of the hearing loss can therefore only be the start of a fine-tuning process, which takes into consideration the individual needs of the hearing-impaired person. For the fitting of hearing instruments two different basic forms of algorithms can be distinguished (see Table 6.1): • The prescriptive algorithms based on the mathematical calculation of the hearing instrument settings from audiogram data. BERGER, POGO and NAL (original) are the best known of this kind of algorithms. These well-established fitting rules are not suitable to prescribe multitarget gains for various input levels. They are based upon prescribing gain for linear amplification on a basis of either a third or half threshold. • The adaptive algorithms take into consideration individual sound perception of the instrument user. Most non-linear approaches are based upon the premise of normalizing loudness. This means that the prescribed gain for input sounds allows the hearing-impaired person to perceive those input sounds at the same loudness as a normally hearing person would perceive them. These approaches also attempt to restore the normal perceived loudness relationships between different frequency regions within speech. The hearing aid setting is calculated from the difference between the individual sensation of the hearing-impaired person and the statistical average of the hearing sensation values of normally hearing persons. Examples of adaptive algorithms include desired sensation level input/output (DSL I/O) and National Acoustic Laboratory non-linear (NAL-NL1).

116

Table 6.1. Examples of prescriptive and adaptive algorithms Gain rule

Derivation

Application

Reference

Calculation from audiogram Calculation from audiogram Calculation from audiogram Calculation from audiogram Calculation from audiogram for loudness equalization of speech + statistical gain acceptance Calculation from audiogram for loudness equalization of speech + statistical gain acceptance Calculation from audiogram + statistical gain acceptance Calculation from audiogram and predicted loudness growth taking into consideration age related insertion gain differences Calculation from audiogram and predicted loudness growth allowing calculation of desired compression ratio values Calculation from audiogram for loudness equalization of speech + statistical gain acceptance Calculation based on individual loudness sensation measured on a 7-point loudness scale

linear hearing instruments linear in-the-ear hearing instruments linear hearing instruments linear hearing instruments linear hearing instruments

Lybarger (1963) Libby (1986) Berger et al. (1989) McCandless & Lyregaard (1983) Byrne & Dillon (1986)

linear hearing instruments for profound hearing loss

Byrne et at (1991)

non-linear hearing instruments mild to moderate hearing losses

Killion & Fikret-Pasa (1993)

non-linear hearing instruments

Seewald (1988)

WDRC non-linear instruments

Cornelisse et al. (1994)

non-linear hearing instruments

Dillon (1999)

non-linear hearing instruments

Alien & Jeng (1990)

Prescriptive algorithms Half Gain Rule Third Gain Rule Berger Pogo/Pogo 2 NAL (R)

NAL (RP)

DSL

DSL 1/0

NAL-NLl

LGOB Test

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Fig 6

Gain rule

Derivation

Application

Reference

Fitting based on matching individual sound perception Fitting based on matching individual sound perception* Fitting based on matching individual sound perception*

non-linear hearing instruments

Kiessling et al. (1996)

non-linear hearing instruments

Launer (1995)

non-linear hearing instruments

Ludvigsen et al. (1997)

Interactive algorithms Scal Adapt (GN Resound) Loudness Perception Profile (Phonak) Sensogram (Widex)

Digital hearing aids

Table 6.1. Continued

* (loudness mapping)

117

118

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

6.4.2 DSL I/O One of the most popular loudness normalization procedures is DSL I/O (desired sensation level input/output). This is specifically designed to fit non-linear hearing instruments, providing compression over the entire dynamic range. In the case of multi-channel instruments it will provide different compression strategies in each channel based upon the corresponding differing dynamic ranges across the audiogram. The rationale of DSL I/O is to adjust the hearing instrument parameters so that the acoustic dynamic range of a normally hearing person is compressed into the residual dynamic range of the hearing impaired person to be fitted. The objective is to make all sounds audible to the hearing impaired user at the same loudness as they would be to the normally hearing person. The DSL I/O procedure requires threshold and uncomfortable loudness level information at each frequency to determine residual dynamic range and hence the compression strategy to be employed. The maximum output of the amplifier is kept constant at the ULL so that ULL values are not exceeded. If ULL values are not measured, they can be predicted from the measured thresholds based on mean values from a study group of hearing impaired subjects. In this case, the prescribed targets are an approximation and adjustments may be required for the individual fitting. The DSL I/O procedure is described as a level-dependent approach. Three target curves are generated for fitting the hearing instrument. These are for inputs of 40 dB SPL, 65 dBSPL and 90 dBSPL. Different values can be determined within each channel. In the case of a single channel instrument the values may be determined from 2 kHz or from average values over several frequencies.

6.4.3 NAL-NL1 National Acoustic Laboratory non-linear (NAL-NL1) works on a different premise from most other approaches. The methodology is comparable to that employed for NAL-R and NAL-RP (see Table 6.1). The fundamental objective of this approach is to provide gain to the speech frequency areas such that it maximizes speech intelligibility but does not present speech any louder than a normally hearing person would perceive it. It works on ensuring that overall loudness is no greater than that perceived by a normally hearing person listening to the same sound. Some methods, in their effort to restore normal loudness across all frequencies, purposefully prescribe more gain for the lower frequencies as these are perceived to be louder by the normally hearing person. However

Digital hearing aids

119

this conflicts with what we understand to be better for speech intelligibility, in that if low frequencies are amplified too much there is a chance that these will mask the higher frequencies. NAL works to provide equal loudness perception across all frequency regions. Some variation from equal loudness is applied for severe to profound losses as research suggests that this group of people use different cues for intelligibility compared with lesser hearing losses. A complex mathematical formula is used to give prescribed targets based on input levels of 40 dBSPL, 65 dBSPL and 90 dBSPL. The formula for NAL-NL1 is based on hearing thresholds, audiogram slope and the level of the speech input signal. The way in which the formula manipulates this data is based upon a total loudness calculation and on the speech intelligibility or articulation index (see section 4.5). The result of this formula is a prescription of gain at each of the frequencies and speech levels.

6.4.4 Computer assisted ‘first fit’ Having selected the desired prescriptive approach, fitting systems will automatically calculate the target gains. The hearing instrument’s parameters will be programmed to comply with the input/output function prescribed. Most systems will give the option to enter other information, which can be incorporated into the first fit algorithm. Details (such as whether the fit is monaural or binaural, for adult or child, and, what tubing and venting is to be used) can all be accounted for in the prescribed targets. Some systems will provide for additional gain requirements if the hearing loss entered is of a mixed or conductive origin. First fit algorithms are based on objective research and mathematical models. They provide a very good starting point for the setting of the hearing instruments. The fitting must be verified and the aid fine-tuned to take account of the client’s needs, experiences and satisfaction levels.

6.5 EVALUATION OF DSP INSTRUMENTS Evaluating digital hearing instrument fittings may be achieved in the same way as with any conventional hearing instruments, see Chapter 11, but the stimuli used for testing digital hearing aids must be chosen with care as traditional test signals may not be appropriate. The sweep or composite noise signals routinely used in probe microphone, functional gain or hearing instrument test box measurements are often detected by DSP hearing instruments as noise. When these signals are used, the measured performance of the hearing instrument will reflect the noise adaptive parameters and not the gain supplied to speech.

120

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Most probe microphone systems offer ‘speech noise’ as a stimulus type but this will also give rise to erroneous representation. Speech noise is derived from the long-term average speech spectrum and is presented as a composite speech noise signal, which is presented at a constant sound level. Digital signal processing interprets this signal as noise because it is at a constant level whereas the intensity of real speech fluctuates randomly. Many digital hearing aids recognize the difference between speech and noise by detecting the spectral shape (frequencies) and the modulation characteristics. For this reason the working group HACTES (Hearing Aid Clinical Test Environment Standardization) has developed a series of test stimuli for the International Collegium of Rehabilitative Audiology (ICRA). These test stimuli are referred to as ICRA noise signals. They have been developed in an effort to establish standards for evaluating the performance of hearing instruments in background noise and their non-linear characteristics. The ICRA noise signals are based on live English speech and are formatted to result in a long-term average speech spectrum (LTASS) with the modulation characteristics of natural speech. There are 10 ICRA noise signals including combinations of: • • • • •

male speaker; female speaker; average speech levels; raised speech levels; loud speech levels.

Using these test signals provides information about how the DSP instrument is responding to incoming speech levels. Some hearing aids provide the facility to switch off the adaptive parameters of the hearing instrument so that gain can be directly measured using any stimulus type. However, this will not demonstrate how the DSP is working with background noise and various speech levels.

6.6 SUMMARY Digital signal processing offers increased flexibility due to a greater number of filters (trimmer equivalents) giving: • wide range of options; • accurate reproducibility; • calibrated alterations;

Digital hearing aids

121

• combinations of processing strategies; and • greater control. Digital processing can be used to produce a linear hearing aid but it is most commonly used to provide non-linear compression to compensate for cochlear hearing loss. Adaptive algorithms provide multi-target gains (for soft, medium and loud input sounds) in order to restore normal loudness perception. Thresholds (by air conduction) and ULLs (measured or assumed from statistical data) are required for this. Loudness mapping is sometimes also used to obtain more accurate individual data from the client regarding the level of sound they perceive as soft, medium or loud. The final result should improve acceptability by users as they are able to hear more effectively in a greater number of situations. As with all hearing aids, rehabilitation and after-fitting support are vital (see Chapter 12).

FURTHER READING Johnson K (1997) Acoustic and Auditory Phonetics. Oxford: Blackwell, Chapter 2. Rosen S, Howell P (1991) An Introduction to Digital Signals and Systems for Speech and Hearing. New York: Academic Press. Venema TH (1998) Compression for Clinicians. San Diego: Singular Publishing.

This page intentionally left blank

PART TWO The Practice of Hearing Aid Audiology

123

This page intentionally left blank

Chapter 7 The assessment procedure

7.1 CASE HISTORIES The case history forms an important part of the early management of the hearing-impaired client. A structured interview establishes fundamental information, whilst allowing the hearing aid audiologist to build up rapport, which begins to break down barriers and reduce the client’s fears. Hearing-impaired adults usually seek help only when they have reached a stage at which they can no longer ignore their hearing loss. The case history can provide an insight into the client’s reasons for attending, highlight particular areas of difficulty and reveal the client’s attitudes and expectations. Such information is generally most readily obtained using an informal conversational approach, with careful listening, observation and gentle probing. A short form or list of questions to act as a prompt (Figure 7.1) is often very helpful. The essential information that should be recorded includes: • • • •

the duration of the hearing loss; the rate of deterioration and any fluctuation in hearing levels; the cause of loss, if known, and any family history in relation to this; previous or current audiological, medical or surgical assessment or treatment; • any conditions necessitating medical referral; • previous or current experience with hearing aids; • situations causing hearing and listening difficulty. The pre-audiometric assessment of the hearing-impaired person is an important part of the auditory rehabilitation process. Discussion may help to break down any barriers to progress at later stages and help in establishing mutual understanding. Knowledge of the client’s history may be 125

126

Figure 7.1. A typical case history form.

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The assessment procedure

127

particularly helpful if the client has received poor advice previously. A hearing aid audiologist, unless medically qualified, is not in a position to make a diagnosis or prescribe treatment, but the case history provides an opportunity to explore the client’s hearing and communication difficulties and may also reveal certain problems necessitating medical referral. Any case history must attempt to identify those clients for whom medical treatment or advice should be sought and the Hearing Aid Council (1999) provides guidance in clause five of its Code of Practice. This lists 12 conditions that require referral for medical advice and several of these can be discovered or suspected at the case history stage. The 12 conditions are detailed below. 1. Whole or partial obstruction of the external auditory canal that would not allow proper examination of the eardrum and/or the proper and accurate taking of an ear impression. Common obstructions include wax, foreign bodies, build up of dead skin (keratin), outgrowths of bone and otitis externa. Medical referral is made to effect treatment/ removal. An impression should never be taken if there is a risk of pushing the blockage further down. A good view of the tympanic membrane is required to ensure no conditions exist that should be referred under rule 2. 2. Abnormal appearance of the eardrum and/or the outer ear. This rule covers all abnormalities of the pinna, canal and eardrum. Examples affecting the outer ear include conditions such as otitis externa, frostbite, haematoma, carcinoma. Examples of abnormalities of the tympanic membrane include perforations, inflammation and fluid behind the drum. Referral is important to obtain the correct advice and/or treatment. 3. Earache. Earache or otalgia may be due to a wide variety of causes. The pain may be directly related to the ear or may be referred from some other part such as from the neck or the teeth. Medical referral is required for investigation and treatment. 4. Discharge from the ear. Discharge may be caused by otitis externa or otitis media. Medical treatment is required. Whenever discharge is present, extreme care must be taken to observe appropriate equipment sterilisation or safe disposal. 5. Conductive hearing loss where audiometry shows 25dB or greater air/bone gap at two or more of the following frequencies: 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz. Most conductive losses are treatable and a hearing aid system will therefore only be considered after medical advice has been sought. Examples include otosclerosis and ‘glue ear’.

128

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

6. A unilateral or asymmetrical (sensorineural) hearing loss as indicated by a difference in left/right bone conduction thresholds of 25dB or greater at two or more of the following frequencies: 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz. A marked difference between the hearing in each ear may be associated with specific causes such as a tumour or Ménière’s disorder in the early stages. Medical attention is therefore urgently required unless the cause has already been ascertained, for example a unilateral loss due to mumps. 7. Hearing loss of sudden onset and 8. Sudden worsening of an existing hearing loss. Most deafness is gradually progressive in nature. Any hearing loss that can be correctly termed as sudden or suddenly worsening should give rise to concern as it may be symptomatic of a serious disorder. Examples include viral infections, tumours, acoustic trauma, interruption of the blood supply and ototoxic drugs. The hearing aid audiologist should also be aware that some cases may be non-organic in nature. 9. Hearing loss subject to fluctuation beyond that associated with a common cold. Fluctuating hearing loss is a feature of many conductive problems, including Eustachian tube dysfunction. It may also be symptomatic of certain sensorineural disorders, such as Ménière’s disorder and vascular problems. Cases of fluctuating loss require medical investigation. 10. A hearing loss that may be associated with noise exposure. Damage to the auditory system may be caused by a single exposure to very high levels of noise (noise trauma). More usually, noise induced hearing loss is caused by exposure to high levels of industrial noise over long periods of time. The effect of leisure noise, such as loud discotheques or personal stereos, may add to the effect of noise at work. Referral for noise damage may lead to advice regarding ear protection, employer liability and compensation. 11. Tinnitus (noises in the ear(s) or head). Tinnitus frequently accompanies hearing loss but may also occur on its own. Tinnitus is a symptom of many auditory disorders, for example otosclerosis, Ménière’s disorder and noise induced hearing loss. If tinnitus is present, the client must be referred for medical investigation. If medical treatment is not indicated, masking with hearing aids or tinnitus maskers may be helpful. 12. Vertigo, dizziness or imbalance. Vertigo is a hallucination of movement and refers to a vestibular disorder, such as Ménière’s disorder, labyrinthitis or a tumour of the VIII cranial nerve. Urgent referral is therefore required for investigation.

The assessment procedure

129

7.2 OTOSCOPY 7.2.1 Introduction Otoscopy is usually performed prior to audiometry. Visual inspection of the ear is essential to detect abnormalities that should be referred to a medical practitioner, and also to determine the size and shape of the pinna and external auditory meatus before taking impressions.

7.2.2 The otoscope An otoscope will provide both magnification and illumination. It should be supplied with at least three different sized specula. The largest speculum that will fit comfortably into the external auditory meatus should be chosen from these, to provide a wide view of the eardrum, with as much illumination as possible. When using the otoscope, it should be held in such a way as to minimize the possibility of discomfort or injury if the client moves. This can be achieved by holding the barrel of the otoscope like a pencil and resting a finger firmly but gently against the client’s cheek or head. The barrel of the otoscope should not be held pointing downwards as it is more difficult to prevent the speculum accidentally being inserted deeper into the canal by a sudden movement of the head. The specula should be sterilized by an accepted method. There is a legal duty of care with regard to the health and safety of clients (Health and Safety Executive, 1992). The following is the recommended minimum standard for cleaning specula (British Society of Audiology, 1998): 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Wash thoroughly in fresh hot water and detergent to remove any visible contamination. Soak in appropriate sterilizing solution, diluted according to the manufacturer’s instructions, for 20 minutes. The active chemicals in these solutions include chlorhexidine gluconate, cetrimide, dichlorometaxylenol and sodium hypochlorite. Rinse in fresh water. Store dry in a clean container. Hands should be washed thoroughly before handling clean items. It is good practice to wipe clean specula with a suitable swab, saturated with isopropyl alcohol, before use.

130

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

7.

The same speculum may be used on both the ears of one client, unless there is a risk of cross-infection. 8. A speculum must never be used on more than one patient without being appropriately cleaned. 9. Used items should be stored in a sealed container away from clean items. 10. Specula used on patients with discharge or blood in the ear should be stored in a sealed container and disposed of safely, usually via a local health centre or hospital. Rubber gloves should ideally be worn when working on bleeding or discharging ears and such gloves must also be disposed of safely. The above procedure should also be used for cleaning and disinfection of earlight probe tips and all other tools used in contact with the outer ear. Discarded impressions where there is blood or discharge, or bite blocks used for open jaw impressions (contact with saliva), must also be disposed of safely in line with point 10 above. There are also restrictions on items sent by post (HMSO, 1969) – for example, used hearing aids and impressions should be disinfected before posting.

7.2.3 The examination The client should be seated so as to be accessible. Ideally the hearing aid audiologist should also be seated to bring his or her eye-line to the level of the client’s ear. All equipment required should be laid out in readiness on a clean towel, preferably white for reasons of hygiene. The client should be given a simple explanation of the procedure. After washing his or her hands, the hearing aid audiologist should inspect the pinna and the surrounding area for abnormalities, such as signs of tenderness, skin disorder, deformity or previous surgery. The external auditory meatus should be straightened by lifting the pinna upwards and backwards. If the client is a young child the angle of the meatus is likely to be more horizontal or downwards than that of the adult. In this case, therefore, the ear would be pulled gently downwards or horizontally backwards. The correct speculum should be chosen by noting the size of the meatal entrance. Having connected the speculum to the otoscope, the speculum should be placed gently into the meatal entrance. The best view can be obtained by taking the eye down to be on a level with, or looking slightly upwards into, the lens and moving not only the otoscope but also the eye as necessary. After inspection, the speculum should be cleaned and sterilized.

The assessment procedure

131

Inspection with an otoscope should include viewing the external auditory meatus and the tympanic membrane. The meatus should be checked for signs of foreign bodies, wax, inflammation, growths and discharge. The tympanic membrane should be inspected for any variation from normal. The normal tympanic membrane appears pale grey and semitransparent. On otoscopic examination, the handle of the malleus can be seen extending downwards towards the centre of the drum. A cone of light extends from the umbo, following the direction of the jawline. This is light that is reflected back from the otoscope and is known as the ‘light reflex’. The lateral or short process of the malleus can be seen as a white prominence at the upper end of the handle of the malleus, and the blood vessels that supply the tympanic membrane may also be seen. The tympanic membrane as viewed through an otoscope is outlined in Figure 7.2. Inspection should include noting the colour of the tympanic membrane, the presence and position of the light reflex, any scarring or perforations and any other abnormalities. Early signs of otitis media may be found at the otoscopic examination. If there is infection present the tympanic membrane will often appear very red. Failure of the Eustachian tube to aerate the middle ear adequately, whether due to infection or other cause, will result in retraction of the tympanic membrane, which will also appear dull. When fluid begins to collect in the middle ear, the tympanic membrane may begin to bulge outwards and the fluid may sometimes be seen. If the tympanic membrane perforates, the fluid will discharge into the external ear.

Handle of malleus Umbo

Figure 7.2. The normal tympanic membrane as viewed through an otoscope.

132

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

7.3 TUNING FORK TESTS 7.3.1 Introduction Tuning forks may be used in simple brief tests to determine the type of hearing loss. The equipment is inexpensive, light, small and portable and the results are reliable as far as the type of loss is concerned. The tests provide no reliable information with regard to the degree of hearing loss and the results are limited to the frequency of the tuning fork used. Tuning fork tests cannot be performed on patients whose loss is too severe to be able to hear the vibrations of the tines. Tuning fork tests are widely used by otologists to provide early diagnostic information prior to audiometric assessment. They may be used when audiometry is not available, when a full audiometric test is not possible, or as a preliminary indicator of the condition. A tuning fork is a simple device, made of steel, aluminium or magnesium, which vibrates when struck. Its prongs, or tines, move alternately away from and towards each other (Figure 1.1) and produce a relatively pure tone. The fork should not be struck heavily or on a hard surface, as this would introduce harmonics and the tone would no longer be pure. Tuning forks for audiometric investigation require a flat base. A tuning fork should be held by the stem and struck, about two-thirds of the way along the tines, on a rubber pad or on the knee or elbow. Alternatively, the fork may be plucked at the top of the tines. The preferred frequency of fork to be used is 512 Hz (British Society of Audiology, 1987). Other frequencies may be used, but very high tones fade too quickly to be of much use, while very low tones may produce vibrotactile results – that is, they may be felt rather than heard. Whatever frequency is used, the results obtained apply only to that frequency. Several tuning fork tests exist, but those most widely used are the Weber and Rinne tests, which together provide a reliable indication of the type of hearing loss.

7.3.2 The Weber test The Weber test is a test of lateralization; it establishes in which ear a tone is perceived. The client is first asked if he has a poorer ear. The tuning fork is then struck, and its base placed on the midline, usually on the forehead, although it may be placed on the vertex, on the bridge of the nose or on the chin. A hand should be gently placed to support the back of the head. The client is asked where he or she hears the tone: • With normal hearing or an equal loss the tone will generally be heard in the midline.

The assessment procedure

133

• With a unilateral or an unequal sensorineural loss the tone will be heard in the better ear (Figure 7.3(a)). • With a unilateral or unequal conductive loss, the tone will be heard in the poorer ear (Figure 7.3(b)). This is likely to occur because the better ear is able to hear background noise, which masks the tone to some extent. The ear with the conductive loss has no such interference and hears the tone clearly by bone conduction.

(a)

(b)

Figure 7.3. The Weber test.

7.3.3 The Rinne test The Rinne test compares sensitivity by air conduction and bone conduction in one ear at a time. The tuning fork is struck and held with the tines in line with, and about 25 mm from, the canal entrance for 2 seconds (Figure 7.4). The tuning fork is then held, without delay, so that the base is pressed firmly against the mastoid, again for 2 seconds. A hand should be held against the opposite side of the head to provide counter-pressure. The client is asked if he hears the tone louder at or behind the ear: • With normal hearing air conduction is more efficient than bone conduction; the tone is therefore heard loudest at the ear. The same result is obtained with most sensorineural losses. This is known as a Rinne positive. • With a conductive loss the tone appears louder by bone conduction. This is a Rinne negative. • Where there is a ‘dead’ ear or a severe to profound sensorineural loss on the test side the tone may also appear louder by bone conduction. This is known as a false Rinne negative. This result is due to cross-hearing.

134

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(a)

(b)

(c)

Figure 7.4. The Rinne test.

When a Rinne negative result appears to contradict the Weber test result, a false Rinne negative can be suspected. Masking of the non-test ear may prevent cross-hearing but cannot be carried out accurately. Tragal rubbing is the most widely used method. A Barany box can be used but this produces high sound levels and should therefore only be used with care. Tuning fork tests provide a quick indication of the type of hearing loss involved. They are not useful for determining the degree of hearing loss and should not be considered a substitute for pure tone audiometry.

7.4 PRINCIPAL AUDIOMETRIC TESTS 7.4.1 Pure tone threshold determination The method described here is based on the British Society of Audiology’s recommended procedure (British Society of Audiology, 1981) Test Method A. The threshold of hearing can be defined as the lowest level of a sound that is heard for 50% of the times it is presented.

The assessment procedure

135

(a) Signals The test signals should be pure tones of 1 to 3 seconds duration with gaps of 1 to 3 seconds between signals. The tester should be careful to avoid a rhythmic presentation by using a wide variety of signal and gap lengths. (b) Instructions These should be as simple as possible to avoid confusing the client. In most cases, terms such as ‘frequency’ and ‘pure tone’ should be avoided. All the client has to do is respond when a sound is heard, no matter how loud or quiet the sound is and no matter in which ear it is heard. It must be stressed that it is important to respond to even the very quietest sounds when the client may not be absolutely sure that the sound was there. The importance of responding for the entire duration of the sound must also be stressed. (c) Response The client’s response should be silent and not require excessive movement; a raised finger is acceptable but a raised hand is not. A response button and light arrangement is fitted on most audiometers and this is ideal as pressing a button is a positive response from the client that requires minimal effort. The response should last as long as the signal. Although not ideal, in some cases a verbal response or a response in the form of a tap on the table may be necessary, for example, with young children, the very elderly, or those with mental handicaps. (d) Threshold testing by air conduction Any spectacles or large earrings should be removed so that the headphones fit firmly but without discomfort. The headphones should also be positioned carefully so that the test tones will be presented directly into the meatal entrance. If the client reports a difference between the ears, the better ear should be tested first. As it is usually an easily recognizable sound, 1 kHz should be tested first, followed by 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 500 Hz and 250 Hz. The threshold at 1 kHz should be checked again for the first ear and if the apparent threshold is 5 dB different from the first value, the better value should be recorded. If the difference between the first value and the rechecked value is greater than 5 dB, then retesting at other frequencies should be considered, the client first having been reinstructed. The intermediate or half-octave frequencies, that is, 750 Hz, 1.5 kHz, 3 kHz and 6 kHz, will normally not be tested unless there is:

136

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

• a large difference (for example, 20 dB or more) between the results at two adjacent octave frequencies; • suspected noise damage (3 kHz and 6 kHz as the audiogram may dip at these frequencies); • a medico-legal purpose (3 kHz and 6 kHz); • a custom hearing aid prescription (6 kHz and sometimes 3 kHz). The first tone presented should be well above threshold, without being uncomfortably loud, and this can be ascertained by asking the client if it was loud and clear. This lets the client know the type of sound being listened for. The tester should ensure that the client responds correctly and for the full duration of this tone. With experience, the hearing aid audiologist will be able to predict an appropriate starting point. In most cases a 50 dBHL tone will be effective and this will rarely be too loud. However, if there is no response or the client claims that the sound is rather quiet, then the signal should be raised by 20 dB and the test started again. Each time the client responds to a signal, the next signal should be presented at a level 10 dB lower, continuing until the level is below threshold and the client does not respond. After a null response the next signal should be 5 dB higher. This procedure must be strictly adhered to, down in 10 dB steps and up in 5 dB steps. Threshold at each frequency is defined as the lowest level responded to at least half the time in the ascending mode. At least two responses are required at the same level, in the ascending mode, to define threshold. If the signals are presented in a rhythmic and hence predictable fashion clients may respond to signals actually below their threshold. Signals must be presented with no visual, auditory or other cues that might help clients guess when an ‘inaudible’ signal has been presented. (e) Threshold testing by bone conduction When testing by bone conduction, the bone conduction transducer is placed on the mastoid process behind the ear with the poorest air conduction threshold. The transducer must not touch the pinna. Only frequencies from 250 Hz to 4 kHz are used (section 7.5.2). While 250 Hz is included in the British Society of Audiology’s recommended procedures (1981), this frequency is not always tested as, even at low sound levels, responses may be due to feeling rather than hearing (vibrotactile) and harmonic distortion may also occur. Thresholds for air conduction reflect the total hearing loss, whereas thresholds by bone conduction reflect the degree of sensorineural problem. The difference between the two, which is known as the air–bone gap, indicates the degree of any conductive element.

The assessment procedure

137

A purely conductive hearing loss produces thresholds by air conduction, which are poorest in the low frequencies. The bone conduction thresholds should theoretically be 0 dBHL. However, this is not always true as the condition of the middle ear can have a slight effect on bone conduction sensitivity. For example, with otitis media, although low frequency hearing is good, there are often reduced high frequency thresholds by bone conduction; with otosclerosis a dip in the bone conduction thresholds can often be seen at 2 kHz; this is known as Carhart’s notch. Signals routed by bone conduction will be conducted through the entire skull. It cannot therefore be said that the resultant thresholds necessarily apply to the ear behind which the bone conduction transducer is placed. If an unequal sensorineural loss exists bone conduction testing without masking will normally reflect the thresholds of the better cochlea. Bone conduction with masking must be carried out whenever it is necessary to determine precisely the degree of sensorineural hearing loss in each ear separately. The rules for masking are basically the same for bone conduction as for air conduction (section 7.4.2(b)). Masking noise may be applied to the non-test ear either via a headphone or an insert receiver. An insert receiver has the advantage of being physically easier to use and the masking levels required may be lower. Where headphones are used, it is very important to ensure that the test ear is not covered. Covering the test ear will appear to improve the bone conduction thresholds of that ear, due to the occlusion effect. Occlusion occurs because a sound that is transmitted as a vibration through the skull not only travels to the cochlea directly but will also reach the external auditory meatus by this route. Reflections from the walls of the canal enhance the sound, which is then passed via the tympanic membrane. Where there is a middle ear impairment, the occlusion effect may not be seen as the transmission of sound through the middle ear is reduced.

7.4.2 Masking (a) Cross-hearing Generally, a client’s left and right ears can be tested separately by using headphones. However, in certain cases, there is a danger that the sound may cross the head by bone conduction to be perceived by a better ear on the opposite side to that being tested. Air conducted sound has to be sufficiently intense to produce a bone conduction stimulus that will cross over. Some sound will be lost in

138

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

vibrating the skull, so the signal will be heard at a quieter level on the opposite side. This is known as the transcranial transmission loss. The amount of sound lost in this way from an initially air conducted signal will be at least 40 dB, although on average it is more likely to be 60 dB and it can be even more. Cross-hearing only causes a problem in audiometry when the ears have very different thresholds. In fact, it will not cause a problem unless the difference between the ears or between the bone conduction and air conduction is at least 40 dB (the minimum transcranial transmission loss) (Figure 7.5).

(Input 60 dBHL)

(May be heard as 20 dBHL)

Figure 7.5. The problem of cross-hearing.

It may help to clarify the situation to think of a client with one normal ear and one dead or profoundly deaf ear. A tone is fed into the dead ear and, since the client does not respond, the intensity of the tone is raised. When the tone reaches a sufficient level, it will cross the skull by bone conduction. The normal ear will now hear the tone as a very quiet sound and the client will respond. If the audiologist is not aware of the potential problem, she or he could think that it is the poorer ear that is responding. On the audiogram, the threshold of the poorer ear often appears to follow the shape of the better threshold and hence it is called a shadow curve (Figure 7.6). The problem of cross-hearing can be overcome by raising the threshold of the good ear so it can no longer respond and the true threshold of the poorer ear can be determined. This is achieved by introducing a masking noise into the good ear.

The assessment procedure

139

Figure 7.6. Examples of audiograms showing possible shadow curves.

(b) The rules for masking Rule 1 – for air conduction tests Where there is a difference of 40 dB or more between the air conduction thresholds of the two ears at any frequency, the air-conduction test should be masked at that frequency. The better hearing ear receives the masking noise and the worse ear is retested. The assumption is that the better hearing ear is hearing the air conduction test signal by cross-hearing via bone conduction. The transcranial transmission loss for air conduction signals is at least 40 dB. This can be thought of as the intensity required to set the skull into vibration. Rule 2 – for bone conduction tests Where the not-masked bone conduction threshold is more acute than the worst air conduction threshold by 10 dB or more at any frequency, the bone conduction for the worst ear must be masked at that frequency in order to obtain results for each ear separately. It is possible that the not-masked bone conduction result refers to the ear with the worst air conduction threshold. If this is suspected then masked bone conduction thresholds will ascertain this. Cross-hearing is a major problem with bone conduction. The transcranial transmission loss with bone conduction is minimal, usually no

140

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

more than 10 dB. This means that even if the difference between the two ears is as little as 10 dB, the bone conduction signal is likely to be heard more prominently in the better ear, wherever the vibrator is placed. Therefore it is necessary to mask on nearly all occasions where true bone conduction thresholds are required for an ear. It should also be noted that if the masked bone conduction threshold does not change by more than 10 dB, the other ear (BC) should also be tested with masking. Rule 3 – for air conduction tests Where rule 1 has not been applied, but where the not-masked bone conduction threshold is more acute by 40 dB or more than the notmasked air conduction threshold of the worse ear, the worse ear air conduction test will need to be masked. The explanation for this rule is that cross-hearing is occurring by bone conduction. The air conduction headphone is sending sound directly to the contralateral inner ear through the head. Cross-hearing is occurring because the contralateral ear has acute inner ear hearing (that is, hearing by bone conduction) relative to the air conduction thresholds of the test ear. The transcranial transmission loss by this route is at least 40 dB. (c) Method The thresholds for the masking noise must be determined so that the level of masking applied is appropriate. Too little masking will not be effective. If too much masking is applied cross-masking might occur, where the masking noise is heard in the test ear and interferes with the pure-tone threshold determination. Although it is important to be accurate, extreme precision in determining the threshold for masking is not required. It is not necessary to perform a test such as that used for finding the pure-tone threshold in order to establish a masking noise threshold. The threshold of masking is denoted M, in the British Society of Audiology’s recommendations (1986). This is found by introducing the masking noise in steps, out of silence and asking the client to indicate as soon as he can hear the ‘rushing’ noise. The audiologist can use any suitable wording of explanation. For air conduction tests, masking will be applied via the contralateral headphone. For bone conduction tests, an insert masker should be used to present the masking noise but if this is unavailable a headphone can be used. The earphone on the side of the test ear should be positioned on the side of the head and not over the ear as this will result in false bone conduction thresholds due to occlusion. Care must also be taken to ensure that the headphones do not touch the bone conduction transducer. Once the thresholds for masking have been established at the required frequencies, the client will need to be re-instructed to listen for, and

The assessment procedure

141

respond to, the pure-tones while ignoring the masking noise, usually described as a rushing noise. Clients must not be told to expect the masking noise in one ear and the pure tone in the other. If cross-hearing is occurring the client may be hearing the tone contralaterally and it is often difficult for a client to identify the ear in which a sound was actually heard. Clients must simply respond to the tone wherever and however faintly it is heard and ignore the masking noise. The client is first reminded of the sound he is meant to respond to, by quickly re-establishing threshold without masking. To start the masked threshold determination, masking noise is presented to the non-test ear at a level of 10 dB above the masking noise threshold, at M + 10 dB. In the presence of masking the pure-tone threshold is re-established. It is sufficient to present the tone at the previously determined not-masked level to establish if it is still audible while the non-test ear is being masked; if not heard the tone level is increased until the threshold is found. The method used may depend on the client being tested. Masking is then increased by 10 dB, to a level of M + 20 dB. The pure tone threshold is again re-established by the chosen method. This procedure is repeated, with masking going up in 10 dB steps each time, until three pure tone thresholds have been found at the same level for different levels of masking and a masking level of at least M + 40 dB has been used. A certain amount of error is permitted in the pure tone threshold determination and if three pure tone thresholds differ from one another by no more than ±5 dB they are considered the same. This is the true masked threshold. (d) A modified procedure for masking 1. Find the threshold for masking (M) in the non-test ear. 2. Increase the masking level by 20 dB (M + 20). 3. Present the test tone at its original intensity. (When testing by bone conduction, the original threshold must be re-checked at this point.) 4. If the test tone is heard, increase the masking by 10 dB. 5. Present the test tone again at the same intensity as step 3. 6. If the tone is still heard, increase the masking by a further 10 dB and present the tone again. 7. If the tone is heard, despite 20 dB increase in masking (M + 40), the original threshold is confirmed. Cross-hearing did not occur. 8. If increasing masking prevents hearing of the test tone, the tone must be increased. 9. The procedure is continued until two 10 dB increases in masking, that is three different levels, do not affect the audibility of the test tone.

142

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

It is not usually necessary to mask at all frequencies. Two or three frequencies are usually quite sufficient; often 1 kHz and either 2 kHz or 4 kHz are masked. It is often helpful to record the results of masking while the procedure is being performed. This may be done using a masking diagram or in simple columns (Table 7.1). In either case, the audiologist is looking for a ‘plateau’. This is where three consecutive masking levels have no effect on the threshold (or no more than 5 dB). A simplified masking diagram, in which the plateau can be seen, is shown in Figure 7.7. If high levels of masking noise are necessary the noise should be turned down while the results are being recorded in order to avoid discomfort. Table 7.1. An approach to recording masking results using columns Frequency (kHz) 1

Pure-tone threshold (dB)

Masking (dB)

40 (not masked)

10 + 20 30

50 60 70 70 70

30 40 50 60 70

In some cases it is not possible to obtain true masked thresholds because audiometric limits are reached or because the required masking level is so high that it crosses the head and raises the threshold of the test ear. Generally, this occurs in conductive and mixed hearing losses. For example, a bilateral 50 dBHL pure conductive hearing loss indicates that both air conduction and bone conduction masking should be performed. If we assume that the threshold of masking M = 50 dB, then applying the procedure as set out, the initial masking level will be 70 dB. Any level of masking that is at least 40 dB greater than the bone conduction threshold of the test ear may be perceived by the test ear and thus raise its threshold. The subsequent increases in masking noise required may then further raise the threshold resulting in an inability to establish a plateau. Also, at this level of masking, the audiometric limit for masking (which is 100 dB on many audiometers) will soon be reached and once again a plateau cannot be established. It should also be noted that in some cases the masking level may be uncomfortably loud and testing cannot be completed.

143

Apparent pure tone threshold (dBHL)

The assessment procedure

Relative masking level (dB)

Figure 7.7. Simplified masking diagram.

(e) Symbols Where a true masked air conduction threshold differs from the original not-masked value and the not-masked value appears on the audiogram, the not-masked value is a shadow and the symbol should be shaded in. The true threshold should then be drawn on the audiogram. If the masked and not-masked results are the same it is common in the UK to half-shade the symbol. Not-masked bone conduction results are identified by a triangle on the audiogram; masked bone conduction results use special symbols:

•× •× ◗

◗

×

[ ]

True air conduction thresholds for right and left ears respectively, masked if appropriate. Shadow, or possible shadow, results for right and left ears respectively. Suspect results identified by the rules for masking that have not been checked by masking should always be identified as shadows. Masked air conduction thresholds that are the same as the notmasked thresholds. These could be left unshaded but the half-shade indicates that masking has been performed. Not-masked bone conduction thresholds. True, masked bone conduction thresholds for right and left ears respectively.

144

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

A working audiogram may thus contain a plethora of results and symbols. Sometimes a final audiogram will be redrawn with the shadow results omitted or the half-shaded air conduction symbols replaced with open symbols, so the chart shows simply those true results obtained with masking and those for which masking was not required by the rules for masking. (f) Types of masking noise Masking is the raising of the threshold of hearing for one sound by the presence of another sound. In everyday life we are often aware of the effect of masking, for example when trying to hear a voice on the telephone against a background of noise from the television. For the purposes of masking, in pure tone audiometry wide band and narrow band noise are equally effective but narrow band noise is preferred because it is less fatiguing. Narrow band masking thresholds vary across the frequency range, particularly with sloping losses. Narrow band noise should be centred on the frequency of the test tone (Figure 7.8) and have a bandwidth of between one-third and one-half of an octave (British Society of Audiology, 1986). The reference levels for narrow band masking noise are specified in BS EN ISO 389-4:1999. Masking may also be required when carrying out speech audiometry. Speech-shaped or speech equivalent noise is normally used for this purpose. This type of noise is similar to pink noise in that it has its greatest intensity in the low frequencies. (g) Masking for bone conduction A bone-conducted signal is applied directly to the skull and can be picked up by either cochlea or both cochleae. The transcranial transmission loss by bone conduction is very small, between 0 dB and 15 dB approximately. Since there may be no transmission loss, cross-hearing must be assumed in every case. If thresholds are required for each ear separately by bone conduction, masking will be needed on almost every occasion. This will provide accurate information about the type of loss in each ear. The only exception to the requirement for masking to ascertain this is where both of the air conduction thresholds and the not-masked bone conduction threshold are less than 10 dB apart. This represents a bilateral sensorineural loss of equal degree and masked bone conduction will provide no further information. In practice, masked bone conduction is regularly required for diagnostic purposes. It is used less frequently for hearing aid selection but ideally should be used (subject to the criteria discussed above) where a custom-built hearing aid is being prescribed.

The assessment procedure

145

Wide-band noise

Filtered wide-band noise

Narrow-band noise 1

1

( /3 or /2 octave band width; centred on test frequency

Figure 7.8. Types of masking noise.

7.4.3 Determination of the pure tone uncomfortable loudness level (ULL) A client’s dynamic range is bounded by the threshold of hearing and that level felt to be uncomfortable. A hearing aid system should fully utilize the dynamic range and provide sufficient gain and output to make important sounds audible up to but not exceeding the ULL. Accurate measurement of the ULL at different frequencies is consequently of great importance. The method described here is based on that of the British Society of Audiology (1987). (a) Signals The test signals will normally be pure tones, but the method is equally applicable to warble tones and narrow band noise. Signals should be of approximately 1 second duration with gaps of approximately 1 second between signals.

146

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(b) Instructions The ULL is very subjective and it is very important that the client understands what is required. A level felt to be simply ‘unpleasant’ will be lower than the ULL but the test is not intended to discover the threshold of pain; the concept of an ‘uncomfortable’ level must be stressed to the client; it is not a test of endurance. (c) The test The test should start at a level predicted to be comfortable and the signals steadily increased in 5 dB steps until the client indicates that the ULL has been reached. The frequencies to be tested are 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz and 500 Hz, in that order, testing one ear completely before starting on the other. It may be necessary to repeat some frequencies after re-instructing the client, if the results are felt to be unreliable.

7.5 UNDERSTANDING AUDIOGRAMS 7.5.1 The audiogram The results of pure tone audiometric tests are plotted on a graph known as an audiogram. The audiogram form recommended by the British Society of Audiology (1989) is shown in Figure 7.9. This provides a separate graph for each ear, although in some cases the results from both left and right ears are plotted on one graph. It is important to use standard symbols on an audiogram to avoid confusion. The standard symbol for the right ear is a circle, preferably drawn in red, and for the left ear the symbol is a cross, preferably drawn in green or blue. The symbols are joined up by a solid line of the appropriate colour. If the threshold shifts when masking is used, the symbol is completely shaded in. Where masking has been used but the threshold remains unchanged, the normal circle or cross is used. The fact that masking has been employed can be indicated in writing below the audiogram. Alternatively the symbol can be half-shaded, which is a widely accepted variation from the recommended symbols. Bone conduction (BC) thresholds are plotted with a triangular symbol, usually drawn in black. The BC results are drawn on the left or right graph according to the side on which the BC vibrator was placed. This indicates only the position of the vibrator not which ear received the signal, since both ears can receive a bone conducted signal. Where masking has been used to obtain results from each ear separately, a square bracket is drawn opening towards the test side. BC results are joined by a dotted line.

The assessment procedure

147

Figure 7.9. The British Society of Audiology’s recommended format for audiograms. (After BSA, 1989.)

Uncomfortable loudness level is shown by an ‘L’ drawn to face towards the test side. When there is no response at the highest output for the frequency under test, an arrow pointing downwards from the appropriate symbol is drawn to indicate no response. The symbol is drawn at the maximum level tested.

7.5.2 Audiogram interpretation A basic audiogram will show thresholds by air and bone conduction. The results should be interpreted in terms of the: • total amount of hearing loss – that is the loss by air conduction; • sensorineural element – that is the loss by bone conduction; • conductive element – that is the gap, if any, between the air conduction and bone conduction readings. This is known as the air–bone gap. Examples can be seen in Figure 7.10. Sometimes in an audiometric test, the responses obtained may be due to feeling vibrations rather than true hearing. This is a particular problem when

148

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

dBHL

dBHL

dBHL

Amount of BC loss = degree of sensorineural loss

Figure 7.10. Types and degrees of loss from the audiogram.

The assessment procedure

149

testing by bone conduction since the levels that may produce ‘vibrotactile’ results are much lower than by air conduction (Figure 7.11). In addition, measured bone conduction thresholds at 250 Hz of 20 dBHL or more may relate to harmonic distortion products at higher frequencies, rather than the fundamental frequency being tested. At high frequencies, it is also possible for the tone to radiate from the bone conductor such that the client may hear by air conduction again producing a false air–bone gap. Bone conduction is not tested beyond 4 kHz but even at this frequency airborne signals may be heard near the maximum output of the audiometer. If the hearing aid audiologist is not aware of when there is a need to question the validity of test results a sensorineural loss may be mistaken for a mixed loss. Vibrotactile levels

BC AC

250

500

1k

2k

4k

30 (5) 95

60 (35) 115

80 (65) 125

– 130

– –

Figure 7.11. Possible false audiometric results due to vibrotactile responses. Certain bone conduction transducers can elicit vibrotactile results at very low levels, indicated by the numbers given in brackets.

An audiogram that illustrates normal hearing will show a line of both air and bone conduction symbols along or close to the 0 dBHL line near the top of the audiogram.

150

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

All three lines of the air and bone conduction symbols appearing within 10 dB indicate a purely sensorineural loss in each ear (except in the case of normal hearing). Bone conduction readings for both ears separately are required for accurate diagnosis and in all situations where the ears differ markedly from one another. Bone conduction readings for each ear are obtained by employing masking in the non-test ear. Masking for air conduction must be used if there is a gap of 40 dB or more between the not-masked bone conduction and the poorest air conduction readings on the audiogram.

7.5.3 Description of the hearing loss It is often helpful to be able to describe the degree of hearing loss. There is no one standard description, but one classification recommended by the British Association of Teachers of the Deaf (Taylor and Bishop, 1991), which relates well to the effect on the hearing of speech is as follows (Figure 7.12): • • • •

any hearing loss below 41 dBHL is described as mild loss; from 41 dBHL to 70 dBHL is described as a moderate loss; from 71 dBHL to 95 dBHL is described as a severe loss; greater than 95 dBHL is described as a profound loss.

Figure 7.12. Degree of hearing loss and its effect on hearing speech. The speech ‘banana’ indicates the level of normal conversational speech. Plotting a client’s audiogram on this template will provide information on how much of normal conversational speech will be heard.

The assessment procedure

151

The single figure of hearing loss can be obtained by taking an average over five frequencies, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz and 4 kHz. The concept of percentage is sometimes used to describe the degree of hearing loss. Percentage disability is calculated according to formulae (King, Coles, Lutman and Robinson, 1992) for compensation claims but the use of ‘percentage’ in place of dB to describe the loss to a client is incorrect. A 30 dB hearing loss, for example, is not a 30% impairment, neither is a 100 dB loss total hearing loss. A 100% impairment does not necessarily mean an ear has no useful residual hearing. The term ‘percentage’ hearing loss for rehabilitation purposes can be very misleading and should not be used. A full description should include an indication of the audiometric configuration, which again is not standardized. The following terms are sometimes used: • ‘Flat’, to indicate a loss that does not rise or fall more than 5 dB per octave. • Gradually sloping, to indicate a loss that falls by 5 dB to 10 dB per octave. • Precipitously or sharply falling, to indicate a loss that falls 15 dB or more per octave. • Abruptly falling, to indicate a loss that is flat or gradual in the low frequency region but then falls sharply. This configuration is also often referred to as a ‘ski slope’ but this term is not recommended. • Rising or reverse audiogram, to indicate a loss that increases by 5 dB or more per octave. • Trough, to indicate a loss that falls in the mid-frequency range (1–2 kHz) by 20 dB or more in comparison with the loss at 500 Hz and 4 kHz. Although not recommended, the American term ‘cookie bite’ is very descriptive for this shape of loss.

7.6 ROOM REQUIREMENTS FOR AUDIOMETRY Background noise can have a significant effect on audiometric results, particularly those obtained by bone conduction. It is therefore necessary to reduce background noise to a level that will not elevate the hearing thresholds of the person under test. Ideally the room is specially constructed but often audiometric tests are undertaken in less than ideal conditions, for example in the home situation. Background noise should be reduced as far as is practicable and the use of specially designed earphones or of insert receivers may further assist in its reduction. Where background noise is sufficiently high to have a possible effect on the thresholds, this information

152

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

should be recorded on the audiogram. A soundproof room is not a necessity for audiometry but the noise level should be below that which would cause masking and threshold shift in someone with normal hearing. Where a room is specially constructed for the purpose of audiometry there are design recommendations that should be followed wherever possible (Department of Health, 1974, 1994). The room should have an ambient noise level below 30 dBA. A prefabricated sound booth is sometimes used to guarantee a particular degree of sound attenuation. The booth must, however, be situated within a quiet room since it ensures only a certain degree of attenuation not a particular sound level. A booth that is to be used only for adults should be a minimum size of 1.2 m by 1 m with a height of 2 m, but preferably the room size should be at least 2.4 m by 2.4 m, with a height of 2 m. If children are to be tested, a room that is a minimum of 6.3 m by 4.8 m, with a height of 2 m is required. This allows space for free-field testing and also for parents or other adults to be present. A sound-treated room should be situated away from obvious sources of noise and should be isolated from the rest of the building. This can be achieved by building the room of brick with a concrete skin and cavity, thus using the effect of mass and of dead-air space. Mounting the whole interior on rubber shock absorbers can deaden vibrations from the building. Solid double doors should be used to exclude noise. Preferably, the doors should be lead-lined and should close with magnetic seals. Ventilation will be needed because the room will rapidly become hot and airless. The noise from the ventilation system must be minimized using acoustic filters to act as baffles. Tungsten lighting is preferable to fluorescent, which produces a hum, and if the latter is used the choke and starter should be mounted away from the room. If there are windows, double glazing should be used to reduce noise from outside. A much larger gap between the panes of glass is necessary than is required for heat retention. If the glass is 3 mm thick the gap should be at least 100 mm and if the glass is 6 mm the gap should be at least 50 mm. In addition, where there is more than one window in the room, these should not be positioned opposite each other as the creation of standing waves is more likely. This is important where free-field testing is carried out. A room for audiometry must not only be quiet but must also have a low reverberation time – that is, there must be very little ‘echo’. Rooms in which reverberation is exceptionally low are called anechoic chambers; these are very quiet and unnaturally ‘dead’ and are used only for research purposes. For audiometric purposes a reverberation time between 0.2 seconds and 0.25 seconds is ideal. This should be achieved by covering the walls and floor with soft, sound-absorbent materials such as acoustic tiles fixed on battens to the walls and ceiling and a thick foam-backed carpet on the floor. These will absorb sound and limit reverberation.

The assessment procedure

153

7.7 SUMMARY Tuning fork tests provide a quick indication of type of loss. They should not be considered as a substitute for pure tone audiometry. Pure tone audiometric tests are used to provide accurate hearing threshold levels by air and bone conduction together with determination of ULLs, which are important for hearing aid fitting. Audiometric test results are recorded on a graph known as an audiogram. The audiologist must be able to interpret the results and to realize when false results may have been recorded, in particular those due to possible: • crossover of the signal; • vibrotactile response; • airborne radiation of a bone conducted signal. Cross-hearing is a response from the non-test side, rather than from the ear under test. It will result in a shadow curve on the audiogram. Masking is used whenever a shadow curve is suspected. It is also used to determine precisely the type of loss in each ear (using masked bone conduction). A shadow reading should always be suspected if the gap between the two air conduction curves is 40 dB or more, or if the gap between the notmasked bone conduction and the poorer air conduction curve is 40 dB or more. Background noise must be at a sufficiently low level not to worsen hearing thresholds. Low frequency noise can be excluded by solid construction; high frequency can be excluded by adequately sealing the room. Building-borne vibrations can be excluded by isolating the floor, suspending it on rubber shock absorbers. The ambient noise level achieved should be below 30 dBA. Reverberation should be reduced through the use of sound absorbent materials, such as acoustic tiles. The reverberation time achieved should be between 0.2 seconds and 0.25 seconds.

FURTHER READING Arlinger S (1989) Manual of Practical Audiology: Volume 1. London: Whurr. Arlinger S (1991) Manual of Practical Audiology: Volume 2. London: Whurr. Hawke M, Keene M, Alberti PW (1990) Clinical Otoscopy: An introduction to ear diseases. 2 edn. London: Churchill Livingstone. Martin FN (1994) Introduction to Audiology. 5 edn. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. Wormald PJ, Browning GG (1996) Otoscopy. A Structured Approach. London: Arnold.

Chapter 8 Hearing aids and their performance 8.1 INTRODUCTION There are very few deaf people who have no hearing whatsoever; it is much more usual to have some remaining or residual hearing. The residual hearing area (Figure 8.1) can be illustrated on an audiogram as the area between the threshold of hearing and the point at which sound becomes uncomfortable. In effect, this is the useful hearing area.

Figure 8.1. The residual hearing area. (Threshold 30 dBHL; ULL 100 dBHL).

A hearing aid system is a device to enable a hearing-impaired person to make maximum use of the residual hearing area and should provide: • maximum speech clarity or intelligibility; • maximum useful information from environmental sounds, such as the sound of the doorbell, or of an approaching car; 154

Hearing aids and their performance

155

• minimum interference from unwanted background noise, particularly as hearing impairment restricts the ability to separate important sounds from background noise; • minimum distortion; some distortion will occur when sound is amplified but this should be minimized so that it does not affect clarity or sound quality. Several types of hearing aid system exist and selection from the range available involves weighing up the advantages and disadvantages of each type for the particular hearing-impaired individual. Air conduction hearing aids present amplified sound to the external ear and use the whole auditory system (Figure 8.2). Bone conduction hearing aids bypass the outer and middle ear and are therefore useful in conditions that preclude the use of an air conduction system – for instance, if there is discharge from the ear or the absence of an outer ear.

Figure 8.2. The air conduction and bone conduction routes through the auditory system.

8.2 TYPES OF HEARING AID SYSTEM 8.2.1 Air conduction systems (a) Bodyworn hearing aids In a bodyworn hearing aid (Figure 8.3) the microphone, amplifier and batteries are all housed within the hearing aid case, which is linked by a cord to an external receiver. The receiver attaches to a solid earmould supplied with a ring and clip for this purpose. Bodyworn hearing aids are relatively large and bulky and are usually worn monaurally, although a Y-cord can be used to deliver sound to both ears. This does not allow each ear to function independently and is not therefore a true binaural fitting. Binaural body aids are sometimes provided for children, although the unnatural position of the micro-

156

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

phone, high up on the chest, minimizes differences in the sound signal arriving at each ear and therefore reduces the binaural advantage of improved direction and discrimination. Positioning on the chest will provide good reception of the user’s voice. A bodyworn aid may also readily be held by another person who can then speak close to the microphone to improve sound reception. The aid should not be placed under clothing as the clothes rubbing against the microphone would cause noise. If the aid is placed in the best position for sound reception, that is high up on the chest, spillage of food into the microphone can be a problem. This may be overcome by fitting a protective cover, which is known as a ‘baby cover’, but which is equally useful for elderly or physically disabled adults. There are two groups for whom the use of bodyworn aids may be particularly advantageous: • For the very severely or profoundly deaf person, a bodyworn aid with its larger components can provide high gain and output and a good low frequency response, which may be very important as an aid to lipreading. The physical separation of the receiver from the microphone is a major factor in allowing the high gain to be utilized, as there is less risk of acoustic feedback. Acoustic feedback occurs when sound from the output leaks back to the microphone input, causing a high-pitched whistle. • For those with manual dexterity problems – a group that includes not only the physically disabled but also the very young and the very old – the larger controls and accessible position of the bodyworn aid make adjustment easier, whether this is undertaken by the user or by a carer. (b) Behind-the-ear hearing aids Behind-the-ear (BTE) or postaural hearing aids are those in which all the components are housed in a case that is situated behind the pinna and linked to the meatus by a tube and earmould (Figure 8.3). The BTE aids are available in a wide variety, both in terms of size and performance. They are usually fitted with forward-facing microphones, which allow full use to be made of the advantages of binaural hearing when two aids are worn. The position of the aid behind the ear may be uncomfortable for spectacle wearers and may not remain secure during active pursuits. Various controls are available to facilitate modification of the hearing aid’s performance and behind-the-ear aids provide an opportunity for early demonstration using temporary earfittings. All earfittings produce further changes in the response delivered to the ear, which may be desirable or undesirable. For instance, the external tubing adds undesirable

Hearing aids and their performance

157

Figure 8.3. A range of air conduction hearing aids. (Photograph courtesy of Viennatone.)

peaks of resonance to the signal around 1 kHz and 2 kHz, although careful use of acoustic modifications such as vents and filters can greatly improve a hearing aid fitting. The effect of acoustic modifications is not precise but can be evaluated when the aid is worn. (c) Spectacle hearing aids Air conduction spectacle aids are those in which all the components are housed within the spectacle arm (Figure 8.4) and linked to the ear canal

Figure 8.4. Air conduction spectacle hearing aids. (Photograph courtesy of Viennatone.)

158

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

by a tube and earmould. They overcome problems of comfort and space behind the ear when wearing both hearing aids and spectacles. They are not widely used because in-the-ear aids provide another option – one that does not remove the hearing if the spectacles are taken off. Spectacle hearing aids can be supplied as complete systems or may be fitted to many of the spectacles, or spectacle fronts, obtained from an optician. Spectacle aids may also be used for contralateral routeing of signals (CROS). A basic CROS fitting may help in cases of unilateral hearing loss, where sound is carried from a very deaf ear for reception by the other, good ear. (d) In-the-ear hearing aids In-the-ear (ITE), also occasionally called intra-aural, hearing aids are those in which all the components are housed within the ear fitting itself, which is known as the shell of the aid. ‘In-the-ear’ is a generic term used to refer to the whole range of aids worn within the pinna but these are further differentiated into three main types (Figure 8.5): • Full shell in-the-ear hearing aids fill the entire concha of the ear. Variations can be obtained in which part of the full shell is cut away, such as half-shell and helix variations. • In-the-canal (ITC) hearing aids fit within the ear canal and the area around the canal entrance. • Completely-in-the-canal (CIC) hearing aids fit fully within the ear canal. The faceplate will be positioned flush with or deeper than the opening of the ear canal. CIC aids terminate well down the ear canal beyond the second bend (‘semi-deep’). CIC hearing aids that terminate within 5 mm of the eardrum may be termed ‘deep canal’ or peri-tympanic. ITE hearing aids are most commonly provided with an individual shell made from an ear impression. ITEs can be standard or individual prescription hearing aids.

ITE

ITC

CIC

Figure 8.5. A range of in-the-ear hearing aids. (Diagram courtesy of Starkey Ltd.)

Hearing aids and their performance

159

Most hearing aid users prefer an aid that is small and fits within the ear. However, if an aid is very small it may be difficult to manage, particularly for anyone with arthritis or poor hand control. Digital hearing aids have the advantage of automatic volume adjustment but insertion and removal and battery replacement may still be problematic. The amount of gain and output from the aid is restricted by its size, and the close proximity of microphone and receiver increases the likelihood of acoustic feedback. However, the position of an aid within the external ear makes it a very natural one, which allows it to take advantage of the natural forward focusing and acoustic properties of the ear. The further into the ear the microphone is positioned, the greater the natural benefit derived. Placement of the receiver within the ear canal also provides sound directly to the eardrum and the smaller the cavity between the sound outlet and the eardrum the greater will be the sound intensity and occlusion will be reduced. These advantages of position will lead to an improvement in the amount of gain provided by the hearing aid of between 5 dB and 13 dB approximately (Sullivan, 1989), especially in the high-frequency region between 3 kHz and 6 kHz. The ear fitting is an integral part of the hearing aid, so the frequency response measured is that of the entire system. Other potential advantages of microphone positioning within the ear canal include: • increased gain without feedback (5 dB to 10 dB or more) can be achieved with telephone use; • wind noise may be reduced, Mueller and Ebinger (1997)suggest by up to 20 dB.

8.2.2 Bone conduction hearing aids The major difference between air conduction and bone conduction hearing aids lies in the receiver. Whereas an air conduction aid has only to set air, a low impedance medium, into vibration, a bone conduction aid requires a great deal of energy to set the bone, a high impedance medium, into vibration. The bone conduction receiver is therefore large and rigid and fitted with firm pressure to the mastoid. Bone conduction hearing aids have a poor high frequency response. They are used mainly for conductive hearing losses in which the ear must not or cannot be blocked by an earmould. The mechanical transducer can be driven by a bodyworn or by a powerful postaural or spectacle hearing aid (Figure 8.6). Such aids are generally not considered attractive and even the spectacle option must be provided with heavy frames, which may require frequent adjustment to maintain close contact with the mastoid.

160

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 8.6. A range of bone conduction hearing aids. (Photograph courtesy of Viennatone.)

8.3 SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE 8.3.1 Specification sheets A specification is the detailed description of a hearing aid, which is normally presented as a specification or performance data sheet. This describes the hearing aid model in terms of its physical and electroacoustic characteristics together with any relevant information concerned with the method and conditions that result in the publication of that specification. The main function of the data sheet is to provide information in the form of tables and graphs illustrating the results of performance tests carried out to comply with the requirements of relevant standards. The standards aim to achieve a uniformity of hearing aid performance description that facilitates valid comparison between different models. Small deviations from the specification are allowed and will be found in individual examples of any particular hearing aid model. The degree of deviation acceptable is known as the tolerance. When a purchaser receives a hearing aid from a manufacturer, the hearing aid’s performance may be checked against that detailed on the specification or on the individual data sheet that is delivered with a custom-made in-the-ear hearing aid (Figure 8.7). This is known as quality inspection on delivery and each hearing aid should perform within the tolerance stated by the manufacturer. Tolerances are not specified in the relevant British Standard.

Hearing aids and their performance

161

The relevant British Standard (BS EN 60118-7: 1993) provides for a number of different characteristics to be measured, including gain, maximum output, frequency response, harmonic distortion and internal noise. Measurements are intended for the purposes of: • • • • • • •

technical comparison; evaluation; production control; delivery tolerances; selection for procurement; selection for pre-fitting; training and teaching.

8.3.2 Gain The acoustic gain of an aid is the amount of amplification it provides. In simple terms, it is the difference between the input and the output SPL. For example, if: Input = 60 dBSPL Output = 80 dBSPL Gain = 20 dB Gain is always presented in dB without a suffix. It is measured under specified operating conditions and at a specified frequency or frequencies. The British Standard defines acoustic gain as: ‘The difference between the sound pressure level developed in the acoustic coupler by the hearing aid and the sound pressure level measured at the test point.’ Gain is most usually presented as a single figure for 1 kHz or 1.6 kHz, or as an average of several frequencies. Alternatively, a frequency response curve showing how the gain varies across the frequency range is more informative. A number of different types of acoustic gain are usually presented on a specification sheet. These include: • Full-on gain – this is the gain with the volume control turned fully on. • Maximum gain – this is the highest possible gain from the hearing aid. It is measured under specified conditions with an input that will not drive the aid into saturation, usually 60 dBSPL, and with the volume control fully on and with all the trimmers set to give maximum output. • Reference test gain represents more of a ‘user volume’. This is usually measured with an input of 60 dBSPL, with the volume control set so that the output is 15 dB less than the maximum output (OSPL90) at the

162

(cont’d.)

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 8.7. An individual specification sheet for an ITE aid. (Courtesy of Starkey Ltd.)

Hearing aids and their performance

Figure 8.7. (cont’d).

163

164

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

reference test frequency. If the aid will not permit this with a margin of at least 7 dB, a position corresponding to a gain 7 dB below the gain at the reference test frequency should be used. The volume control position should be stated. Reference test gain is normally OSPL90 – 75 dB. For example, suppose that an aid has an output of 120 dB SPL with an input of 90 dB SPL. When the volume control is reduced such that the output is 15 dB below this (105 dB SPL) the gain will be 45 dB. This is the same as OSPL90 (120) – 75. Input 90 60

Gain → →

30 45

Output → →

120 105

The reference test frequency is normally 1.6 kHz but where high tone hearing aids are in use 2.5 kHz may be more appropriate. This will be stated in the specification.

8.3.3 Maximum output All hearing aids have a maximum output limit, which is the most the hearing aid can handle, due mainly to limitations imposed by the output stage of the hearing aid (the receiver). The maximum output may be referred to in a number of different ways, all of which have very similar meanings. These include: • saturation sound pressure level (SSPL); • saturation sound pressure level with an input of 90 dB SPL (SSPL90 or SSPL90); • output sound pressure level (OSPL); • output sound pressure level with an input of 90 dB SPL (OSPL90 or OSPL90); • maximum power output (MPO); • maximum output. The British Standard defines OSPL90 as: The sound pressure level produced in an ear simulator with an input of 90 dB SPL at the specified frequency (or frequencies), the gain control being in the full-on position and all other controls being set for maximum gain.

Saturation is the condition in a circuit when an increase in the input signal produces no further increase in the output signal (Figure 8.8). Saturation

Hearing aids and their performance

165

sound pressure level is the highest possible SPL obtainable from the hearing aid. In order to measure this in the test situation, all the controls, including the volume, must be turned up to maximum and an acoustic signal must be produced that is sufficiently intense to drive the aid into saturation. This input signal is always 90 dB SPL. Saturation is the highest possible sound pressure level that an aid is capable of producing, and it can be specified at one or more frequencies.

Output (dB SPL)

Input (dB SPL) Figure 8.8. An input–output graph demonstrating saturation of a hearing aid. Input/ output graphs are also often used to demonstrate the effects of the hearing aid controls with the aid set at the reference test frequency.

8.3.4 Frequency response The frequency response of a hearing aid is presented as a line on a graph that shows how the aid performs over the frequency range. It is defined as the sound pressure level developed in an ear simulator by the hearing aid expressed as a function of frequency under specified conditions. A frequency response may be obtained to show how the gain, or the output, varies with frequency, and the term ‘basic frequency response’ may also be seen on a specification sheet. This illustrates the frequency response curve obtained at the reference test gain setting, with an input signal of 60 dB SPL.

166

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

8.3.5 Amplitude non-linearity or distortion An ideal hearing aid would be capable of producing an output that was identical to the input signal, only amplified. However, a hearing aid is not capable of doing this and when the output does not reproduce exactly the input it is said to be distorted. Uneven amplification across the frequency range is a type of desirable frequency distortion, which is built into hearing aids to help compensate for the individual’s hearing loss. However, the term ‘distortion’ is usually used only to describe unwanted non-linearity. A hearing aid should produce as little unwanted distortion as possible and the degree of distortion is expressed in one of two ways, as a: • distortion ratio, where the distortion product is given as the number of dB below the total output signal; or as a • distortion factor, where the distortion product is expressed as a percentage of the total output signal. (a) Harmonic distortion For the purpose of quality inspection of hearing aid performance on delivery only harmonic distortion is considered, since this is the easiest type of distortion to measure. It results when harmonics are present at the output that were not part of the input signal. Harmonics are multiples of the original frequency; for example, a pure tone of 2 kHz has harmonics at 4 kHz, 6 kHz, 8 kHz and so on. The original tone, or fundamental frequency, is always the lowest frequency (Figure 8.9). It is also the first harmonic since harmonics are multiples. In the example given above:

Output (dB SPL)

The fundamental frequency = 2 kHz. The first harmonic = 1 × 2 kHz = 2 kHz. The second harmonic = 2 × 2 kHz = 4 kHz. The third harmonic = 3 × 2 kHz = 6 kHz.

Figure 8.9. Harmonic and intermodulation distortion.

Hearing aids and their performance

167

Harmonic distortion is measured by filtering out the fundamental frequency and measuring the remaining harmonic content. The harmonic content decreases with increasing frequency and measurements usually only consider the second and third harmonics. These may be considered separately, or together as ‘total harmonic distortion’. If, however, the response curve rises 12 dB or more between any test frequency and its second harmonic, the measurement may be omitted. There is no absolute agreed figure for maximum harmonic distortion but, as a general rule, a distortion ratio of 20 dB or a distortion factor of 10% (5% in the case of children) is considered to be the maximum acceptable. Harmonic distortion increases as the hearing aid nears saturation point. It is therefore normally measured below this point at the reference test gain position with an input of 70 dBSPL or as assigned by the manufacturer. In the clinic it may be measured at the wearer’s volume setting. Harmonic distortion is not normally a problem except near to saturation. (b) Intermodulation distortion This occurs (Figure 8.9) when there are two or more input signals and this results in additional frequencies, which are the arithmetic sum or difference of the input frequencies. Intermodulation products, unlike harmonics, occur not only above the frequency of the fundamental but also below it. This form of distortion can be quite disruptive to speech perception and may cause fatigue and annoyance to the listener. It is difficult to measure because there are an almost infinite number of possibilities for combining tones. BS EN 60118-0 (1993) provides for a measurement of intermodulation distortion by the manufacturers; it is not a test undertaken for quality control on delivery. Intermodulation distortion should be less than 2%. (c) Transient distortion Transient distortion, sometimes known as ‘ringing’ or ‘overshoot’, occurs when there is a rapid change in the signal such that the hearing aid cannot reproduce the sharp rise and fall times. A lingering of the sound can result, which may lead to lack of speech clarity and may cause annoyance to the listener. However, transient distortion is not usually a major problem. There are no standards for measuring transient distortion. (d) Other types of distortion Unwanted frequency distortion includes sharp peaks in the frequency response. These are often caused by resonance in the receiver. Reducing the bandwidth of the signal also produces frequency distortion. The

168

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

bandwidth is primarily reduced by the limitations of the receiver and most hearing aids do not provide effective amplification above about 5 kHz. This may affect the sound quality and may particularly affect listening to music but it does not affect the intelligibility of speech as most important speech sounds fall below about 3.5 kHz. Phase distortion occurs when there is an alteration in the timing relationship between frequencies, such that different frequencies may not arrive at the ear with the same time delay. Severe phase distortion could theoretically affect localization but in general phase distortion is insignificant.

8.3.6 Equivalent input noise level Hearing aid electronics generate internal random noise, which poses a potential source of masking and must therefore be minimized. Internal noise may be analysed in one-third octave bands or it may be expressed as an equivalent input noise level which would produce the amount of signal in the output. It is calculated with the aid set approximately to the reference test gain position. To express the internal noise as an ‘equivalent input noise level’, the output with an input of 60 dB SPL is first noted. The output minus the input provides a measure of gain. The sound source is then switched off. Any sound pressure measured at this point is caused by internal noise. The equivalent input noise is calculated by subtracting the reference test gain from the sound pressure caused by internal noise. For example: Input 60 = L1 1. OSPL60 = LS = 100 2. OSPL0 = L2 = 70 3. Internal noise – Gain = Equivalent input noise level (LN) where LN = equivalent input noise level LN = L2 – (LS–L1) L2 = SPL caused by internal noise LN = 70 – (100–60) LS = OSPL with input 60 dB SPL LN = 70 – 40 L1 = input of 60 dB SPL LN = 30 The equivalent input noise level should be considerably less than the average speech input level of around 60 dBSPL. The internal noise generated in the example is equivalent to an input signal to the aid of 30 dBSPL. This measure applies only to essentially linear input/output conditions and where automatic gain control aids are involved, the input SPL may be reduced to ensure such conditions apply.

Hearing aids and their performance

169

8.3.7 Dynamic output characteristics of AGC circuits Automatic gain control (AGC) is employed to compress or reduce the dynamic range of the sound at the output. This prevents excessive output sound from the hearing aid from reaching the user’s ear, while tending to preserve the waveform of the input signal. The dynamic characteristics of an AGC circuit, especially the attack and recovery times (see below), are important and methods for measuring these and other electro-acoustical characteristics are given in BS EN 60118-2 (1996) (Figure 8.10, on page 170). Automatic gain control is not instantaneous and the attack time is the time interval it takes for the AGC circuit to stabilize when there is a sudden increase in input signal. The stabilized level is known as the steady state. Conversely, the recovery time is the time interval it takes for the AGC circuits to stabilize when the input signal is abruptly reduced. Both the attack and the recovery times are recorded as the time taken for the output to reach within 2 dB of its steady state level when the signal is altered by a stated number of decibels. Attack times should be as short as possible to avoid sudden loud sounds from being amplified to the extent that uncomfortable hearing occurs. An attack time of less than 10 milliseconds is ideal since the human ear cannot perceive temporal changes of less than 10 milliseconds (Pollack, 1988). Short recovery times, however, may cause considerable distortion and the listener may hear an audible ‘flutter’ as the compression circuit reacts to the variations in intensity that occur in speech at normal levels. Release times are normally greater than 30 milliseconds in order to avoid ‘flutter’ but shorter than 150 milliseconds to maintain speech intelligibility.

8.4 HEARING AID STANDARDS In the early days of electronic hearing aids manufacturers set their own standards and it was impossible to compare different models by looking at the data provided. As the number of hearing aids available grew, it became increasingly important that hearing aid measurements be standardized, and in 1959 the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) produced the first European standards. Unfortunately, standards can still be confusing because there are major differences between European and American standards. Standards are constantly revised and updated. In practice this means that the date, as well as the number, of the standard used on a specification sheet should be noted. In some cases in the text IEC standards have been given in preference to British Standards. This is because the relevant British Standards are expected to be renumbered in the near future. The main standards are:

170 Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 8.10. The effect of compression on the output signal. (After BS EN 60118-2, 1996.)

Hearing aids and their performance

171

European • IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission. • BSI – British Standards Institution. British Standards (BS) are generally IEC standards adopted and renumbered but retaining their original content. EN shows that the standard has a European number. BS EN 60118 is an important standard relating to hearing aids. It consists of a number of parts many of which are listed at the end of this chapter in further reading. • ISO International Standards Organization. An ISO standard is an international standard. A British Standard may have European numbering and be an international standard, for example, BS EN ISO 389. American • HAIC Hearing Aid industry Conference (1961). These early standards have mostly been superseded by ANSI. HAIC gain is an average value derived from the maximum gain at each of three test frequencies (500 Hz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz). HAIC output is an average value derived from the maximum output at each of the three test frequencies. The HAIC frequency range provides for a standard method of defining the limits of the frequency range. In this method, 15 dB is subtracted from the HAIC gain and a horizontal line is drawn across the frequency response curve at this level. The points at which the line cuts the response curve represent the limits of the frequency response. • ANSI – American National Standards Institute. ANSI Standards, like British Standards, provide for measurements such as SSPL90, full-on gain, and reference test gain. Some of the major differences between these standards are outlined in Table 8.1. ANSI also provides for a frequency range to be stated. This is obtained with the volume control at the reference test position. The output at 1 kHz, 1.6 kHz and 2.5 kHz is averaged and 20 dB subtracted. From the resulting figure, a straight horizontal line is drawn across the frequency response curve of the hearing aid. The two points at which this horizontal line intersects the frequency response represent the limits of the frequency range.

8.5 MEASURING METHODS 8.5.1 The test enclosure The basic principle of hearing aid measurement is that with the controls of the aid suitably adjusted, an appropriate input signal is applied to the microphone of the aid and the output from the receiver is measured and

172

Table 8.1. An outline comparison of certain hearing aid tests drawn from British and American standards (source: ANSI S3.22, 1987) Characteristic

Input (dBSPL) Frequency (Hz)

OSPL90

90

Full-on acoustic gain Reference test gain

Basic ANSI differences

200–8 k

Full-on

Entitled SSPL 90; frequency range if used 200–5 kHz; tend to give as an average of 1 k, 1.6 k and 2.5 kHz

Usually 60

200–8 k

Full-on

Tend to give as an average of 1 k, 1.6 k and 2.5 kHz

60

Usually 1.6 k

15 dB less than OSPL90

17 dB less than average SSPL90

Frequency response curve Usually 60

200–8 k

Reference test position

200–5 kHz

Total harmonic distortion 70

200–5 k

Reference test position

Measured at 500, 800 and 1.6 kHz presented as percentage

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Volume control

Hearing aids and their performance

173

analysed on a standardized device. Test methods and equipment have been standardized to permit accurate comparison. The conditions under which the aids have been tested must be known and repeatable. The standards therefore use a specified test environment, which simulates essentially free-field conditions. This is a very quiet test space with sound absorbent walls and may be an anechoic chamber or a test box enclosure (Figure 8.11). The test signal is generated by a sine wave oscillator and is fed to a loudspeaker within the test space. The hearing aid is accurately located at a determined test point, known as the reference point. The SPL in the test space is measured using a control microphone. The output of the hearing aid is transmitted through a standardized coupler to a calibrated microphone. The output of this microphone is recorded over the frequency range or examined for other characteristics, such as harmonic distortion.

Figure 8.11. A suggested arrangement for a postaural aid in a hearing aid test box.

8.5.2 Couplers in use (a) Ear simulator The description of this coupler is contained in BS EN 60318-4: 1998. Measurements obtained with an ear simulator relate approximately to an average human ear. Results obtained in the high frequency region are

174

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

nearer to real ear measurements than those obtained using a reference (2 cc) coupler. Essentially the ear simulator consists of: • a principal cavity of specified volume; • acoustic load networks; • a calibrated microphone. The location of the microphone is chosen so that the sound pressure at the microphone corresponds approximately to the sound pressure existing at the human eardrum. Therefore the ear simulator (Figure 8.12) is designed to simulate the average values of relevant acoustical characteristics of normal adult human ears.

Figure 8.12. The basic parts of an occluded ear simulator.

The occluded ear simulator does not simulate the leakage between an earmould and a human ear canal (the effects of venting are not measured). Therefore the results obtained may deviate from real ear performance, especially at low frequencies. Moreover, large performance variations among individual ears will occur and this should be borne in mind when employing results obtained with an ear simulator. (b) Reference coupler The reference coupler is also known as an acoustic coupler and as a 2 cc coupler (Figure 8.13). The reference coupler is used as a simple and ready

Hearing aids and their performance

175

Figure 8.13. The basic parts of a 2 cc (reference) coupler.

means of comparison of specifications and data on hearing aids. It does not allow the actual performance of a hearing aid on a person to be obtained. The reference coupler is a cavity of predetermined shape and volume, which is used for ‘the testing of earphones’, in conjunction with a calibrated microphone adapted to measure the pressure developed within the cavity. It is described in IEC 60318-5. The SPL observed in an ear simulator compared to a 2 cc coupler for any given input will show an increase of about 4 dB in the low frequencies, increasing gradually to about 15 dB higher at 10 kHz, see Figure 8.14.

8.5.3 Simulated in situ working conditions Most methods for measuring the performance of hearing aids do not take into account the acoustical influence of the head and body of the wearer. However, methods that do so are relevant in the fitting of hearing aids, because the results that they produce relate to performance on the ear. Real ear procedures (described in Chapter 11) can be used to provide in situ measurements for individual patients, but in order for in situ measurements to be quoted on a specification sheet, they must be

176

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

OES

Output/dB SPL

2 cc

Frequency/Hz Figure 8.14. Comparison of the SPL in a reference coupler (2 cc) and an occluded ear simulator (OES).

standardized. This is achieved using a manikin or anatomical model to simulate the acoustical effects of a median adult wearer on the performance of a hearing aid. The manikin simulates a head and torso and includes both an occluded ear simulator and an artificial pinna or pinna simulator. Results using a manikin may be useful in assisting in hearing aid fitting, although care should still be taken when interpreting results. This is because results obtained from a manikin can be substantially different from those obtained on a real individual person, due to anatomical variations. KEMAR (the Knowles Electronics Manikin for Acoustic Research) is one manufacturer’s version of the head and torso. KEMAR was one of the first manikins available. The standards (IEC 60959) do not relate specifically to KEMAR. The following parameters are considered essential for the evaluation of a hearing aid in simulated ‘in situ’ conditions: • • • •

full-on simulated insertion gain; insertion frequency response; directional characteristics; simulated in situ OSPL90.

It may be noted that where simulated in situ conditions are used, the results may be presented in terms of in situ or insertion measures. In situ measures describe the sound pressure level recorded in the real ear or in the ear simulator of the manikin. Thus, simulated in situ OSPL90

Hearing aids and their performance

177

refers to the maximum output recorded in the ear simulator of the manikin under the conditions specified in the relevant standard (IEC 60118-8). Insertion measures consider the SPL in the ear or ear simulator of the manikin but under two different conditions – with and without a hearing aid. Insertion measures take account of the loss of natural amplification by making a simple comparison of the situation at the ear. In situ measurements take no account of the loss of natural resonance that the hearing aid must overcome before it provides any advantage to the patient. Insertion gain represents the benefit on the ear. This appears lower than in situ gain because account is taken of the lost natural amplification (Figure 11.1). Simulated in situ gain can be defined as the difference between the SPL in the ear simulator produced by the hearing aid and the reference input SPL. Simulated insertion gain can be defined as the difference between the SPL in the ear simulator produced by the hearing aid and the SPL in the ear simulator with the hearing aid absent.

8.5.4 Measurement of bone vibrator output Where a hearing aid employs a bone vibrator instead of an air conduction receiver a different method of measuring output must be used and it becomes impractical to measure amplification directly in terms of acoustic gain. With bone conduction hearing aids, although the input is expressed in terms of sound pressure level, the output is described in terms of mechanical vibration. The standard IEC 60118-9 defines a method of expressing the input/output ratio as an acoustic–mechanical sensitivity or force level. The mechanical coupler used to obtain this measurement is an artificial mastoid, or mastoid simulator (Figure 8.15), as specified in IEC 60318-6.

Figure 8.15. An artificial mastoid.

178

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The bone vibrator is secured to the artificial mastoid with a force of 2.5 Newtons. The exact test assembly varies according to the type of bone conduction hearing aid. The standard provides for measurement of the force level in terms of gain and output across the frequency range 200 Hz to 5 kHz, and for the determination of distortion and internal noise.

8.6 POWER SOURCES 8.6.1 Hearing aid batteries A battery or cell is a package of chemically stored energy that can be converted into electrical energy when the terminals are connected. Most batteries used in hearing aids are primary cells – that is they are used until the current is drained from them, at which point they are removed for disposal. There are six sizes of batteries used in conventional hearing aids. Bodyworn aids employ the large ‘penlite’ cells which are identified by the IEC code R6 (BS EN 60086-2) and which are commonly known as AA batteries. The penlite cells used in bodyworn aids are generally the alkaline manganese type. Secondary or rechargeable cells may be used but these are mainly employed in radio hearing aids. Rechargeable batteries are of the nickel cadmium type. Postaural and in-the-ear aids use button cells in one of five sizes, ranging from the largest, R44, commonly known as the 675 cell, to the smallest button cell, size 5, for which no IEC designation exists yet. The cells used in these aids are of the zinc air type.

8.6.2 Battery characteristics There are certain characteristics of a battery that are important to hearing aid use. These include: • The capacity of the battery is the current the battery can deliver over time, which is expressed in milliampere-hours. • The nominal voltage is a function of the chemistry of the battery and for new cells will be between 1.3 and 1.5 volts. • The discharge characteristic is a graph that illustrates the change in the nominal voltage over time as the hearing aid is used (Figure 8.16). • The shelf life is the period over which a battery can be stored without a significant loss in capacity. After a period of time, the capacity of the battery will reduce and this should not be allowed to exceed 10%. • The battery life should be stated in the manufacturer’s specification and will vary according to the capacity of the battery and the power

Hearing aids and their performance

179

Figure 8.16. Typical battery discharge characteristics on medium load (Duracell, 1990).

requirement of the aid, which is mainly determined by the output stage of the amplifier. Class A or single-ended amplifiers draw a constant average current drain from the battery, whether or not a signal is present (Figure 5.6). Once the aid is switched on a constant or bias current drain occurs. The introduction of the signal produces some variation about the bias value but the average drain remains constant. It is therefore simple to calculate battery life using the following formula: battery life (hours)

=

capacity (milliampere hours) current drain (milliamperes).

Class AB (more commonly, if incorrectly, termed class B), or ‘push–pull’ amplifiers draw very little current when there is no signal present (Figure 5.9). Battery drain increases as the output signal increases. Class AB amplifiers are more efficient but the variation in current drain makes it very difficult to predict the battery life with any degree of accuracy. The actual drain will vary with the signal level and with the volume setting. The life of the battery will be within a range that can be taken as the battery life with no signal present and the battery life with peak drain.

8.6.3 The chemical composition (a) Alkaline manganese batteries Alkaline manganese ‘penlite’ (AA or LR6) batteries used in hearing aids have a nominal voltage of 1.5 volts, a gradual discharge characteristic, a

180

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

capacity of approximately 2850 milliampere hours and a shelf life of approximately 24 months. The battery will recover slightly when left for a period without drain but, over time, it will gradually discharge. The gradual decay in use provides the adult user with some warning of the impending need to replace the battery, unlike the button cells, which provide little or no warning. The quality of the output signal, however, also deteriorates as the battery runs down. The user can turn up the hearing aid to compensate for the battery decline but should certainly replace the battery if the sound quality is distorted. (b) Nickel cadmium batteries Nickel cadmium batteries provide a steady discharge characteristic but have a relatively short life. The batteries are normally recharged overnight. Two sizes are widely used in radio hearing aids. These are: • ‘Penlite’ AA or LR6 cells, which have a capacity of 1200 milliampere hours and a nominal voltage of 1.2 V. • ‘Square’ 9 V cells, which have a capacity of 150 milliampere hours and a nominal voltage of 7.2 V. (c) Zinc air batteries Zinc air cells have a shelf life of over two years and a nominal voltage of 1.4 V. In use, zinc air batteries have a very flat discharge profile. When the battery nears the end of its life the voltage decays very rapidly. The capacity of the cell depends upon its size, for example: • • • • •

size 675 has a capacity of approximately 630 milliampere hours; size 13 has a capacity of approximately 290 milliampere hours; size 312 has a capacity of approximately 160 milliampere hours; size 10 has a capacity of approximately 90 milliampere hours; size 5 has a capacity of approximately 36 milliampere hours.

Zinc air cells are supplied with an adhesive tab that must be removed to allow air to enter through small holes in the battery case. Conventional cells contain both anode and cathode materials, but in zinc air batteries oxygen from the air reacts with a zinc anode via a thin catalytic cathode. This means the cell can contain much more anode material and that it can therefore deliver increased capacity for the same volume of cell.

Hearing aids and their performance

181

8.6.4 Rules of battery storage • • • • • • • •

Store in cool, dry conditions out of direct sunlight. Rotate battery stock so that older batteries are used first. Do not leave batteries in hearing aids if they are not in regular use. Remove any white deposit on the contacts using a dry cloth. Do not open batteries. Keep batteries away from fire. Dispose of batteries safely. Do not attempt to recharge primary cells.

8.7 NATIONAL HEALTH SERVICE HEARING AIDS 8.7.1 The National Health Service provision of hearing aids The National Health Service (NHS) provides hearing aids free of charge to all patients considered likely to obtain benefit from the use of an aid. In the majority of cases these fittings are monaural (one ear only) because of financial restrictions but exceptions can be made if the lifestyle and hearing loss of the patient indicate the need for binaural hearing aids. The NHS has a standard range of hearing aids, which includes a number of different models within certain series or strengths. Various manufacturers make these but all conform to government specifications. Amongst the hearing aids that are available there are models that provide for AGC, direct input and CROS fittings. Both analogue and digital hearing aids are available. The analogue behind-the-ear (BE) series consists of: • The BEI0 series provides medium gain suitable for moderate hearing loss of up to 60 dBHL averaged over the essential speech frequencies from 500 Hz to 4 kHz. The series also includes some mini hearing aids (BE101 – BE 105) using a size 13 battery. • The BE30 series provides for losses from 60 dBHL to 80 dBHL and also includes the BE300 compact hearing aids (BE301). • The BE50 series is a higher-powered series suitable for severe to profound hearing losses from 80 dBHL to 100 dBHL. Bodyworn (BW) aids provide for severe and profoundly deaf patients and those who are unable to manipulate a small aid behind the ear. Bodyworn hearing aids are normally air conduction aids but a bone conductor on a headband can be fitted. Tinnitus maskers are also available.

182

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

When selecting the appropriate hearing aid for patients, several factors need to be considered. The type and degree of the hearing loss, the size of the ear, the lifestyle of the patient and the position and ease of manipulation of the controls. The earmould can have a considerable effect on the performance of a hearing aid (see Chapter 10) so care is needed to select the most suitable mould for the hearing loss presented. Adjustments can also be made to the aids to vary their frequency responses to match the hearing loss as closely as possible. However, if a patient’s needs cannot be met from the standard range of NHS hearing aids other aids may be provided on the recommendation of the ENT consultant and the agreement of the fundholder. Policies vary throughout the country but in most regions children are provided with binaural hearing aids under the NHS. The facility of direct input (for radio hearing aids at school) can now be satisfied with the NHS range. The introduction of a range of digital hearing aids within the NHS (currently as a trial project) should also provide the facility to meet the needs of very mild losses, unusual configurations and severe recruitment.

8.7.2 Obtaining an NHS hearing aid A patient wishing to obtain an NHS hearing aid must first visit his or her doctor who will, if he or she considers it necessary, refer the patient to the ENT Department at the hospital. The patient will normally see the ENT consultant who will examine the patient’s ears, take a case history and arrange for tests to be done to establish the type and degree of the hearing loss. An audiology technician will usually carry out these tests. Each case is looked at individually at local level and a decision made as to whether a hearing aid is appropriate. The ENT consultant may suggest which aid will be most suitable but more commonly this is left to the discretion of the technician. Some areas also operate ‘direct referral’, where straightforward hearing aid cases are not seen by the ENT consultant, which reduces the waiting list. The audiology technician takes an ear impression for the earmould. When this has been made, a further appointment will be sent to the patient for the hearing aid fitting. The patient will be instructed in the use of the aid, how to insert the mould into the ear, its care and cleaning, the correct battery to use and how and when to replace it. The patient will also be informed of where he or she can obtain the batteries. The degree of follow-up varies widely throughout the country depending on the resources available in individual hearing aid departments but follow-up is desirable to meet the rehabilitative needs of the

Hearing aids and their performance

183

patients and to enable and encourage them to obtain the best possible use from their hearing aids. Hearing aid departments also provide facilities for repair and servicing of aids and patients with bodyworn aids are able to obtain replacement cords and receivers. It is essential that patients are encouraged to visit the departments regularly to have their aids and moulds checked, the tubing replaced and the aid upgraded when necessary. All these services, and supplies of replacement batteries, are free of charge under the NHS.

8.8 SUMMARY Hearing aids may be air or bone conduction systems. The performance of each aid is described in a standardized manner in a specification sheet. Various standards are available, but in the UK British Standards are most widely used. Characteristics presented in the specification include gain, maximum output, frequency response, distortion and internal noise. The measurements will show some variation depending on the coupler employed in the hearing aid test system. An ear simulator is generally used by manufacturers, while a 2cc coupler, which is a cheaper and simpler device, provides repeatable results for quality control on delivery. A manikin may be used to simulate the results that would be obtained if a hearing aid was being worn by a median adult. Such results may be useful in hearing aid fitting but can be substantially different from some ‘real life’ clients due to anatomical variations. Bone conduction hearing aids are coupled to an artificial mastoid and measurements are expressed in terms of mechanical vibration, instead of acoustic gain. The batteries used in hearing aids vary in size and chemical composition. A number of characteristics are important to hearing aid use; these include the shelf life, the discharge characteristic and the battery life, which can be calculated from the formula: battery life (hours)

=

capacity (milliampere hours) current drain (milliamperes).

The NHS provides a standard range of bodyworn and behind-the-ear hearing aids. Both analogue and digital aids are available. NHS-provided hearing aids are supplied on loan without charge.

FURTHER READING BS 60118: Hearing aids. BS EN 60118-0: 1993: Measurement of electroacoustical characteristics.

184

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

BS EN 60118-1: 1995: Hearing aids with induction pick-up coil input. BS EN 60118-2: 1996: Hearing aids with automatic gain control circuits. BS EN 60118-3: 1991: Hearing aid equipment not entirely worn on the listener. BS EN 60118-4: 1998: Magnetic field strength in audio-frequency induction loops for hearing aid purposes. BS 6083: Part 5: 1984: Nipples for insert earphones. BS EN 60118-6: 1999: Characteristics of electrical input circuits for hearing aids. BS EN 60118-7: 1993: Measurement of the performance characteristics of hearing aids for quality inspection for delivery purposes. BS 6083: Part 8: 1985: Methods of measurement of performance characteristics of hearing aids under simulated in situ working conditions. BS 6083: Part 9: 1986: Methods of measurement of characteristics of hearing aids with bone vibrator outputs. BS 6083: Part 10: 1988: Guide to hearing aid standards. BS 6083: Part 11: 1988: Symbols and other markings on hearing aids and related equipment.

Chapter 9 Selection and fitting

9.1 THE CHOICE OF A HEARING AID SYSTEM 9.1.1 Introduction The primary purpose and function of hearing aid systems is to enable hearing-impaired people to make maximum use of their residual hearing area. A system should therefore provide maximum speech intelligibility, maximum useful information from other sounds, minimum interference from unwanted noise and minimum distortion. The aim will normally be to provide amplified speech that is as clear and intelligible as possible, with the provision also of important background sounds, such as a ringing doorbell or the sound of an approaching car. These environmental sounds are important not only as warnings but also as providers of general information about our environment, which is important psychologically. Unfortunately background noise can, and does, interfere with the speech signal and it can be difficult or even impossible for hearing-impaired people to separate the sounds they want to hear from those they do not. This is partly due to the defective hearing mechanism, which is especially notable where cochlear damage has been sustained, and partly to the restrictions inherent in a hearing aid. A hearing aid system that will provide as little interference as possible from unwanted noise should be chosen. There are a number of features that can be selected or modified to minimize the problems, although the type of hearing loss may limit the degree of success that can be achieved. The hearing aid itself is a piece of man-made equipment and, however good, sound that is amplified and passed through the system will be distorted to some extent. A hearing aid with unacceptably high distortion should not be selected; this generally means no more than 10%, in terms of total harmonic distortion (see section 8.3.5). 185

186

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The hearing aid fitting procedure includes the selection, ‘fitting’, evaluation and modification of a hearing aid system. Reliable audiometric information provides the starting point and information is required for threshold levels by air and bone conduction, most comfortable levels and uncomfortable loudness levels, across the appropriate frequency range (Chapter 7). The success of the fitting is dependent both on the reliable measurement of residual hearing and on an understanding of the electro-acoustic and other characteristics of hearing aids. It is also influenced by the effectiveness of the earmould. There are rules associated with the prescription and fitting of hearing aids. Although the amplification needs of the hearing-impaired population remain not fully known and the area of hearing aid fitting is one in which options, attitudes and traditions vary widely, the following questions may provide a starting point for selection: • • • • • • • •

Is the fitting to be by air conduction or bone conduction? Is the fitting to be monaural or binaural? How much gain is needed? What maximum power output is required? Is there a need for automatic gain control? What are the required frequency response characteristics? What other facilities are needed? Is the aid acceptable to the client?

Client preference is an aspect of selection that should not be underestimated, for if a client does not accept the system or if he or she cannot operate it with ease its use will be seriously limited.

9.1.2 Air conduction and bone conduction Hearing aids can be obtained in the form of air conduction or bone conduction. Bone conduction aids are less efficient, require more power and have limited frequency response capabilities; if bone conduction is necessary the choice will be extremely limited. Therefore, air conduction aids should be used whenever possible. Bone conduction fittings may have to be made because of certain conductive problems, for instance where there is a physical deformity, such as no pinna, a collapsed meatus, a tender post-operative condition, or where there is an active discharge from the ear. In such cases, there is often no real option. If there is a choice, an air conduction fitting will normally be preferable for both sensorineural and conductive hearing losses. Occasionally there may be more benefit from a bone conduction hearing aid if there is a very severe conductive loss caused by a gross obstruction or lesion in the outer

Selection and fitting

187

or middle ear but it should never be assumed that bone conduction aids will necessarily provide the greater benefit. The efficiency of the coupling of an air conduction receiver to the meatus is greater than the mechanical coupling of a bone conduction vibrator to the mastoid, so that, in general terms, air conduction does not have to be as powerful as bone conduction to give the same effective output. It follows therefore that there is less risk of distortion in the output. Air conduction hearing aids also provide other advantages. They are smaller and lighter, the frequency range is significantly wider than that of bone conduction especially at the higher frequencies that are important to most hearing-impaired people, and the response is also more readily and easily modified. Great benefit should not be expected from a bone conduction hearing aid if the hearing loss by bone conduction is much greater than 30 dB over 50% or more of the audiometric measurement points between 250 Hz and 5 kHz. Little gain is provided at frequencies beyond 5 kHz by a bone conduction aid and these aids are not helpful for sensorineural losses. In the case of mixed loss they will only be beneficial if the sensorineural element is not too great. Three main types of bone conduction aids, spectacle, postaural with headband, and bodyworn with cord and headband, are available; all employ a large, stiff receiver that must fit properly on the mastoid process and be under reasonable tension or there will be a great tendency for mechanical and acoustic feedback. An alternative type of bone conduction aid is the bone-anchored hearing aid. Bone-anchored hearing aids (BAHAs) are bone conduction hearing aids that are attached, via an abutment, to a titanium screw placed in the temporal bone behind the ear. Bone-anchored hearing aids (Figure 9.1) are more cosmetically appealing and may produce better amplification because they are in direct contact with the bone. Ear level bone-anchored hearing aids are used for conductive hearing losses up to approximately 45 dBHL. For more severe conductive losses a bone-anchored hearing aid may be powered by a bodyworn amplifier. The procedure for placement of a bone-anchored hearing aid is: 1. 2. 3. 4.

The titanium screw is implanted in the bone. A three-month gap is allowed for healing and osseo-integration. An abutment is attached to the screw. The bone-anchored hearing aid is fitted to the abutment by means of an insert.

In practice, most hearing aid users’ needs can be met more efficiently with air-conduction than bone-conduction hearing aids. Air conduction can be

188

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Temporal bone

Titanium screw

Bone anchored hearing aid

Inset

Abutment

Figure 9.1. The main parts of a bone anchored hearing aid.

applied equally well to a conductive loss and a sensorineural loss so airconduction hearing aids should be selected every time unless there are strong medical contra-indications.

9.1.3 Monaural and binaural A binaural hearing aid system consists of two complete hearing aids so that each ear is provided with its own separate microphone, amplifier and receiver. A system that provides sound to each ear but uses only one microphone cannot supply all the benefits of true binaural hearing (Figure 9.2). The benefit of binaural fitting, in suitable cases, greatly exceeds that of monaural by providing more natural ‘balanced’ hearing with the advantages of: • • • • • •

improved localization of the sound; improved sense of distance from the sound source; improved speech discrimination in noise; binaural summation; binaural frequency advantage; improved quality with less distortion;

Selection and fitting

• • • • •

189

avoidance of abnormal head-shadow effects (see Figure 9.3); a subjective feeling of balanced hearing; masking for bilateral tinnitus; reduced likelihood of ever being without an aid; avoidance of auditory deprivation.

Figure 9.2. Monaural, binaural and pseudo-binaural hearing aid fittings compared with spectacle fittings. The general public expects to have vision improved in both eyes, not only in one. Although hearing aids do not restore normal hearing in the same way as spectacles may restore normal vision, if both ears will benefit from amplification, two aids should be provided whenever practical.

Figure 9.3. The head shadow: the head blocks the passage of high frequency sound waves, preventing them from being heard on the other side. With a monaural loss, high frequencies from the deaf side will therefore tend not to reach the good ear.

Small differences in the information arriving at each ear allow the listener to localize the sound source and to determine its distance away. The use of behind-the-ear and in-the-ear hearing aids permits full advantage to be taken of phase, time and intensity differences in the auditory signal

190

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

arriving at each ear. These directional clues assist the brain in the selection of meaningful signals from competing background noise (Carhart, 1965). Sounds heard binaurally are also perceived as louder, usually by about 3 dB to 5 dB than when heard monaurally due to ‘binaural summation’ (Dermody and Byrne, 1975). Similarly, where each ear has a different response across the frequency range of the audiogram, the brain may be able to add this information together to provide a much improved pattern of sound for the listener. Problems produced by the ‘head shadow effect’, when hearing is only possible through one ear, are avoided by binaural Hearing aid fitting (Figure 9.3). The head shadow effect can be explained as follows. The head blocks the passage of any sound waves that have a shorter wavelength than the width of the head. The average head width is approximately 20 cm and this means that the listener is at a great disadvantage, particularly with the high frequencies (i.e. those with a wave length < 20 cm) of speech if the sound source is on the same side as the poor ear. There is generally no significant attenuation below about 1.5 kHz and the average attenuation that can be expected is: 1 dB at 250 Hz 2 dB at 500 Hz 3 dB at 1 kHz 6 dB at 2 kHz 10 dB at 4 kHz 25 dB at 6 kHz. The higher the frequencies, the greater is the intensity difference between the two ears. With monaural hearing this creates problems that are heightened if background noise is present as this may mask the quieter high frequency sounds. Wernick (1985) suggests that a sufficient body of research literature now exists for it to be reasonable to assume a binaural fitting advantage unless there is evidence to the contrary. This is of particular importance because it is sometimes difficult to demonstrate binaural advantage in the fitting process. Many clients report subjective improvement of sound quality and a feeling of balance, especially after a period of rehabilitation. The use of two hearing aids has the very practical advantage that the client still has a hearing aid if one is sent for repair. Two hearing aids may also offer some relief to sufferers of bilateral tinnitus. Children are routinely fitted binaurally and, in addition to all the aforementioned advantages, it is thought that binaural stimulation will avoid the effects of ‘auditory deprivation’, where permanent changes may occur in the auditory pathways

Selection and fitting

191

when auditory signals are not received (Fisch, 1983). These changes may render the child less able to make good use of auditory information at a later stage. Auditory deprivation may also occur in adults who are aided monaurally, although some of the poorer performance at high presentation levels appears to be due to acclimatization (Gatehouse, 1990) – the adult is used to listening to quiet signals in that ear and therefore performs best at these levels, at least initially. Not every user is able to benefit from binaural amplification and there are a few instances where binaural use results in a decrease in ability to understand speech, but the vast majority of clients can obtain some advantage. Binaural fitting should therefore always be tried, unless there is a reason not to do so. Reasons would include when a binaural fitting has previously been shown to be without adequate benefit, when there is a medical contra-indication, such as an active discharge from one ear, when there is poor manual dexterity on one side, or when a client refuses to accept binaural aids. Obviously, binaural hearing aids are also inappropriate if one ear is normal, or very near normal, or if one ear is ‘dead’. In some cases, a CROS fitting (see section 9.1.4) may be more beneficial. As a general rule, binaural fitting for adults with acquired hearing loss is likely to provide the greatest benefit when there is no more than a 20 dB gap between the two air conduction threshold curves at any frequency (Berger and Hagberg, 1989). The further apart the thresholds, the less benefit is likely to be achieved; but even grossly asymmetric ears can be successfully aided binaurally and a binaural fitting should only be dismissed if it is completely out of the question. Binaural fittings should be tried whenever possible and the benefit assessed. If a binaural fitting is not possible or desirable, the ear to be aided must be selected and this should always be the one that will yield most benefit. There is no hard and fast rule that can be applied to decide which ear this will be and there are a number of factors that must be considered. Speech tests are sometimes used with the aim of fitting whichever ear has the better speech discrimination. Tests do not always indicate an obvious advantage and if one ear has been unused for some time, as is usually the case with asymmetric loss, it is difficult to estimate the value of the unused ear because the listener cannot immediately make use of the available information. Amplified sound fed to the better ear may at first appear more normal and easier to discriminate but after a period of rehabilitation the poorer ear might add significantly to the information provided. As an alternative to speech discrimination testing, audiometric considerations may be used to decide which ear is likely to provide most benefit and a rule of thumb often used is to fit the ear with the air conduction threshold which is nearest to 50 dBHL at 1 kHz. Other considerations may also affect

192

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

the choice of ear to fit, and if there is a difference in uncomfortable loudness levels it may be preferable to fit the ear with the most normal uncomfortable loudness level (ULL) since this will provide a wider dynamic range. If unilateral tinnitus is present, fitting the ear with the tinnitus may provide some masking through the amplification of ambient noise; with certain medical conditions, such as physical abnormalities or recurrent discharge, it may be better, or necessary, to fit the ear without the problem. The client’s opinion and lifestyle should always be taken into consideration as there may be other reasons for having a preference for a certain ear. Where a client already uses a monaural hearing aid it is usually best to continue to use the same ear because the user has already been rehabilitated to hearing on that side; this does not, of course, prohibit fitting the other ear or introducing binaural use. Some types of employment pose particular hearing requirements; for instance, driving instructors need to hear in the right ear so they can hear their clients, whereas lorry drivers would probably be better with the hearing aid in their left ear so as to avoid excessive road noise, which could be picked up by a fitting in the road-side ear. Clients may have a particular need or preference dictated by their lifestyle; this may be something as simple as the position of the television and chairs in the room and, if audiometric and other considerations allow it, client preference should be accepted. However, there are occasions where new users mistakenly believe that fitting the worst ear will most nearly correct their hearing defect whatever the loss. Counselling may be required to overcome an inappropriate belief about which ear will provide the most benefit.

9.1.4 Contralateral routeing of signals (CROS) A unilaterally impaired person will have problems in hearing from the ‘deaf ’ side and may need to turn the good ear towards the sound source. Such impairment may cause particular hearing difficulty in background noise, hearing in groups, and in localization of sound. Slight differences in the time, frequency and phase of the signals reaching the left and right ears normally allow the selection of meaningful signals from competing noise and facilitate the localization of sound. Unilaterally impaired people manage well in most situations; they produce good free-field speech test results in quiet conditions, have no speech production problems, can use the telephone, hear the television and have no noticeable difficulty in understanding. Their problems are very specific and, while the general public makes no allowance for unilateral loss, the hearing aid audiologist should

Selection and fitting

193

not underestimate their difficulties. If medical intervention is not appropriate, hearing aid fitting may be helpful and there are two possible systems, a monaural fitting or a CROS system. The CROS system was developed to help the unilaterally impaired person to hear sounds from the deaf side. In cases where a binaural fitting is not possible because one ear is ‘dead’ or very severely impaired while the other has normal or at least much better hearing, a CROS or Bi-CROS system may be indicated (Figure 9.4). In a CROS fitting, the signal is routed from the side of the ‘dead’ or severely impaired ear to the normal or near normal ear, where it is received in addition to direct sound received in the good ear. A Bi-CROS fitting is used where the better ear is not normal and requires some amplification.

Impaired Normal

Figure 9.4. Typical audiograms for CROS and Bi-CROS fittings.

194

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The acronym CROS stands for contralateral routing of signals and BiCROS stands for bilateral contralateral routing of signals. In a CROS system the microphone is placed at the poor ear, the receiver is placed at the good ear and an open earmould is fitted to allow direct entry of sound to the good ear, in addition to sound received from the deaf side. The BiCROS system is similar, except that it amplifies the sound received at the better ear. Two microphones are employed, one at each ear, both connected to a single amplifier, which feeds the sound to the better but impaired ear, usually via a closed earmould. Venting is sometimes possible but this will depend on the degree of hearing loss, as venting will make the hearing aid system prone to acoustic feedback. A CROS system offers some of the advantages of binaural fitting. It does not provide true binaural hearing but goes some way towards overcoming the problems of unilateral hearing, caused by the head-shadow effect. Some ability to localize sound can also be developed utilizing the differences in sound quality and time of arrival at each ear (Pollack, 1988). The unavoidable difference in the quality of sound received through the CROS system, compared with the natural sound received directly by the good ear, is particularly useful in this respect. The option of fitting CROS and Bi-CROS hearing aids is not widely used. The advantages of fitting binaurally, even with gross asymmetry between the ears, is much more generally accepted and many ears that were previously viewed as unaidable are now shown to benefit from aiding. A CROS system can offer some of the advantages of binaural hearing to a client for whom only unilateral hearing would otherwise be possible. However, it is a system that is physically more difficult to use and the client therefore needs to be highly motivated if the fitting is to be successful.

9.1.5 Transposition aids Transposition aids are air conduction hearing aids designed for clients who have little or no high frequency hearing above 2 kHz. These aids compress the entire frequency band of the signal so that it can be placed within a narrower and lower frequency band, which is audible to the client. Possible benefits include: • • • •

improved speech discrimination; increased awareness of high frequency cues; detection and identification of consonants; improved monitoring of one’s own speech.

However, the effectiveness of transposition is variable and intensive training is usually required.

Selection and fitting

195

9.2 HEARING AID FITTING 9.2.1 The requirements of a room for hearing aid fitting A room for hearing aid fitting should provide a more realistic ambient noise level than the very quiet conditions required for audiometric testing. However, it is not desirable that a person using an aid for the first time should be exposed to loud sounds or a variety of different stimuli at once, as this could adversely affect the client’s attitude to using hearing aids. This is an aspect of hearing aid fitting reflected in the rehabilitation of adults, where first time users are encouraged to build up their experience of aided sounds gradually from quiet situations to more complex noisy situations. In 1991 the British Society of Audiology proposed that a room used for the fitting of hearing aids should therefore have an ambient noise level not exceeding 40 dBA. The reverberation time should not exceed 500 milliseconds at 500 Hz to help avoid auditory confusion in the initial few minutes of hearing aid use. These acoustical requirements can normally be met by: • siting the room away from obvious sources of noise, such as vehicular traffic, foot traffic (stairs, corridors), kitchens, toilets, doorbells, or reception areas; • having appropriate sound-excluding windows fitted and, if necessary, a second entrance door; • ensuring that the floor is carpeted and the walls covered in absorbent material; • ensuring that the seating is soft and the windows covered by heavy curtains; • ensuring that the sound of any necessary ventilation equipment does not increase the overall ambient noise level.

9.2.2 The fitting procedure (a) Gain The fitting procedure is somewhat different depending on whether the aids being fitted are basically linear hearing aids (or simple compression systems) or digital wide dynamic range compression (WDRC) hearing aids. Hearing aids that use WDRC use varying amounts of gain depending on the level of the input signal (see section 6.4). The complex algorithms utilised by different hearing aid manufacturers have usually been

196

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Hearing level (dB)

developed for their specific digital products. However, the research underpinning these has evolved with the knowledge obtained from the earlier work concerning the half-gain and one-third gain rules. These simple rules state that the amount of gain required by most hearing aid users is less than that which would appear to adjust the hearing thresholds to ‘normal’ levels. This is due to the effects of recruitment, where small increases in the objective intensity of a sound produce abnormally large increases in the subjective sensation of loudness. A client with a 60 dBHL hearing loss, for example, will neither require, nor be able to use, 60 dB of gain. The ‘half gain rule’ suggests that sensorineurally impaired people appear to require an amount of gain that is equivalent to about 50% of their hearing loss (Berger, Hagberg and Rane, 1980). Hearing aid selection and fitting seek to amplify speech so that it is delivered at a comfortable level for the hearing aid user. The speech signal changes rapidly in frequency, time and intensity. There is an intensity range of approximately 28 dB between the strongest and weakest components of speech. The average range of speech energy expressed in dBL is sometimes drawn on the audiogram (Figure 9.5). This is known as the long-term average speech spectrum and indicates the normal average variation that occurs in conversational speech. It can provide a useful simple check on the benefit that may be expected from amplification.

Dynamic range

Frequency (Hz) Figure 9.5. An audiogram showing thresholds, MCLs and ULLs for the right ear. The gain of the hearing aid should be such that the output is centred on the user’s most comfortable level (MCL). The maximum output should remain just below the user’s uncomfortable loudness level (ULL).

Selection and fitting

197

Many prescriptive formulae and algorithms (section 6.4) are available to suggest the amount of gain the client needs from a hearing aid under certain conditions. All of these are designed to provide a method of calculating the appropriate gain for a hearing aid and they provide a starting point for the fitting procedure. Whatever formula or algorithm is used, the hearing aid audiologist should expect to have to 'fine tune' the hearing aid at the evaluation stage to meet the user's individual requirements. Most formulae and algorithms present the gain requirements in terms of functional gain or insertion gain. Functional gain is the gain of the hearing aid on the ear and may be taken as the difference between aided and unaided hearing thresholds. Insertion gain is also a measure of functional gain but it is less confusing to consider it separately. Insertion gain is the difference between the sound pressure level aided and unaided, measured with a probe microphone near the eardrum. It is the true or effective gain of the system and takes into account the natural amplifying effect of the normal open ear, which is lost or altered when the ear is blocked with the hearing aid. Hearing aid specification sheets do not always give insertion gain but, where it is not stated as such, insertion gain can be derived by subtracting the open ear response from the in situ gain or KEMAR gain (see section 8.5). Similarly, insertion gain can be approximately established from 2 cc measures of gain by adding a correction factor, which will vary according to the type of aid but is approximately 3 dB for a behind-the-ear aid and 4 dB for an in-the-ear aid. An understanding of linear prescription formulae may be helpful even when fitting WDRC. The hearing aid audiologist must usually accept the complex algorithms used by the manufacturers and make choices amongst them based upon the various claims made about the different products. The level of gain suggested by a ‘standard’ gain rule may at least provide a very basic tool of verification (for medium input levels). Lybarger published the ‘half gain rule’ in 1953, in The Basic Manual for Fitting Radioear Hearing Aids. A single figure of gain, usually at 1 kHz, can be calculated according to the formula: Required operating gain = AC loss + AC-BC + 5 dB 2

4

This should be considered together with the shape of the frequency response. Allowance can be made for binaural fittings by adjustment of the constant to –10. The formula still works well for linear hearing aids. Many formulae also provide for less than half-gain in the low frequencies in order to prevent over-amplification in this region and the upward spread of masking.

198

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

These prescriptive formulae provide a single figure of gain, unlike the multi-target gain figures provided for WDRC hearing aids. Prescriptive formulae based on the half gain rule suggest the amount of gain a client needs from a linear hearing aid with the volume control set for normal use. A linear hearing aid should generally be worn with the volume control about halfway on which will usually provide about two-thirds of the possible gain. This allows the user some degree of control to turn the aid up or down as circumstances dictate and avoids the necessity to use the aid at full on volume, where distortion is highest. However, hearing aids are often selected from the full on volume given in the specifications and this can be estimated by multiplying the user gain by 1.5 or by adding an amount of ‘reserve gain’, which is usually about 10 dB. The gain requirements for profound sensorineural hearing loss may be greater and two-thirds gain rather than half gain may provide speech at a more audible level (Libby, 1986). It is not unusual to have to provide a level of amplification that is near the maximum of the most comfortable level area in order to achieve adequate hearing for more severe and profound losses. It is sometimes also suggested that clients with a very mild loss require one-third gain (Libby, 1989). A starting point of insertion gain approximating to half the hearing loss for selection of a hearing aid generally works satisfactorily for these clients as well, although less reserve gain may be required. It should be noted that ITC and CIC aids appear to have a lower gain when tested using a 2 cc coupler than when used on a real ear (Tate, 1990). When working with 2 cc measurements rather than real ear gain, a one-third rule is therefore more appropriate. (b) Frequency response The shape of the frequency response curve must be suitable for the frequency characteristics of the hearing loss. Most clients with mild to severe hearing losses require a response from their hearing aids that ‘mirrors’ the shape of the audiogram in as much as it provides most gain where the hearing loss is greatest. If a simple half gain rule is adopted, taking 50% of the hearing loss, each frequency point will automatically provide a frequency response characteristic, which should be near to that required. The gain at 500 Hz and below has often to be further reduced in order that the higher frequencies may be perceived more clearly (to avoid the upward spread of masking). Hearing aids are usually provided with adjustable tone controls (section 5.3). Where a single figure of gain is used to select possible hearing aids, whether this be from a single frequency point, which is usually 1 kHz, or from an average across the mid-frequency range, usually 500 Hz to 2 kHz,

Selection and fitting

199

the slope of the audiogram must be further considered to ensure that the frequency characteristics of the aid are suitable across the amplification range. It is usual to provide less gain in the low frequency region (section 5.3.2), except for clients with more severe and profound hearing losses who may rely upon amplification of this region, and, where low frequency hearing is near normal, venting may be used to further reduce the low frequency gain. The degree of low frequency reduction suggested by the various formulae varies somewhat. A reduction of 5 dB at 500 Hz is recommended by McCandless and Lyregaard (1983) in the ‘POGO’ prescription of gain and output for hearing aids, whereas Libby (1986), in the ‘onethird–two-thirds gain’ rule, provides for slightly less low-frequency reduction: 3 dB at 500 Hz and 5 dB at 250Hz. This prescription provides for the use of the same correction factors with gain of one-third, half, or twothirds, respectively, for mild, moderate, and severe-to-profound hearing losses. Libby also suggests that where the hearing loss is precipitously falling, a ‘ski slope’ type audiogram, patients usually prefer a gain of about one-third, rather than half of the hearing loss. The formula presented by Berger (1988) is yet another variation of the half gain rule but one that provides for slightly more than half gain in the mid frequency region. High frequency amplification is important for clarity and intelligibility but over-amplification may produce an aid that sounds ‘tinny’ and too quiet and that is also prone to acoustic feedback. Clients who are new to hearing aids, particularly those who have been in need of amplification for some time, are sometimes unable initially to adjust to a level of high frequency amplification that should be beneficial to them. In such cases it is often possible to increase the high frequency amplification after a period of rehabilitation. (c) Maximum output The maximum power output must be selected and, if necessary, further set by the hearing aid audiologist so that the saturation sound pressure level (SSPL) is not capable of frequently exceeding the user’s uncomfortable loudness level (ULL). All hearing aids have a limit to the maximum output they are able to provide and in many hearing aids with linear amplification this limit is in the region of 120 dB SPL, although it can be higher. The maximum output of the aid can often be reduced from its natural limit using peak clipping. The ULL may be used to guide the setting of the maximum output, which should be as high as possible while remaining at least 5 dB below the ULL. This is not as straightforward as it would at first appear. The ULL in dBHL provides only a rough guide to the maximum output setting in dBSPL that

200

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

will be required by the user in everyday life. The ULL on the audiogram is recorded in dBHL, whereas the maximum output of the hearing aid is in dBSPL. Conversion factors can be added to dBHL thresholds to provide an approximation to dB SPL (Table 9.1). Table 9.1. Factors that can be added to dBHL to convert thresholds to dBSPL. (Based on recommended reference equivalent threshold sound pressure levels in a coupler in accordance with BS EN ISO 389-1: 2000.) 500 Hz

1 kHz

2 kHz

4 kHz

11.5

7

9

9.5

Moreover, ULLs from the audiogram have been obtained using pure tones whereas in everyday situations, hearing aid users are hearing complex sounds, including speech, for which improved ULL thresholds would be obtained. Therefore, when estimating the maximum output from the ULL on the audiogram, a figure greater than the ULL shown on the audiogram can be assumed. Opinions vary on the degree of difference that can be added, and such correction factors range from 4 dB to 20 dB (McCandless and Lyregaard, 1983). The use of different couplers in the measurement of the output of the hearing aid also creates a significant variation. The maximum output of the hearing aid in dBSPL will appear higher with ear simulator or in situ data than the same hearing aid measured using a 2 cc coupler. It would therefore appear fairly logical to use a higher conversion factor to add to the ULL from the audiogram when considering in situ data. An addition of 10 dB to 20 dB may be possible without discomfort when using ear simulator data, whereas an addition of only 5 dB to 10 dB is more usual when working from 2 cc data. Adjustment may also be necessary because the instructions given in administering the subjective ULL test may influence the discomfort levels recorded. Whatever method is employed to select the maximum output to be used, it must always be evaluated when the hearing aid is worn by the client. The maximum output of an aid should never be set such that it causes discomfort in everyday life. Where a single figure is required for the maximum output, this can be obtained either by using the 1 kHz reading or by averaging, usually over the frequencies 500 Hz to 2 kHz. (d) Automatic gain control (AGC) The maximum output of a hearing aid should be set to provide as wide a dynamic range as possible whilst keeping the sound level below discomfort (ULL). A dynamic range of 30 dB between threshold and discomfort

Selection and fitting

201

can be viewed as a minimum for successful linear amplification. The choice between linear amplification and the use of compression (see section 5.3) may depend upon a number of factors but all sensorineurally impaired users are likely to benefit from compression. The choice between compression and peak clipping alone will take account of both the audiogram and the client’s needs and situation. Peak clipping provides an excellent and instantaneous safeguard against uncomfortably loud sounds. Compression is not instantaneous. Peak clipping is therefore also used in conjunction with compression. Peak clipping alone should not be used in cases of severe recruitment as, with a very narrow dynamic range, information may be lost and intense sounds may still be too loud. Automatic gain control compresses the signal within the available dynamic range. This avoids high distortion, which would occur with frequent peak clipping, yet retains the important information content of the signal. Peak clipping offers sufficient protection for most hearing aid users against sudden loud sounds. Peak clipping only affects intense sounds and therefore does not generally affect speech intelligibility. Although peak clipping does cause distortion, this usually occurs with environmental sounds, such as traffic noise, where distortion is largely irrelevant. Digital programming has opened up great possibilities with regard to compression. It is essential that uncomfortable loudness levels are an accurate measure of discomfort rather than unpleasantness. If not, too much limiting may be employed, resulting in an unnecessary restriction of the client’s dynamic range. (e) Multi-channel hearing aids Multi-channel hearing aids attempt to match the needs of the user more closely by treating different frequency bands or channels separately to produce a complex frequency response with the aim of providing a precise prescription fitting. If the audiogram shape varies widely in the different frequency regions or if the configuration is unusual, it may be very helpful to use a twin or multichannel system. However, such systems do not result in the anticipated extra benefit in every case, perhaps because of the problems of poor sound perception due to cochlear damage.

9.3 TACTILE AIDS AND COCHLEAR IMPLANTS There remain a small number of profoundly deaf people who cannot benefit from conventional hearing aids. Access to acoustic signals for this group is usually provided through cochlear implants or through tactile

202

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

aids. Cochlear implants provide electrical stimulation within the cochlea. Tactile aids use mechanical transducers to present patterns of vibration to the skin, usually on the wrist. The basic processing strategies are similar for tactile aids and cochlear implants, in as far as either: • all speech information is presented; or • important speech features are extracted and presented in a coded form. Results with cochlear implants are much more successful than with hearing aids for profound deafness. Adults will have had previous experience of speech and language on which to build and rehabilitation involves learning to recognize speech using the electrical signals. After an appropriate period of rehabilitation many adults achieve a high degree of open set speech discrimination. Further information regarding cochlear implants is to be found in section 14.3.4. Tactile aids have one advantage over cochlear implants in that they are non-invasive. Profoundly deaf people who are unable or unwilling to have a cochlear implant may use them to gain additional information to assist speech reading. The aspects of speech most accessible through tactile aids include: • • • • •

presence or absence of sound; duration; intensity; rhythm; presence or absence of voicing.

The ability to receive and discriminate rate and amplitude changes through the skin is relatively poor and multi-channel tactile aids provide limited pitch information by using the skin’s sensitivity to differences in the location of stimulation. Rehabilitation involves learning to interpret the patterns of vibration presented to the skin.

9.4 SUMMARY Effective amplification is vital for the rehabilitation of the hearing impaired. Hearing aid fitting is a mixture of art and science – a challenge to the skills of the hearing aid audiologist. The overall aim of the fitting is to provide an amplified signal that will allow maximum benefit to be gained from the residual hearing area. Hearing aids are selected according to the medical, audiological and other needs of the individual.

Selection and fitting

203

The basic priorities for the initial prescription of hearing aid characteristics can be summarized as the provision of: • the correct amount of gain, which is usually approximately equal to half the hearing loss by air conduction; • a maximum output that is not higher than the genuine ULL; • a frequency response that relates to the slope of the audiogram, without over-amplifying the low frequencies. Prescriptive formulae can provide a starting point for hearing aid fitting and facilitate the choice of suitable circuitry. Fine-tuning should then meet the needs of the individual client. The aid selected should be sufficiently flexible to allow modifications that may be required especially in respect of the gain, frequency and maximum output.

FURTHER READING Allum DJ (1996) Cochlear Implant Rehabilitation in Children and Adults. London: Whurr. Byrne D (1987) Hearing aid selection formulae: same or different? Hearing Instruments 38(1): 5–11. Plant G, Spens KE (eds) (1995) Profound Deafness and Speech Communication. London: Whurr. Pollack M (1988) Amplification for the Hearing Impaired. 3 edn. Orlando FL: Grune & Stratton. Ringdahl A, Esraelsson B, Caprin L (1995) Paired comparison between the Classic 300 bone-anchored and conventional bone-conduction hearing aids in terms of sound quality and speech intelligibility. British Journal of Audiology 29: 299–307. Sandlin R (1988) Handbook of Hearing Aid Amplification. Volume 1. Boston: CollegeHill Press. Summers IR (ed.) (1992) Tactile Aids for the Hearing Impaired. London: Whurr Tyker RS (1992) Cochlear Implants: Audiological Foundations. London: Whurr. Venema TH (1998) Compression for Clinicians. San Diego: Singular.

Chapter 10 Earmoulds

10.1 MAKING THE IMPRESSION 10.1.1 Introduction The purpose of an earmould is to secure the aid to the ear and convey sound into the ear canal. The mould may also have a significant effect on the frequency response of the aid. An earmould is the reverse duplication of the ear, obtained by taking an impression. The features of the impression and of the earmould are named after the parts of the pinna to which they relate, except the helix, which is divided into the ball, waist and fan (Figure 10.1). The taking of an impression is a vitally important part of the hearing aid fitting procedure and one that can make the difference between success and failure. The impression should show any abnormalities in the ear – for

Helix of pinna Helix of earmould

Figure 10.1. The features of an earmould in relation to the pinna.

204

Earmoulds

205

example any unusual lumps – and these should be marked so that the earmould manufacturer notes them. In cases where there is stenosis due to collapse of the cartilage in the meatus the earmould may appear shaped like a funnel or like an hourglass. If the impression does not accurately reflect the pinna contours and the meatal projection, the quality of the hearing aid system in terms of comfort and acoustic performance may be adversely affected.

10.1.2 Impression materials Silicone-based materials are recommended for the taking of ear impressions (Nolan and Combe, 1985). There are two basic types currently available; condensation reaction silicone and addition cured silicone, and the choice will depend upon the requirements. Ideally, impression materials for making earmoulds should be easy to work with, including having suitable flow properties, and they should provide an accurate impression, which will be flexible but of sufficient mechanical strength not to deform or tear easily. They should not have undesirable side effects, such as producing heat, and they should remain stable over time. (a) Condensation reaction silicone Condensation reaction silicone is currently the most widely used material. This cures by a condensation polymerization reaction, in which alcohol is produced in by-products, which evaporate. A small amount of shrinkage, accompanied by a weight loss of about 1%, results within the first 48 hours (Tucker and Nolan, 1984). This represents a great advance over acrylics, which are unstable and shrink about 6%, used prior to the introduction of silicone materials. However, even the small degree of shrinkage encountered with condensation reaction silicone can create a problem where a tight-fitting earmould is required, namely where gain of over 50 dB is required, and for all children especially during periods of rapid growth. Condensation reaction silicone is not particularly easy to mix since the ratio of base to hardener is imprecise. Use of inadequate hardener can result in very slow curing, whereas too much can result in the material hardening before the impression has been completed. This material is considerably less expensive than its addition cured counterpart, provides a reasonably short setting time and results in a relatively elastic impression that travels well. This impression material is satisfactory for earmoulds where a tight fit is not vital, but is less satisfactory for high gain requirements or for children.

206

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(b) Addition cured silicone Addition cured silicone has two major advantages over condensation reaction silicones: improved dimensional stability and ease of measuring the base and hardener mix. This material has no measurable shrinkage and is therefore able to produce very precise ear impressions. It is mixed using equal parts of base and hardener, which is fairly easy to estimate or which can be achieved accurately using measuring syringes. It is considerably slower in setting than condensation reaction silicone and it is also more expensive, although this is a minor disadvantage in comparison with the advantages where precision is required. The set impressions are elastic and do not recover well from deformation, particularly in the early stages of curing; they should therefore be removed from the ear with great care, using a gentle rocking motion to avoid tearing. If both addition cured and condensation reaction silicones are used separate syringes must be kept for each material, as addition cured silicone is easily affected by contamination. When packaging, ideally the ear impression should be glued by its base to a rigid box and not surrounded by packaging material. Paperwork should be placed outside the box. Sterilisation of the ear impressions is recommended where necessary to avoid any risk of cross-infection.

10.1.3 Ear impression equipment The equipment necessary for taking an impression should be laid out on a clean surface; a clean white towel is generally preferred for this purpose. The following items are required: • • • • • • • • •

• • •

an otoscope with batteries to provide good illumination; a sufficient supply of suitably sterilised specula in at least three sizes; suitable impression material; an impression syringe; foam or cotton meatal tamps in at least three sizes; an earlight and suitably sterilised probe tips; a clean towel to place over the client’s shoulder to protect clothing; scissors (round-nosed) for trimming excessive meatal hair and for trimming or ‘pruning’ foam meatal blocks; lubricant (petroleum jelly) for smoothing down excessive meatal hair or remaining hair stubble after trimming; olive oil or baby oil may be required when taking impressions for CIC hearing aids. bite blocks as required; 3 clean sealable containers-for clean and used specula and a disposable container for ‘medical waste’; rubber examination gloves should be available.

Earmoulds

207

10.1.4 The ear examination A thorough examination of the outer ear should always precede impression taking (section 7.1) to check for abnormalities that could necessitate referral to a medical practitioner and to note any irregularities that might affect the procedure: • In cases of excessive wax the impression procedure would be likely to further compress the wax and its removal is necessary before the impression is made. • The condition of the skin lining should be healthy and there should be no discharge, otherwise appropriate medical treatment is required prior to hearing aid fitting. • Irregularities in the shape of the pinna or the meatus should be noted and care taken to ensure the impression indicates any relevant abnormalities. Any malformations that might be considered to be errors in the impression should be noted for the earmould manufacturer. • Where there has been previous surgery, such as mastoidectomy, great care should be taken in the placement of the meatal tamp. A mastoidectomy involves the removal of diseased bone from behind the pinna and this may affect the shape of the middle ear, including enlarging the external auditory meatus. In such a case particular care must be taken to ensure the impression material does not reach the wider parts, from which removal of the set material could be extremely difficult and might necessitate hospital treatment. The meatal tamp must be sufficiently large and placed with care, and syringing must be slow and careful, to avoid moving the tamp further down the meatus. In some extreme cases, the impression procedure could place the client at risk and should not be undertaken. • The condition of the tympanic membrane should be noted and special care taken if the membrane is scarred, as scar tissue is weak and may be perforated, or if the ear is already perforated air pressure into the middle ear may cause dizziness. Care should be taken in positioning the tamp, slowly injecting the impression material into the ear and, when set, in very slowly removing the impression, so breaking the airtight seal with the ear very gradually.

10.1.5 The basic (relaxed closed jaw) ear impression technique 1.

The client should be provided with a brief explanation of the technique to be employed and should be made aware that there may be a feeling of fullness experienced in the ear. The mouth should be kept in the normal, naturally relaxed closed position and there should

208

2.

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

be no talking or jaw movement, other than swallowing to relieve the feeling of pressure, until the impression is set. A towel or tissue should be placed over the client’s shoulder and a suitably sized tamp should be selected, so that it will completely fill the meatus but without causing undue pressure. If the client has a very small ear canal a foam block may be ‘pruned’ or ‘tapered’ with scissors to fit or a cotton otoblock may be preferred as these can be obtained in very small sizes. The cotton threads should be knotted to ensure these cannot be accidentally removed and the block should be gently inserted into the ear canal. This should be done from a sitting or kneeling position, so that the client’s ear is at, or above, eye level. A hand should be held against the client’s head to prevent discomfort if the client moves and the earlight should be used to position the block just beyond the second bend (Figure 10.2) at the junction between bone and cartilage, which is approximately half-way down the meatus. Sufficient depth in the meatus is important to provide an accurate indication of the angle of the bends of the meatus, in order that the mould-maker can place the output tube at the required angle to direct sound to the tympanic membrane and not towards the canal wall.

Position of block

Figure 10.2. Placement of the tamp just beyond the second bend at the junction between the bone and the cartilage.

3.

Where the impression is for a CIC hearing aid, cotton otoblocks are preferred, often with a light coating of oil to help insertion and removal. The block should be ‘fluffed’ out slightly at all sides and placed about 5 mm beyond the second bend. See also section 10.1.6 (open jaw impressions).

Earmoulds

209

4.

If spectacles or earrings are normally worn, these should not be removed and if the impression is being taken to produce an earmould for a behind-the-ear hearing aid, the aid should be placed on the pinna until the impression is set. If the ear is especially hairy a small amount of petroleum jelly can be applied to the hair to prevent it adhering to the set impression. Excessive hair can be carefully trimmed with scissors, if the client gives permission, but this is rarely necessary. 5. The impression material should be mixed quickly but thoroughly and placed in the syringe. The plunger should be depressed so that material begins to flow out of the nozzle, thus expelling any air. The syringe should be positioned as near as possible to the tamp and the material should be syringed steadily into the ear. When it begins to flow out of the meatus, the syringe should be moved to fill the concha, but with the nozzle always remaining slightly embedded in the material. When the concha has been partially filled, the helix should be filled, returning to the concha until it is completely filled. The concha should be filled sufficiently to indicate its depth but not to the extent that the impression begins to sag. The impression should not normally be pressed or smoothed off as this may distort it. 6. The impression material should be allowed to set until no mark is left if a fingernail is lightly drawn across it. The impression may stretch if it is removed before it has fully set. 7. The set impression should be eased slowly from the ear, lifting the helix out first and then pulling gently at the base, or using a gentle rocking motion, in such a way as to avoid causing discomfort to the client or distortion of the impression. 8. The impression should be marked to indicate requirements and should be carefully checked for accuracy before sending to the manufacturers. 9. The ear should be examined with an otoscope to ensure that all is well and the client should be offered a tissue to wipe the ear, which may be greasy. 10. The ear impression should be cleaned as necessary and packaged carefully for transit, preferably glued to the base of a rigid box, and sent with its accompanying paperwork to specify the type of earmould and the material required.

10.1.6 Open jaw impressions Jaw movement causes changes in the shape of the ear canal (Figure 10.3). Opening the mouth causes the facial muscles and the cartilage of the ear to move forward and the ear canal to widen. Biting or chewing makes the ear canal narrower. The degree of change varies significantly between

210

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

individuals but extensive jaw movement may cause the following problems: • feedback, especially when talking, eating or laughing; • movement of the hearing aid in the ear canal causing discomfort and/or affecting retention; • fluctuations in volume and reduced intelligibility; • increased occlusion effect in CIC fittings.

Figure 10.3. Differences in the impression due to jaw movement. (a) impression taken whilst chewing. (b)impression taken with normal relaxed (closed) jaw. (c) open jaw impression. (Photograph courtesy of Starkey Laboratories Ltd.)

In cases where jaw movement affects the ongoing shape of the ear canal, and for all CIC fittings, it is necessary to take impressions with the jaw in a relaxed jaw position (closed) and with the jaw open (using special ‘bite blocks’, see Figure 10.4). Both impressions should be sent to the earmould manufacturer. The bite block should be disposed of in an appropriate manner, see section 7.2.2.

Figure 10.4. The ‘bite block’. (Diagram courtesy of Starkey Laboratories Ltd.)

Earmoulds

211

10.2 EARMOULDS 10.2.1 Earmould materials There are a number of materials available for the manufacture of earmoulds and the selection will depend on the requirements necessary for the mould. Every client wants an earmould that will fit well and be comfortable, easy to insert and remove, easy to clean, of acceptable appearance and that will not cause acoustic feedback (whistling). There is no one ideal; each available type has its own advantages and disadvantages. Hard acrylic is the most widely used material because it is an attractive product that is non-toxic, easy to clean, easy to work and can be produced in any configuration. It is not flexible and generally does not provide a sufficiently good acoustic seal for hearing aids with high gain, over approximately 50 dB. Soft acrylic is still a fairly hard material but provides a more efficient acoustic seal and has a little more flexibility, which is often more comfortable and may also be advantageous for a client whose jaw moves to a greater than average extent. Soft acrylic is porous, not as easy to clean and is stained by ear wax. It is a material that can be used on its own or as a soft tip in conjunction with a hard acrylic bowl. There are a number of true soft or ‘all soft’ materials available, which include vinyl and silicone products. These provide an improved acoustic seal and are more comfortable. They may be recommended for children as they offer more protection if the child is hit on the ear. Soft materials are not usually produced in skeleton form as they lack the required strength and rigidity. They are difficult to modify and to retube and they need retubing at frequent intervals, ideally as often as every two months, because the tubing tends to collapse within the earmould. They are also porous and more difficult to clean and have a shorter life as they tend to split. Soft materials, especially silicone, may be may be used in the manufacture of non-allergenic moulds, where these are required. True allergenic reactions to the materials used are rare and, more frequently, the irritation is due to the use of colourants or to oversized or rough earmoulds.

10.2.2 Earmould types The earmould type will be selected (Figure 10.5) first according to whether the hearing aid is of the bodyworn, behind-the-ear, or in-the ear type. A bodyworn aid requires a solid mould with a ring and clip fitting to accommodate the external receiver. Such a mould is usually supplied with a full helix to ensure that the extra weight of the receiver does not pull the mould out of the ear. It can be ordered in hard or soft materials and can be supplied with a wire to hook over the top of the pinna for further security

212

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

if necessary. The style that can be selected for behind-the-ear aids is much wider and includes all those listed in Figure 10.5.

Figure 10.5. Earmould types. (After Tate, 1994.)

Earmoulds

213

The earmould or shell of an in-the-ear aid contains the battery and workings of the aid, which restricts its size, but it can be produced as full shell, half shell, canal or helix fitting. • A full shell completely fills the concha and can provide a good acoustic seal for high gain. It can be obtained with or without a full helix, which improves retention in the ear but may not be comfortable. The full shell is the most common style for in-the-ear hearing aids. • A skeleton mould or invisimould is similar to the full shell but the centre of the concha portion is removed making the mould less conspicuous while remaining secure. • A half shell mould is similar to a full shell but has the helix and upper part of the concha removed. • Half skeleton and quarter skeleton moulds are variations of the skeleton mould in which part, or most, respectively, of the outer perimeter is removed, for comfort, ease of insertion or cosmetic purposes. • A canal or meatal tip provides a less good acoustic seal and is less secure in the ear, but is a popular fitting because it is easy to insert and very inconspicuous. • An open canal or CROS mould has no meatus and is usually a skeleton fitting, but it may be a full concha, to hold the tube into the meatus without causing occlusion. • A helix in-the-ear aid provides an open canal fitting and the components of the aid are contained in the helix portion of the shell.

10.2.3 Modification of hearing aid performance Modifications to the performance of a hearing aid may be made electronically and acoustically. Some hearing aids provide a number of electronic controls with which the hearing aid audiologist can adjust and modify the hearing aid’s performance (section 5.3). Acoustic modifications (Figure 10.6) are those that occur beyond the receiver, that is in the elbow or earhook, the tubing and the earmould, which together are sometimes referred to as ‘the earmould plumbing’. These modifications may take the form of alterations to the tubing length or diameter, or to the length of the meatal projection, the addition of filters in the sound path and venting the earmould. (a) Tubing modifications The tubing affects the frequency response of the aid due to resonance (Chapter 1), which creates peaks in the sound output at certain frequencies. These frequencies are primarily dictated by the internal diameter of

214

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 10.6. The effect of various acoustic modifications. Venting affects the low frequency region, filters smooth peaks in the response, and horns extend the high frequency amplification.

the tubing. The tubing length has some effect but is very difficult to adjust, as it is fixed by the size of the ear and the location of the hearing aid. The internal diameter of tubing can be readily used as a means of shifting the frequency emphasis. Decreasing the tubing diameter will lower the frequency emphasis, by lowering the frequency of the first resonant peak and reducing the mid and high frequency gain and output. Conventional fittings use constant bore tubing but it is possible to increase the diameter of the tube towards the ear canal to produce a significant improvement in high frequency response. This increase in high frequency, which is due to a quarter wave resonance, is known as a horn effect (Figure 10.7). A horn that provides a 4 mm final diameter will enhance the response above 3 kHz by about 10 dB and extend the frequency limit, usually to about 8 kHz. A 3 mm horn can provide a similar enhancement but only up to about 6 kHz. Increasing the high frequency response in this way may be very advantageous for some clients with high frequency hearing loss. Conversely, a tapered or reverse-horn arrangement, in which the diameter of the last section is reduced, may be used to attenuate the high frequencies, which may be helpful for some low frequency hearing losses. Where a higher frequency response is required from an in-the-ear hearing aid, some improvement may be achieved by increasing the diameter of the sound bore by ‘belling’ (a concave profile) the end of the meatal projection. (b) Meatal projection length The length of the projection of the earmould into the ear varies the volume of the meatus, which has an effect on the output signal. A long earmould projection will reduce the meatal volume, which will increase the overall sound pressure level and will particularly enhance the low

Earmoulds

215

Figure 10.7. A Libby horn.

frequency response. A short earmould projection will maintain the volume of the meatus nearer to normal and will therefore provide some enhancement of the higher frequencies. (c) Venting the earmould A vent is a hole drilled through the earmould, usually parallel to the sound output channel, although if there is insufficient space in the earmould a diagonal vent opening into the sound tube may be used (Figure 10.8). Venting provides intentional sound leakage and has the greatest effect on the low frequency region. It may be used to relieve a feeling of pressure in the ear or to modify the frequency response of the aid. A small ‘pinhole’ vent of approximately 0.6 mm will make very little difference to the frequency response but will be effective in allowing pressure equalization to reduce the feeling of fullness in the ear that many hearing aid users experience.

Figure 10.8. Diagonal and parallel vents. These are used to provide intentional sound leakage, most commonly for the purpose of low frequency reduction.

216

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Many clients have better hearing in the low frequency region and benefit from a reduction of low frequency amplification, which allows them to perceive the important high frequency sounds more clearly. New users also often complain of hearing their voice as hollow or echoing; this is the result of excessive low frequency amplification, generated in the occluded ear and transmitted by bone conduction. It has a noticeable effect on hearing one’s own voice and is known as ‘the occlusion effect’. Venting is commonly employed for low frequency reduction and is used in conjunction with a short meatal projection for this purpose. It is normal practice to order a vent that is small, medium, large or open ear. The size selected will take into account the gain of the aid and the hearing in the low frequency region, which should be no worse than 30 dBHL if a vent is to be used. In general, the better the hearing in the low frequencies, the larger will be the vent. However, amplified sound leaking from the vent may cause acoustic feedback. Venting can only be of benefit if the gain of the hearing aid is not sufficient to cause acoustic feedback. An open ear is the largest possible vent size and provides a non-occluding earmould that can only be used if low to moderate gain, over the mid to high frequency region, is adequate. This type of earmould was originally designed for use with the CROS system and, where it is used on the same ear as the hearing aid, it is sometimes termed an IROS fitting, meaning ‘ipsilateral routing of signals’ or ‘used on the same ear’. An open earmould allows entry of normal unamplified sound, which is useful in many cases of sensorineural hearing loss where the low frequency hearing is good. At the same time, the open ear acts to reduce the amplification of low frequencies below 1.5 kHz, which is obviously not required. However, the open vent does not remove peaks in the frequency response of the aid and its tubing and the primary peak around 2 kHz can still provide excessive gain for the user unless the peak is damped using an appropriate acoustic filter placed in the tubing or the earhook. A large vent is usually about 4 mm in diameter and provides strong low frequency reduction below 1 kHz. It is used where the hearing loss below this frequency is not greater than 30 dBHL. If the hearing is good only to 500 Hz, a medium vent with a diameter of 2 mm will reduce the gain adequately. However, the vent itself may resonate causing an increase in gain at a frequency just above the region being reduced, which in some cases may be very undesirable. The problem may be even worse where a small vent is used with the idea of reducing low frequency gain below 250 Hz (Lybarger, 1985). Unless the meatal tip is short and hollowed out the low frequency attenuation is negligible but there may be a consider-

Earmoulds

217

able enhancement of perhaps 5 dB to 10 dB at frequencies just above 250 Hz. This is usually not the result that was intended and damping the vent may be necessary to remove the offending peak. The effect of the vent is sometimes termed ‘the vent response’. This may be found using a probe microphone to measure the difference in sound pressure level in the ear with the earmould vented and with the vent blocked. The vent response interacts with other modifications to provide the required characteristics and it is therefore difficult to establish the precise effect without recourse to real ear measurement. A venting system that is extremely useful is that often known as the ‘select-a-vent’ system. The earmould or in-the-ear hearing aid is obtained with a standard-sized hole for which a range of plugs are made. Each plug provides a different-sized vent. The hearing aid audiologist is then able to try various vent sizes without needing to remake the earmould. (d) Acoustic filters The frequency response of a hearing aid usually contains two or more peaks of gain. These are due to the effects of the hearing aid electronics and the resonance of the tubing that provides the link between the receiver and the meatus. Peaks of gain may be troublesome because they may cause the output to exceed the user’s uncomfortable loudness level, in which case the volume of the aid may be set according to the level of these peaks rather than the overall response of the aid. Acoustic filters or damping add a resistance in the sound path, which has the effect of smoothing the resonant peaks. Filters located in the output path have the greatest effect on the mid-frequency region between 1 kHz and 3 kHz. The damping effect is maximal when the filter is at the meatal end of the tubing but this is not very practical because the filter rapidly blocks with wax. For convenience, earhooks are often supplied with damping in place. The effect of the filters varies not only with their position but also with their acoustic resistance value, which is expressed in ohms. The higher the ohm value, the greater is the smoothing effect. Values from approximately 680 ohms to 4700 ohms are available but values over about 1,500 ohms tend to reduce the mid-frequency response to a greater extent than is usually required.

10.3 SUMMARY Silicone-based materials are recommended for impressions as they undergo little shrinkage. Where a particularly tight acoustic seal is required, addition cured silicone should be used.

218

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

An ear examination is important prior to impression taking. Any abnormalities should be noted and if necessary referred for medical advice. Impressions should be taken using the syringe and block/tamp method. Open jaw impressions are used where jaw movement significantly affects the shape of the ear canal and for all CIC aids. Earmoulds can be obtained in a variety of configurations and materials. Hard acrylic is most widely used because it is an attractive product, which is both easy to look after and long-lasting. ‘All-soft’ materials provide a better acoustic seal but are more difficult to look after and have a much shorter life. Soft acrylic provides a ‘half-way house’ between hard and all soft materials. Acoustic modifications can be made to the earmould. These include: • Tubing modifications to shift the frequency emphasis. A horn effect can be used to enhance the high frequency response significantly. • Alteration to the meatal length. A long meatal length enhances the low frequencies and increases the output. A short meatal length improves the higher frequencies. • Venting is commonly used to facilitate limited sound leakage in order to reduce low frequency amplification. • Acoustic filters smooth resonant peaks in the frequency response. The earmould and its plumbing form an integral part of the hearing aid system and can improve or restrict its use.

FURTHER READING British Society of Audiology (1986) Recommended procedure for taking an aural impression. British Journal of Audiology 20: 315–16. National Deaf Children’s Society (1991) Recommendations from the Department of Health Seminar on the Production of Earmoulds and Tubing, July 1990. London: National Deaf Children’s Society. Pollack M (ed.) (1988) Amplification for the Hearing Impaired. 3 edn. Orlando FL: Grune & Stratton. Tate M (ed.) (1994) The Earmould, Current Practice and Technology. Revised edition. Reading: Hearing Aid Audiology Group, British Society of Audiology.

Chapter 11 Evaluation

11.1 INTRODUCTION The selection of an appropriate hearing aid and earmould for a client does not signify the end of the hearing aid fitting procedure. Some process must be employed to judge the benefit provided by the aid in terms of its effectiveness and acceptability. Hearing aid evaluation must consider not only the technical specifications of the aid but also the subjective opinion of the user, because a hearing aid will provide no benefit unless it is worn. The prime technical objective is to select and adjust a hearing aid system so that it provides the best possible hearing function. However, this will only be of real benefit if acceptability to the client is not forgotten. There are a number of approaches that can be used to assess: • • • •

the degree to which the aid meets the prescribed characteristics; the functional benefits of the hearing aid system; the degree to which the aid meets the client’s needs and expectations; the subjective opinion of the client in relation to sound quality and clarity.

Hearing aid evaluation should be ongoing and viewed as part of an integral approach to audiological rehabilitation.

11.2 INSERTION GAIN MEASUREMENT Insertion gain provides an objective measure of the gain provided by a hearing aid when worn. Insertion gain procedures involve the placing of a tiny flexible probe tube within the ear canal. The actual sound pressure level is then measured, first without a hearing aid, known as the open-ear measurement, and then with the hearing aid in use. The difference between these two measurements is known as the ‘insertion gain’ and describes the benefit in terms of amplification for the user. 219

220

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

A normal ear acts, in effect, as a natural resonator, amplifying sound entering from the environment or ‘sound field’. This amplification is due mainly to ear canal resonance but with some influence from the effects of the pinna and concha (Chapter 2). The gain can vary widely between individuals and even between the left and right ears of the same patient (Tate, 1990). For most patients the gain is usually between 10 dB and 20 dB, but this author has found peak open ear gain to vary from as little as 5 dB to as much as 30 dB in different individuals. Ear canal resonance is not static throughout life but changes as the ear grows. In new-born babies the natural resonant peak is near to 6 kHz but this changes rapidly and the frequency is near that of an adult by about two years of age. The adult peak frequency is between about 2.5 kHz and 3.3 kHz. When an earmould or an in-the-ear hearing aid occludes the ear, the open ear gain will be altered or lost. This means that when a hearing aid is placed on the ear, that aid has to overcome the loss of natural amplification before it provides any real benefit to the user. Insertion gain corresponds to this benefit. The terminology surrounding insertion gain (Figure 11.1) can be confusing: • Open ear gain is the natural amplification afforded by the ear canal resonance and other factors. A graph that shows the open ear gain is known as the real ear unaided response (REUR). • In situ measurements are aided measurements taken at the ear without making allowance for the loss of natural amplification. A graph that shows the real ear aided measurements is known as the real ear aided response (REAR). • Insertion gain is the difference between the unaided and aided sound pressure levels measured near the eardrum. A graph that shows this is known as the real ear insertion response (REIR).The terms etymotic gain, transmission gain and real ear gain are sometimes used to describe insertion gain. Insertion gain is the most useful probe tube measurement for hearing aid evaluation and is often compared with a target derived from one of the prescriptive formulae. Ideally the insertion gain should match to within about 5 dB of the target. However targets are only starting points and fine-tuning may be required to meet the needs of the individual client. An in situ output frequency response may have value in setting the maximum output limit of an aid but is not generally used in this way.

Evaluation

221

Figure 11.1. The relationship between in situ gain, open ear gain and insertion gain.

Prescription methods are often used in the selection of a hearing aid – see section 6.4. Real ear gain can be predicted from corrected coupler measurements. This is known as the real ear to coupler difference (RECD). This can be used to provide an approximation that is close to that of the measured real ear gain of an average ear canal. The desired sensation level (DSL) (Seewald, 1994), for example, makes particular use of the real ear to coupler difference to predict the real ear performance of the hearing aids for children. It can be argued that real ear confirmation is not always necessary (Green, 1988) but the disadvantage of the prediction method is that it does not take individual differences into account. While most patients have an ear canal resonance acceptably close to the average, there are some who differ markedly from it. This will be particularly true at the extremes of age since the ear canals of both young children and the elderly are likely to differ in shape and size from those of the ‘average’ population. The effect of venting on real ear gain is also very variable, although correction factors appropriate to the vent size will improve the prediction. These problems can be avoided by measuring the real ear gain directly on the client. Real ear insertion gain should be used to clarify the true gain at the ear where: • a vented mould or shell is used; • the client is very young or very old; • the results of the fitting appear at variance with the hearing aid audiologist’s expectations. The specialized equipment required for insertion gain measurements can be obtained in a portable form and for hearing aid fitting purposes may be

222

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

used in a reasonably quiet, non-sound-treated room. The technique used should, however, be carefully controlled, so that consistent results can be obtained on different test/re-test occasions. As with any method of evaluation there are a number of advantages and disadvantages that should be considered. The advantages include: • Provides an objective measure of real ear performance. • Produces quick and reliable results when used appropriately. • Facilitates accurate modification of the frequency response of the hearing aid. • Can be used with clients unable to perform behavioural tests. Disadvantages: • Placement of the probe tube requires practice. • Wax deposits in the ear canal may block the probe tube. • Placement of the probe tube may cause unintentional venting leading to an effect on the low frequency response and acoustic feedback. • Does not reduce the importance of more subjective results. Probe tube measurements can be used to assess how closely a selected hearing aid matches the requirements of gain and output prescribed for the user. If the response is unsatisfactory the effect of modifications, including those to the earmould, can be monitored. Ideally, after the characteristics have been selected and modified according to prescription, a more subjective approach should be used to ensure the acceptance of the client is not overlooked. Insertion gain techniques can provide immediate visual feedback for both client and audiologist with regard to the effects of changes made in response to the client’s reactions.

11.3 FUNCTIONAL GAIN MEASUREMENT Functional gain measurements provide another method of assessing the gain provided to the hearing aid user. The method involves the comparison of unaided and aided hearing thresholds, obtained in the ‘freefield’. The difference between the unaided and aided thresholds is termed the ‘functional gain’. Functional gain is based on behavioural responses and therefore reflects the efficiency of the auditory system in its entirety. An audiometer is used to feed warble tones, or alternatively narrow bands of noise, through an amplifier to a loudspeaker. This is normally

Evaluation

223

Aided threshold (dB SPL)

Aided threshold (dB SPL)

positioned 1 metre in front of the client. The sound pressure level is measured at the client’s position using a sound level meter and thresholds are expressed in dBA or dBSPL. Aided thresholds are sometimes plotted on a pre-printed chart showing an average speech spectrum, see Figure 11.2. This will readily indicate the approximate audibility of conversational speech sounds when the aid is worn. Behavioural thresholds, especially in the free field, are subject to variability, generally in the order of 5 dB. The difference between unaided and aided thresholds provides an approximate measure of functional gain that correlates reasonably well with insertion gain and which can be usefully compared with prescribed real ear gain. The acceptability of the selected maximum output of the hearing aid can also be checked by presenting high sound inputs and observing the client’s reactions. Functional gain measurements are most appropriate to use in a soundtreated room and are only widely used in the evaluation of hearing aids for children. Free-field testing of this nature is fairly time-consuming, but can be used to compare the functional gain achieved with prescribed real ear gain, to confirm the adequacy of the aided threshold and to check the client’s tolerance at maximum output.

Long term speech spectrum in dBSPL

Figure 11.2. An example of an aided audiogram (expressed in dBSPL). (After Maltby and Knight, 2000, with permission).

224

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

11.4 SPEECH AUDIOMETRY 11.4.1 Speech discrimination tests Speech discrimination tests are widely used in the evaluation of hearing aid benefit and in clinical diagnosis. The methods used are similar but more rigorously applied for diagnostic purposes. In hearing aid evaluation, the objective is usually: • to demonstrate the value of a hearing aid; • to choose the most beneficial aid; • to demonstrate the value of binaural hearing aids. Speech audiometry sets out to provide information about the individual’s hearing for speech and uses tests given at above threshold intensities. Speech may be delivered to the individual by live voice or recordings. In the evaluation of a hearing aid system, speech tests are undertaken in the free-field, whereas for diagnostic purposes they are usually presented under headphones. Speech audiometry in its broadest sense can provide information concerning hearing for speech, the type and degree of hearing impairment and the reliability of pure-tone thresholds. Speech tests can provide a useful tool for demonstrating the effectiveness of an appropriately selected hearing aid to the client. Their value in the selection or modification of a hearing aid system is much less reliable. Speech test scores are very variable and results are not sufficiently precise to correspond to changes in hearing aid performance unless these are extreme. In current practice, tests are often used in situations that render them insensitive and unreliable. Where a test is presented using live voice, for example, scores may vary due to uncontrolled changes in voice level. It is therefore important to use ‘standardized’ test conditions but, even under the most consistent conditions, small variations in speech scores do not indicate significant differences between hearing aid systems. If the limitations are recognized, speech audiometry can serve a useful purpose.

11.4.2 Speech test materials An ideal speech test would: • be exactly repeatable; • be phonemically balanced; • contain words in common usage.

Evaluation

225

Lists containing words or sentences of equal difficulty are presented. Scores will show some random variation from test to test but using standardized tests under consistent conditions minimizes this. Many tests also reflect the same relative balance of phonemes as found in a random sample of everyday speech. This is commonly known as ‘phonetic balance’ (PB). Whole lists must be used on each occasion to retain equal difficulty and phonemic or ‘phonetic’ balance. Whole words are easy to score but relatively long lists are required to achieve phonetic balance. In the Fry list, for example, Word List 1 consists of: cut sin bite will bone now jam wrong

near keys lid deaf yard pays white heard

raw tin right sack men wish ton good

dip hut ten less face so choice veal

there more thick

One entire list must be given at each intensity level in each situation (for instance without and with a hearing aid). This may create a rather long and tiring test. An alternative in widespread use is the presentation of the isophonemic lists of Arthur Boothroyd (1968), commonly known as the AB lists. Each list consists of only 10 words but each word is of consonant– vowel–consonant (CVC) composition. True phonetic balance is not possible within 10 words but the same 30 common phonemes are repeated within each list in different combinations (isophonemic). Each of the separate sounds or phonemes scores one. The nature of the scoring means that guessing should be encouraged, as single correct sounds can appreciably enhance the overall score. A total score of 30 is possible for each list. In each case the score is presented as a percentage. Monosyllabic word lists are widely used in the UK. Spondees are less frequently used. These are words of two syllables with equal stress on each syllable, for example, ‘playground’, ‘football’, ‘doorstep’. Spondees are easier to understand but tests therefore tend to be less sensitive. Maximum scores (100%) are on average achieved at levels 20 dB to 30 dB below those required to achieve maximum scores for monosyllabic words. Lists of sentences provide a more realistic task than single words. They are somewhat easier and may therefore be less tiring for the listener but tend to be rather time consuming. Sentence tests are normally scored by key words. The BKB Sentence Lists (Bench, Kowal and Bamford, 1979) each contain 50 key words, for example:

226

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

BKB List 1 The clown had a funny face. The car engine’s running. She cut with her knife. Children like strawberries. The house had nine rooms. They’re buying some bread. The green tomatoes are small. He played with his train. The postman shut the gate. They’re looking at the clock. The bag bumps on the ground. The boy did a handstand. A cat sits on the bed. The lorry carried fruit. The rain came down. The ice cream was pink. The AB Word Lists and the BKB Lists are used with both older children and adults. Tests for use with younger children must be appropriate to their age and stage of development in terms of the vocabulary presented and the response required. An oral response is inappropriate for young children who may not have developed sufficient speech skills for the tester to be certain of the response. The Kendall Toy Test, Figure 11.3, is widely used for children in the two-and-a-half to four year age range. In this test small toys represent the words in each list. Fifteen toys are placed on the table in front of the child, 10 of which represent test items. The other five are distractors. The child has to point to the appropriate toy when he or she hears the instructions ‘Show me the . . .’ The items consist of common vowel and consonant sounds grouped according to the vowel sounds, for example: Test items: house, spoon, fish, duck, cow, shoe, brick, cup, gate, plate. Distractors: mouse, book, string, glove, plane. Picture tests, such as the Manchester Picture Test (Hickson, 1986), see Figure 11.4, are used with slightly older children, from four to six years of age. In this test each word is presented as a multiple-choice item. The child is asked ‘Show me the . . .’ and is required to point to one of four pictures. Each list is designed to test five vowel sounds and five consonant sounds, for example:

Evaluation

227

Figure 11.3. Toys for the Kendall toy test. (Diagram from Maltby and Knight (2000), with permission.)

Figure 11.4. A page from the Manchester picture test. (Hickson, 1986.)

Test sound: vowel oo. Pictures presented: spoon, sun, cup, gun. Response required: spoon.

228

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Where a person is very severely or profoundly deaf, it may not be possible to use the usual speech test materials. Very low or zero scores on traditional materials do not usually mean that nothing useful can be heard of the speech signal. Even minimal hearing can be useful when it is combined with lip-reading. Different tests are therefore used for this group. These tests are often ‘distinctive feature’ tests that set out to measure the ability to perceive certain aspects of speech perception that are important in distinguishing one word from another, for example variations in the: • • • • • •

frequency of the first formant; vowel length; number of syllables; voicing; frequency of the second formant; finer aspects of discrimination (for example, manner and place of articulation) may also be explored with persons with residual hearing in the higher frequency region.

Figure 11.5. An example of one of the word pairs presented in the Maltby Speech Perception Test, which is a distinctive feature test.

Evaluation

229

Distinctive feature tests, for example the Maltby Speech Perception Test (Maltby, 2000) can be used with adults and with children. This test was developed for severely and profoundly deaf people from the age of five to adulthood. It is divided into two parts. The first part of the test is concerned with the detection of sound, whereas the second part is concerned with discrimination. The test requires the person to respond to sounds in the first part of the test and, in the second part, to choose between pairs of pairs of words (Figure 11.5), for example: Length and intensity: hat/heart, ship/sheep Second formant: tea/two, log/leg Voicing: pear/bear, van/fan The test indicates which speech features can be perceived and discriminated between using audition alone. The results can be presented as a profile to highlight areas of strength and weakness.

11.4.3 The speech test procedure Word lists should be recorded and played through a calibrated system to provide accurate and reliable results. Live voice is prone to great variability in intensity even when it is monitored with a sound level meter, but because of the simplicity of live voice presentation it is widely used for the presentation of word lists in hearing aid evaluation. This should be viewed as informal speech testing; the term ‘speech audiometry’ should be reserved for tests presented under measurable and reproducible conditions. Speech audiometry generally makes use of an audiometer to pass the signal to the patient through headphones or via an amplifier and loudspeaker. BS EN 60645-2 specifies the requirements for speech audiometers. An audiometer for speech tests will have the facility to accept the signal from a microphone or tape recorder and should also be able to provide masking for speech using white noise or speech spectrum noise, which contains more low frequency noise. The British Standards provide for speech spectrum noise to fall by 12 dB per octave between 1 kHz and 6 kHz. Masking with both kinds of noise is equally effective but speech spectrum noise is less fatiguing because it excludes unnecessary highfrequency energy. Masking will be required in speech audiometry if results are required for each ear separately, where the pure tone audiogram suggests that cross-hearing may occur. Pre-recorded speech tests are usually prefaced with a 20 dBSPL 1 kHz calibration tone of at least 1 minute in length. This is used to check that the input level to the audiometer is the same every time it is used and that

230

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

the dial settings are therefore consistent. The calibration tone should measure 20 dBSPL when the hearing level control on the audiometer is set to zero or the level indicator is set to its reference point. Speech audiometry should be carried out in quiet conditions to minimize the masking effects of background noise. This is particularly important for free-field tests. The background noise should be measured and should not be such as to interfere with a signal-to-noise ratio of 45 dB. A standard speech audiogram cannot be produced because differences in test materials and conditions may affect results. Each speech setup must therefore provide its own normal response curve to which patients’ responses will be compared. This can be achieved by testing a group, usually of 10, normally hearing adults under exactly the same test conditions as are to be used with all patients. A number of word lists must be given at different presentation levels and the results at each presentation level are averaged to produce a normal response curve. Patients should be given careful instructions. These should include that they will hear someone speaking single words (or sentences) and after each word they should repeat any parts of the word they heard.

11.4.4 Speech tests for diagnostic purposes The first word list should be presented at a comfortable level and used for practice and to adjust the starting point if the patient is not scoring well. The intensity level is increased or decreased in 10 dB or 20 dB steps, with one full list given at each level, and the scores are plotted on a speech audiogram. Where monosyllabic word lists are used in speech audiometry, halfpeak level (HPL) is proposed as a measure that agrees well with the pure tone audiogram. Half-peak level is the intensity (in dial units) at which the patient obtains half of his or her maximum score, whatever that maximum may be. Thus, if a patient has a maximum score of 100, the HPL will be 50 but if the maximum score is only 60, the HPL will be 30. The difference between the normal HPL and the patient’s HPL in decibels is known as the ‘half peak level elevation’ (HPLE) (Figure 11.6). The HPLE elevation should agree, within 10 dB, with the pure tone audiogram averaged over 500 Hz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz. Where the HPLE does not agree, a greater shift may indicate an inaccurate audiogram, or, rarely, point towards a retrocochlear disorder. Where the shift is less than predicted, this is likely to indicate a non-organic disorder. The shape of the speech curve for a typical conductive loss will follow the shape of the normal reference curve but will be displaced or shifted

Evaluation

231

Figure 11.6. A speech audiogram showing half-peak level elevation and its relation to the pure-tone audiogram.

along the audiogram. The patient will reach a score of 100% but at an intensity level that is elevated in comparison with the normal. In the case of a typical sensorineural loss the discrimination curve is again shifted but may never reach a 100% score. The patient achieves his or her maximum score at some lower percentage score and when the intensity is increased beyond this point, the score reduces, shown by a ‘roll over’ on the audiogram. Speech audiometry is a useful tool in the assessment of how an individual’s hearing for speech varies with intensity, both with and without a hearing aid. A simplified procedure may be used to provide a simple comparison of hearing aid benefit, where the recorded material is delivered at a constant

232

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

sound level, usually 60 dB(A) or 70 dB(A), 1 m from the loudspeaker. At least one word list is presented at this level for each of the aids or situations to be compared. A comparison of unaided and aided discrimination scores is likely to show an improvement (except with a very mild hearing loss) even with a poorly selected hearing aid. Nevertheless, the comparison can be useful to demonstrate to a new client that it will be beneficial to wear a hearing aid.

11.5 SUBJECTIVE EVALUATION A hearing aid system will only be of benefit if it is worn. Client acceptability must therefore be taken into account in any evaluation. A number of methods of obtaining the client’s subjective opinion exists, with regard to both the sound quality of the aid and its functional benefit. In many cases, the information is obtained through interview or discussion with the client, informally structured to: • provide information regarding the sound quality; • provide information about the usefulness of the aid; • identify situations that remain problematic. The information obtained may lead to adjustment of the system or to further rehabilitation. Questions regarding sound quality can be tailored to provide information that will indicate the need for certain modifications, for example: • Is the aid loud enough? Adjustment of gain. • Is the aid clear enough? Adjustment of bass cut (high-pass filter) . • Is the sound tinny or harsh? Adjustment of treble cut (low-pass filter). Quality judgements are not particularly useful for choosing between hearing aids as there is a marked tendency for clients to select the second of two aids, that is to select merely by order rather than due to any particular attributes of the aid itself (Green, Day and Bamford, 1989). Quality judgements are useful in achieving hearing aid satisfaction and can be helpful in making decisions with regard to aid modifications. In some cases, a measurement scale may be used. The client is asked to listen to a passage of running speech and to judge sound quality between two examples, on a scale of one to five, for instance. This is completed for a number of paired attributes, such as loud/soft, clear/hazy, booming/shrill, pleasant/unpleasant. Alternatively, the client may be asked questions

Evaluation

233

tailored to indicate the need for modifications or to rate the appropriateness of statements, as in the Abbreviated Profile of Hearing Aid Benefit (APHAB) questionnaire (Cox and Alexander, 1995), for example: ‘Unexpected sounds, like an alarm or smoke detector are uncomfortable. (Always/almost always/generally/half the time/occasionally/seldom/ never.)’

There is a tendency for clients to dislike high frequency emphasis at first fitting, even when this can be shown to improve their speech discrimination. With long-term experience of using hearing aids, many clients will come to accept greater high frequency emphasis. Evaluation after an extended period of rehabilitation will allow maximum advantage to be taken of the client’s gradual acclimatization to hearing aid use. A questionnaire may also form part of an evaluation after a period of rehabilitation and should be designed to indicate particular problem areas as well as the overall level of satisfaction. A disability questionnaire can be given before, and some time after, hearing aid fitting to indicate the difficulties the client originally had and to what extent the aid has reduced the client’s problems. Questions are presented in a way that allows improvements to be readily noted, for example Lutman, Brown and Coles (1987): Can you follow the television news when the volume is turned up only enough to suit other people? Easily With some difficulty With great difficulty Not at all

If a simple individual questionnaire, or even a checklist, is to be designed to identify particular difficulties it may be useful to indicate: • • • • • • • • •

how long the aid is worn each day; the ease of insertion, manipulation and removal; comfort; feedback problems; satisfaction with the appearance; perceived sound quality; difficulties encountered in (a) the home; (b) at work; (c) socially; satisfaction with the hearing aid; satisfaction with the service.

234

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

11.6 SUMMARY Evaluation is an important part of the overall process of hearing aid fitting. Methods in common use include: • insertion gain; • functional gain; • speech audiometry; • subjective evaluation. Methods of evaluation should be chosen to provide information about benefit in terms of: • • • •

adequacy of prescribed characteristics; comfort; reduction of handicap; sound quality.

The results should highlight any problem areas and lead to modifications and further rehabilitation where appropriate.

FURTHER READING Hull RH (1997) Aural Rehabilitation. 3 edn. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group. Maltby MT, Knight P (2000) Audiology. An introduction for teachers and other professionals. London: David Fulton. Martin, M. (ed.) (1997) Speech Audiometry. 2 edn. London: Whurr. Pollack MC (1988) Amplification for the Hearing Impaired. 3 edn. Orlando: Grune & Stratton. Tye-Murray N (1998) Foundations of Aural Rehabilitation. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group.

Chapter 12 Client management and rehabilitation 12.1 THE REHABILITATION PROCESS 12.1.1 Hearing impairment in the population The most common cause of acquired hearing loss in adulthood is the ageing process (presbyacusis). About 8% of the adult population have a hearing loss of over 35 dBHL in the better ear (Haggard, Gatehouse and Davies, 1981). Approximately one-third of the population over 65 years old has some sort of hearing problem and approximately half of the population over 80 years old has a severe hearing problem. Hearing losses of this type develop gradually over a period of years, with high frequency sounds reducing first. This means that speech can still be heard but it loses its clarity. A binaural hearing loss of as little as 15 dBHL, averaged across the frequencies 500 Hz to 2 kHz, is likely to be significantly disabling for everyday speech (Lutman, Brown and Coles, 1987). An affected individual typically accuses others of mumbling or speaking quietly and this leads to increased tensions within the family. Although hearing loss may be suspected, this is not usually a suggestion that is readily accepted by the hearing-impaired person, who often prefers to cope with the restriction of personal and social life rather than admit to deafness. In many cases there may be a gap of as much as 15 years or more between noticing the problem and taking any action to deal with it.

12.1.2 Hearing aids and aural rehabilitation Hearing loss is an underestimated impairment that may lead to many secondary problems in addition to primary communication difficulties. Management of the hearing-impaired client is extremely difficult and, unless the client accepts the problem, rejection of any form of hearing aid is very likely. Even when the need for amplification is understood, 235

236

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

deafness remains an unacceptable condition and most people would prefer to use an inconspicuous hearing aid. High expectations of the benefit to be derived from hearing aids add to the difficulties, especially as most adults do not realize that hearing loss is not ‘cured’ by amplification. Hearing aids alone are not sufficient to overcome the consequences of the loss. Audiological rehabilitation involving a co-ordinated programme of evaluation and remedy is therefore appropriate. Aural rehabilitation begins with an evaluation of the hearing loss and its effect on the client’s lifestyle. At this stage it is decided if remediation is necessary and, if it is, whether hearing aids should be considered. In some cases assistive devices may be sufficient to fulfil the client’s needs. If hearing aids are to be considered, and following referral to a medical practitioner if indicated (section 7.1), the acoustical characteristics can be defined, together with any special rehabilitation measures required. It is usually helpful to include a member or members of the client’s family in the process, as not only can they support the hearing-impaired person far better if they understand, but also concerns are more likely to be aired at an early stage. Rehabilitation is not really an area on its own but is interwoven into hearing aid fitting and evaluation. The success of the whole process is reliant on the sum of the individual parts. An error in any part may adversely affect the whole – for example, incorrect uncomfortable loudness levels (ULLs) could lead to the fitting of a hearing aid that is too loud. The aid might appear suitable in the quiet of the fitting situation but in the noise of the outside world it could prove unbearable. The client could turn it down but then would not hear adequately, leading to rejection of the aid. Another example could be where the hearing aid audiologist fails to consider the client’s dexterity, leading to the selection of an aid that the client is unable to insert or operate. The aid type suggested must be acceptable to the client so that he or she is both able and willing to wear it and, if it is a commercial aid, it must be affordable. These and many other factors interact in the audiological rehabilitation process.

12.1.3 Attitudes to hearing impairment and the remediation process The client’s attitude towards hearing impairment and amplification is crucial to the rehabilitative process and four attitude types have been outlined (Goldstein and Stevens, 198l): • Type I – the patient has a very positive attitude towards hearing aids and aural rehabilitation.

Client management and rehabilitation

237

• Type II – is an essentially positive attitude but with some complicating factors present. These might, for example, include a previously unfavourable hearing aid fitting experience or a difficult-to-fit hearing loss. • Type III – is an essentially negative attitude but with an element of cooperative intent. • Type IV – consists of a small group that rejects hearing aids completely. Unfortunately, rehabilitation is rarely successful with this group. A simple problem-solving model of the rehabilitation process is presented in Figure 12.1. The process begins with a definition of the problem. At this stage the hearing aid audiologist collects information regarding the client’s hearing loss, his or her areas of difficulty, his or her attitude and related aspects. Informal discussion, a case history and audiological assessment are the most widely used tools for defining the problem. Handicap questionnaires and speech audiometry may add further depth to the investigations.

Figure 12.1. A problem-solving model of the rehabilitation process.

238

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The focus of any rehabilitation process should be on the needs of the individual and aural rehabilitation can be defined as helping an individual with a specific set of problems arising from an auditory disorder. Rehabilitation can therefore be considered as a process that is designed to minimize disability due to hearing loss or tinnitus (and to some extent balance) in order to prevent the condition from handicapping the client. The hearing problem can be viewed as a continuum in which disability and handicap represent different stages. Initially, damage to the auditory system leads to impairment or hearing loss. This creates a disability but it is the degree to which this disability affects a person’s quality of life and well-being that imposes the handicap. Thus, for example, a moderate hearing loss might have only a slight handicapping effect on an elderly client living alone, seeing few visitors and whose only real problem seems to be hearing the television. An identical degree of hearing loss in a young married man could cause a considerable handicap. The disability of the hearing impairment is likely to affect every aspect of his lifestyle and employment because of its impact on communication. Activities that were previously enjoyable become difficult and he is likely to experience embarrassment, irritation, frustration, anger and depression. He will almost certainly perceive a change in his status, at least in his own eyes, and will suffer a loss of self-esteem. The need to wear a hearing aid is generally regarded as related to the ageing process and society makes few allowances for hearing impairment. Unlike wearing spectacles, where the individual may be considered intelligent and studious, hearing aids carry a stigma. Hearing aids are an external sign of deafness, which many view as being accompanied by stupidity because of the communication problem it creates. Spectacles may result in perfect vision. A hearing aid rarely produces an immediate return to normal and is much more in parallel with the use of a wheelchair. Also, hearing loss produces less sympathy and understanding socially than for example the loss of a limb. Hearing loss is rarely total and the person who hears some things and not others is often described as awkward – ‘he hears when he wants to’. The hearing-impaired person, on the other hand, believes that people are mumbling or not speaking clearly. In background noise and group situations, following a conversation may be impossible. The hearing-impaired person wants to maintain social interaction but restricted involvement in conversations has to be tolerated. Some attempt may be made at finding a way of controlling the social scene or avoiding it (Hallberg and Carlsson, 1991). Often, particularly in the early stages, the hearing-impaired person will prefer to isolate himself socially. The objectives of the first stage in the rehabilitation process, then, are to assess the impairment through audiometry and the nature of the

Client management and rehabilitation

239

handicap through investigation of the client’s home, work and social environment, the activities in which he or she wishes or needs to participate and the difficulties being experienced. Only when the problem has been defined can a realistic approach to remediation be adopted. The remediation process involves more than just hearing aid fitting. It involves setting the scene to facilitate the best possible use of amplification. There are some individuals for whom hearing aids may not be appropriate and sometimes assistive devices, such as a television amplifier, may provide a successful answer to a specific need. Where hearing aids are appropriate, counselling is often required to help the person come to terms with his or her loss and accept realistically the impairment and ensuing handicap. If the client maintains a type III attitude, with perhaps only a grudging acceptance of a problem, much counselling may be needed to achieve acceptance. Even where clients maintain positive type I attitudes, counselling is required to help them understand the potential benefits and limitations of amplification. The client needs to understand that hearing aids will not provide perfect hearing and, while they can be of great benefit, it will take time to relearn to associate sounds with meanings. A positive attitude is undoubtedly helpful but unrealistic expectations will lead to disappointment and the possible rejection of any amplification system. Most adults are interested to know about their hearing loss and to understand the difficulties they experience. At an early stage the type and degree of loss and the audiogram can be explained (Figure 12.2). Understanding may help to increase acceptance.

Figure 12.2. Audiometric information that can be readily explained to the client.

240

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

12.1.4 Stages of grief and family involvement If the hearing loss is of sudden onset the impact is much greater than a loss that has developed slowly and insidiously over many years. The patient has not had time to compensate for the loss or to come to terms with it. The hearing-impaired person (or the parent of the hearing-impaired child) needs time and empathetic counselling to move through stages of grief and mourning at their loss before they are ready to understand or accept. Such stages can be identified as follows: Stage I – numbness It is usually the ENT surgeon or otolaryngologist who is involved at this point to provide direct advice on handling the impairment. Unfortunately, the client is often unable to absorb much of the information given at this stage. Stage II – denial The client refuses to accept the diagnosis and searches for a second opinion or a miracle cure. The client is not yet ready for amplification and if hearing aids are prescribed they are unlikely to be used: ‘Initial strategies involve denying disability, pretending to hear and avoidance of situations in which the disability will be exposed. The deafened person looks to medicine for a cure to problems, which are seen as stemming from faults in the ear. When the cure is not forthcoming, the deafened person experiences a further loss – that of hope’ (Woolley, 1991).

Stage III – despair This is the stage at which the hearing loss is accepted but the problems often appear insurmountable. Positive but realistic counselling of the client and his or her family can help the client to move towards acceptance of the problems and a desire to try to overcome them. Stage IV – action The client is ready to accept amplification. Counselling and training now interlink to facilitate the client’s adjustment to the impairment and to the use of amplification. Whatever the degree of loss and the pattern of its onset, involvement of the family or a ‘significant other’ is important as their help and support can be of immense value. A ‘significant other’ is anyone who is in close and frequent contact with the client and will often be the spouse or a son or daughter. Their presence throughout the rehabilitation process, at the assessment, hearing aid fitting and aftercare, can help them to understand

Client management and rehabilitation

241

the nature of the problem. Their expectations also have to be realistic and they need to realize that it takes time and effort to overcome the handicap of deafness. They too are affected by the loss and they need to understand the problems of poor speech discrimination, difficulty in noise, recruitment and so on if they are to be able to provide realistic support and encouragement to the hearing-impaired person. They can also ensure that practical instructions have been understood and, if necessary, can help in inserting the aid and in its care.

12.2 PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF REHABILITATION 12.2.1 Practical instruction First-time hearing aid users will require training in effective hearing aid use, which can be considered as ‘informational counselling’. Such counselling is also required to a lesser extent when a client changes from one hearing aid system to another, or from monaural use to binaural.

12.2.2 Insertion and removal of the aid Difficulty in inserting the earmould or hearing aid is the most common reason for lack of use. It is an activity that has to be learned through practice and it is essential to ensure that the client or his or her carer is able to insert and remove the aid at the hearing aid fitting stage, while the hearing aid audiologist is on hand to provide guidance. It is a common fault for clients to leave the top part of the helix of the earmould outside the fold of the pinna. It may be helpful for the ‘significant other’ to be shown how the aid should appear when properly inserted (Figure 12.3).

Figure 12.3. The appearance of an earmould when correctly inserted. (Photograph courtesy of PC Werth Ltd.)

242

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Where there is some difficulty in manual ability, half shell moulds may provide a useful option as these are easier to insert and a small handle can be fitted to help in removal. Very small hearing aids with very small controls and tiny batteries are only appropriate if the client can handle them satisfactorily – no matter how good the amplification or how much the client wants a small aid.

12.2.3 Operating the aid New users need precise simple instruction on operating and care of the hearing aid. They must be sure of the size and type of battery to use. They need to be aware that removal of the tab from a zinc air battery will cause it to deteriorate. It is common for a user to try several new batteries, one after the other, if the hearing aid does not work. The use of a battery cell tester to ensure the adequacy of the battery current can avoid this problem because the client can then be certain whether it is the battery at fault. Insertion of the battery can be difficult with poor eyesight or failing dexterity. It is sensible to change batteries over a towel (on the table or on the knees) as it is much easier to retrieve a small battery in this way. The client needs to realize that the battery has a positive flat side and a negative rounded side. The battery must be in the drawer the correct way around, with the positive side matching the positive sign shown on the aid. If it is placed back to front the battery drawer will not close easily and it should never be forced shut. Clients also need information about how to dispose of old batteries safely, where to obtain new supplies and how often they will need to replace them. The aid should be turned off when not in use to reduce battery consumption and it is sometimes helpful to suggest that the battery compartment be opened at night to ensure there is no unnecessary drain. Most clients will want to know how long a battery should last and a reasonable indication of battery life should be possible, taking account of the hearing aid manufacturer’s information and the client’s probable usage. Further information on calculating battery life will be found in section 8.6.2. When the battery has run out, it should never be thrown in the fire or left where pets or children may swallow it. Swallowed batteries are dangerous and medical advice should be obtained without delay. New users may be concerned about the volume at which to set their new aids. Digital hearing aids can adjust the volume automatically but new users of analogue hearing aids often tend to set them too high or too low. These clients need to understand that the volume should be adjusted in different situations but, as a starting point, it is often helpful to encourage clients to rotate the volume control until the aid is a little too loud and then reduce it slightly.

Client management and rehabilitation

243

Binaural hearing aids can be adjusted in the same manner as monaural aids, but both aids will then need to be turned down slightly and adjusted as necessary to ensure that sound is heard centrally. If the loss is very asymmetrical or the client has become used to listening monaurally over a long period of time, it may be better not to attempt to ‘balance’ the ears in this way, at least initially. If the hearing aid includes other client-operated controls, such as telecoil, tone controls or an on-off switch, these must be demonstrated and their use practised at the initial fitting stage. A common problem occurs where a client switches to the ‘T’ position for receiving from a loop but forgets to return the aid to the normal ‘M’ position afterwards and therefore thinks the aid is faulty. Practice in use can be arranged at the fitting stage by attaching a telecoil adaptive coupler to the telephone and using the speaking clock or similar service. Induction loops are frequently installed in churches and other public places. Most modern domestic telephones do not have the telecoil facility, however a suitably designed telephone or a special adaptive coupler can easily be obtained. A further aspect of hearing aid operation that the client should understand is when and why feedback may occur. A correctly fitted hearing aid should not produce feedback in normal usage but feedback is likely if the aid is not inserted correctly, if the microphone is covered with a hat or hand, or if the ear is blocked with wax. Clients can be helped to understand feedback by explaining that it occurs when amplified sound escapes from the ear canal and re-enters the microphone of the hearing aid such that it is reamplified and heard as a high-pitched whistle. If the aid has to be turned down below the required volume to prevent feedback, the hearing aid audiologist must find and rectify the cause, perhaps by reducing the vent size or making a new tighter fitting earmould. Feedback can be used to advantage in checking the battery. If the aid is held in a cupped hand, with the volume fully on, and the aid does not whistle the battery can usually be assumed to be dead.

12.2.4 Care of the aid Hearing aids are small, expensive items and new users need to be informed how to care for their aids. They may not realize that the aid should not come into contact with water, make-up, hair spray, and perfume. Batteries should be removed if aids are not used for a long period and aids should be kept away from extreme temperatures. An earmould can be separated from the hearing aid and washed in warm water, although care should be taken to ensure no moisture remains in the

244

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

tubing before reconnection to the aid. An air blower or ‘puffer’ can be used to remove moisture (including condensation after use) from the tubing. In-the-ear hearing aids must not be washed. Cleaning involves wiping them periodically with a dry tissue or cloth. Alcohol spray or wipes can also be used to wipe the outside shell of the aid. The sound outlet and vent, if applicable, must be checked for wax when the aid is removed each night. Wax can be removed carefully using a special wax tool or small cleaning brush, with the receiver outlet over a tissue to collect the debris as it falls out. Nothing should be inserted down the sound outlet further than about 5 mm as damage to the receiver could result. A small metal or plastic wax trap may be fitted by the manufacturer to prevent any wax particles finding their way into the receiver. This does not reduce the need for the client to clean the opening. If the trap becomes blocked the hearing aid audiologist will usually need to clean it for the client. Cream or Vaseline, which some clients use to ease insertion of the aid, can also block and damage the aid unless used sparingly and with care. Dirt in the receiver and in the microphone are common causes of hearing aid damage. The aid should therefore be handled with clean, dry hands and should be removed during potentially damaging situations, such as washing or shaving. For many first-time users there seems to be a great deal of information to assimilate and written instructions for operation and care should also be provided. Clients should be encouraged to read these in the first few days.

12.2.5 Training in hearing and first use of the aid Most new users need to become acclimatized to hearing aid use over a period of time. They are often advised to build up their use gradually from an hour or two in quiet surroundings. They may be advised not to try to ‘test’ the aid but to restrict use at first to reasonably easy situations, such as conversation with single members of the family or listening to news programmes on the television. The news is helpful because the newsreader faces the audience and provides clear speech, without background noise or a complex plot to follow. It is usually inadvisable for the aids, particularly linear hearing aids, to be worn too soon in noisy situations and it is therefore not sensible for the client to wear the hearing aid in the street immediately after fitting. Wind and traffic noise are particularly disconcerting. The approach should, however, be flexible and individual: not every client needs to build up use and this is often particularly true of younger clients. A client should not be prevented from wearing the aid for as long as he or she likes, provided that the sound is

Client management and rehabilitation

245

not too loud and that the aid is taken off if it is uncomfortable or the client becomes tired. In the early stages of hearing aid use, or of change to a different system, the client may be unable to tolerate the prescribed pattern of amplification. A seemingly appropriate high frequency emphasis may appear to sound ‘tinny’ or the aid may seem too loud. It may be necessary to provide a high frequency cut or to reduce the output through peak clipping or AGC. When the client becomes acclimatized to hearing aid use their tolerance will often increase and it is usually possible to alter the aid’s controls gradually to maximize the client’s benefit from the amplification system. After-care is an important part of the rehabilitation process. The client must be able to contact the hearing aid audiologist if problems or queries arise. A few clients do not need further help but most appreciate subsequent information and attention, which may ease acceptance of the aid. Evaluation, whether formal or informal, should be built into the rehabilitation programme and lead on to adjustments to the hearing aids, further rehabilitation and perhaps the addition of other ‘assistive’ devices to help overcome specific problems. When the rehabilitation period is satisfactorily completed, contact with the client is usually maintained through servicing tasks, such as retubing or cleaning battery contacts and providing regular hearing checks. Often the client will be interested in new products and the hearing aid audiologist should be ready to provide factual information about assistive devices and new types of hearing aids.

12.2.6 Tactics Many of the difficulties caused by hearing loss can be minimized by the use of some simple hearing ‘tactics’. Over time, the hearing-impaired person may develop his or her own set of tactics, but the hearing aid audiologist may help ease the early stages with a few practical suggestions, which might include the following: 1. Reduce background noise – turn off the radio or other competing noise, hold a conversation in the lounge rather than the hall, use a tablecloth to reduce the clatter of plates, and so on. The hearing aid volume may also be turned down a little in noisy situations. 2. Ensure adequate lighting – the room should be well lit and the lights should fall on the speaker’s face not in the client’s eyes. 3. Positioning – reduction of the distance between listener and speaker will improve hearing; a distance of about 1 metre is ideal for lip-reading and is not uncomfortably close. 4. Encouraging others – it is helpful if the attention of the hearingimpaired person is attracted, perhaps by calling their name and then

246

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

pausing, before a conversation is started. The speaker should be encouraged to face the client and speak clearly, to make the subject of the conversation known and to rephrase anything not fully understood. Shouting and speaking very slowly with exaggerated lip movements do not help but slowing speech slightly, using clear speech and a loud voice will help. Good communication demands an effort from both the listener and the speaker. Even people with a very mild hearing loss can benefit from the introduction of hearing tactics. With a more severe loss, there may be an increased reliance not only on tactics but also on speech reading (see section 12.5.2).

12.3 ASSISTIVE DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED 12.3.1 Auxiliary aids There are many devices to help the hearing impaired either in addition to, or in place of, hearing aids. Such devices are known as ‘environmental aids’, ‘assistive devices’ or ‘auxiliary aids’ and they are designed to assist with specific everyday problems, such as listening to the television or on the telephone. Many of these use an induction loop or an infra-red system. For the more severely deaf, visual or vibrating indicators are often used, particularly for alarm sounds and for the doorbell and telephone. Details of current assistive devices can be obtained from the RNID (Royal National Institute for Deaf People) or from the various manufacturers. Many of the special systems available may be obtained on free loan through the local social services department, although availability depends on local finances and policies; alternatively clients may purchase devices privately. Where special systems are required to aid someone in employment, it may be possible to obtain these through the local job centre.

12.3.2 The induction loop system An induction loop system is designed to enable a sound signal to be transmitted directly to the listener. This overcomes problems created by background noise, reverberation and increasing distance from the sound source. The loop utilizes the principle of electromagnetic induction. (a) Electromagnetic induction A current flowing in a wire creates a magnetic field around it. The loop system involves a cable fitted around the required area and attached to an

Client management and rehabilitation

247

amplifier. The sound source is fed into the amplifier through a microphone or by a direct connection from the television or other device. When a suitable pick-up receiver enters the magnetic field, the sound signals are transmitted to it by a fluctuating magnetic signal from the loop cable. Most behind-the-ear and some in-the-ear hearing aids are fitted with this facility, which is known as the ‘T’ switch. When the wearer switches to ‘T’, only signals from the loop system may be heard. If the wearer also wishes to hear sounds from the environment, to hear friends talking for instance, the aid must be fitted with a switch that allows the microphone to remain operative; this is known as an ‘MT’ switch. Public telephone boxes facilitate use of the ‘T’ switch but modern telephones in the home do not produce an adequate magnetic field for the operation of the induction loop unless they are specifically designed for this. (b) Loop design The installation of a domestic loop system is a relatively simple matter. For a loop system to operate successfully in a public place and to meet all the necessary requirements (IEC 60118-4), specialized design and installation are essential. The major disadvantages of the loop system are: • Overspill interference will result where two loop systems are used in adjacent rooms. • The frequency response on ‘T’ may be different to the normal reception on ‘M’. In particular the low frequency response may be less good. • Weak or dead spots can arise within the looped area. • There may be electrical interference that generates internal noise in the hearing aid, near fluorescent lights for example. • Orientation of the head may cause variation in the gain received of as much as 15 dB (Tucker and Nolan, 1984).

12.4 MANAGEMENT PRACTICES 12.4.1 The role of the hearing aid audiologist Hearing aid audiologists usually undertake the total aural rehabilitation of clients who have chosen to obtain a hearing aid through a private route. Their primary responsibility is therefore to ensure that hearing-impaired clients obtain maximum benefit from their hearing aid system. In order to achieve this, they will determine:

248

• • • •

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

the need for medical referral; the hearing loss; the client’s difficulties and feelings in relation to the hearing problem; the need for a hearing aid.

The hearing aid audiologist should guide and support clients in their search for solutions to their hearing problems. This will usually, but not always, involve the selection and adjustment of a hearing aid system together with the provision of rehabilitation counselling and after-care service to ensure that the system provides maximum benefit to the client.

12.4.2 The Hearing Aid Council Code of Practice The Hearing Aid Council Act of 1968 provides for ‘the establishment of a Hearing Aid Council, to register persons engaged in the supply of hearing aids, to advise on the training of persons engaged in such business, and to regulate trade practices’. The Act relates to hearing aid dispensers and employers of dispensers. The Hearing Aid Council (Amendment) Act of 1989 introduced changes to the composition of the council and extended its disciplinary powers. On a day-to-day basis the Hearing Aid Council (HAC) is administered by a Registrar. However, the council itself consists of 12 members, four to represent the interests of the hearing-impaired consumer, four with specialized medical or audiological technical knowledge and four to represent the interests of the private hearing aid dispenser. The council members are appointed by the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI) and each serves a three-year term, although this may be followed by one further term of three years. The full council meets four times a year and there are additional meetings of its standing committees – the Examining Committee, Complaints Investigating Committee and Disciplinary Committee. The main functions of the Hearing Aid Council are the establishment and maintenance of standards of competence and the regulation of trade practices. These are achieved through implementation of the HAC’s Code of Practice and the complaints and disciplinary procedures. Included in the Code of Practice (1999) are 30 numbered clauses that regulate all aspects of dispensing practice. The clauses apply to all individuals who conduct or seek to conduct oral negotiations with a view to effecting the supply (whether by him or another) of a hearing aid for the use of a person with impaired hearing. The Code also regulates employers and trainees. All dispensers must therefore be conversant with the full current Code of Practice. The following provides a summary of the main provisions in relation to dispensers.

Client management and rehabilitation

249

(a) Self-representation Hearing aid dispensers may not describe themselves as consultants or specialists or audiologists unless immediately preceded by the words ‘hearing aid’, neither may they designate their premises as a clinic or institute, and specified wording must be used when indicating that they are registered under the Hearing Aid Council Act. This wording includes: • • • •

registered hearing aid dispenser(s); RHAD (following the registered name); registered under the Hearing Aid Council Act 1968; all hearing aid dispensers are required to be registered with the Hearing Aid Council.

(b) Medical referral Hearing aid dispensers who are not medically qualified must not represent themselves as such or practise any medical or surgical treatment for deafness. Dispensers must advise clients to seek medical advice (if they have not already done so) if they report or if the dispenser finds any of the following (see also section 7.1): • obstruction of the ear canal, preventing proper examination and/or impression-taking; • abnormal appearance of the eardrum or outer ear; • earache; • discharge from the ear; • conductive hearing loss of 25 dB or more at two or more frequencies in the range 500 Hz–2 kHz; • unilateral or asymmetrical sensorineural hearing loss of 25 dB or more at two or more frequencies in the range 500 Hz–4 kHz; • hearing loss of sudden onset; • hearing loss that has suddenly worsened; • fluctuating hearing loss (other than that due to head colds); • hearing loss associated with noise exposure; • tinnitus; • vertigo. A record of the condition(s) found must be kept and a copy may be sent to the client’s GP or appropriate medical specialist if the client agrees.

250

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(c) Facilities At every consultation, there must be available: • an annually calibrated pure tone audiometer with facilities for air and bone conduction with masking (the calibration certificate must be retained for five years and produced if required by the Hearing Aid Council); • an otoscope and a supply of clean specula; • aural impression material and equipment with appropriate cleaning facilities. Appropriate air and bone conduction audiometry must be carried out before a hearing aid is supplied. All audiograms must include sufficient details to identify the specific audiometer used. An audiogram taken within the previous two months by or under supervision of a suitably qualified person may be taken into consideration. (d) Home visiting, exhibitions and surveys Home visiting is strictly regulated and no client may be visited at his or her home unless the visit has been requested or agreed to and certain requirements met. In brief these are: • the visit is for a given date, which must be within three months; • the details of the visit should be sent to the client as a written notice (where this is not done, a record must be kept of why it was not practical or appropriate to do so – this record is to be made available to the HAC on request); • if a visit results from a telephone approach to a client, a written notice must be sent together with a reply-paid card providing the opportunity to decline or alter the appointment and the appointment must be at least 10 days after despatch of the notice by first class post; • if a visit results from a written approach to a client, the dispenser may only visit if the client has agreed in writing to a visit on the given date; • no charge may be made for a visit or test unless the client has agreed to it before the date of the visit and a written notice including the charge must have been sent. Where exhibitions are undertaken away from the permanent place of business, there must be adequate provision for after-care service and the full name and registered head office address must be prominently displayed.

Client management and rehabilitation

251

Dispensers may not, directly or indirectly, undertake survey enquiries of members of the public regarding deafness or the sale of hearing aids with a view to securing business. (e) Information for clients At all times dispensers should maintain a high standard of ethical conduct and provide the best possible advice including, where appropriate, that a hearing aid may not necessarily be of benefit. Written information must be given as outlined in the current Code of Practice before a client has entered into any commitment or been supplied with a hearing aid. This information must include: • • • • • • • • •

make and model of the aid to be supplied; financial details; terms of any trial offered; conditions for cancellation and refund; name and address and telephone number of the dispenser (and of the firm if different); terms of any guarantee; an undertaking to arrange a further consultation at no charge within six weeks; a statement that the client’s rights are not affected; a statement that ‘All hearing aid dispensers are required to be registered with the Hearing Aid Council and a copy of the Council’s Code of Practice may be seen on request. The Council’s duties include ensuring adequate standards in dispensers’ conduct and competence.’ The address of the Hearing Aid Council must also be given.

Clients must be given the benefit of any guarantee provided by the manufacturer and no guarantee may in any way infringe the client’s statutory rights. (f) After-care Dispensers must make adequate provision for servicing of the hearing aids and ancillary equipment they supply. Any enquiries that are made to dispensers by the Hearing Aid Council registrar in connection with complaints made to the Council must be dealt with reasonable expedition and in a proper manner.

252

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

12.5 IMPROVING COMMUNICATIONS 12.5.1 Communication Even with normal hearing, a person will look at a speaker whenever possible to aid the communication process. In noisy situations there may be some reliance on mouth movements and facial expression to increase understanding. With impaired hearing, there is likely to be some dependence on visual cues. Visual information may be through observing speech cues (speech reading) or through a manual communication system (signing or fingerspelling). The degree of dependence is related to the degree of hearing impairment. Someone who is profoundly deaf is reliant on visual information, whereas with a mild loss hearing remains the primary communication channel.

12.5.2 Speech reading Lip-reading and auditory training Lip-reading can be a useful adjunct to a hearing aid user with any degree of impairment. Even with normal hearing we use lip-reading to some extent in difficult listening situations. Some individuals acquire great skill in lip-reading without conscious effort but, for most, lip-reading is a difficult task. I tried to lip-read. I had not expected to understand much but the reality was a choking experience. I understood very little of what was said and, to add to my discomfort, I had no idea where to look. By the time I swivelled round to locate a speaker he would be half-way through his question; a brief one would be finished before I could start to make any sense of it . . . As shadows flitted across the faces I was trying to lip-read they made a difficult task impossible. (J. Ashley, 1991)

Speech reading involves lip-reading together with observations of other visual cues, such as facial and hand movements. Speech reading is easier if the speaker: • • • • • •

uses appropriate facial expressions and ‘body language’; uses a normal or slightly slowed rate of utterance; uses precise but not exaggerated articulation; is someone with whom the ‘listener’ is familiar; is positioned face to face at a distance of about 1.5 m; does not cover the lips or smoke or chew while talking.

Client management and rehabilitation

253

Many of the sounds of speech (phonemes) cannot be differentiated by the visual pattern alone. Groups of phonemes that look the same are known as a ‘viseme’; for example, the bilabials ‘p’, ‘b’, ‘m’ form a viseme – a speech reader could only conclude that one of that group had been spoken. It is thought that only about 50% of a spoken message can be understood through lip-reading alone. Connected speech provides more information than visible articulatory movements alone (see Chapter 4). When even significantly reduced hearing is coupled with speech reading, the listener’s ability to comprehend may be greatly increased. Lip-reading classes are often provided through the local education authority, where the hearing-impaired can obtain help in developing the skill. It is debatable whether or not lip-reading is a skill that can be taught but classes can certainly provide graded practice. In addition they bring people with similar problems together which provides a degree of group therapy. This may be very helpful in developing understanding, acceptance, encouragement and a more positive and assertive attitude.

12.5.3 Auditory training Individuals who have a more severe or profound hearing loss of longstanding may benefit from auditory training. Sessions are usually individual and may be provided by hearing therapists, speech and language therapists or teachers of the deaf. Sign language and finger spelling are rarely used by adults with acquired deafness because they are of little help in communicating with the hearing community. An auditory training programme provides a series of exercises designed to develop listening skills and to build up the correct associations of sounds and their meanings. Listening is more than just hearing, it requires active participation. The hearing-impaired person needs to regain meaningful hearing and listening by practice and relearning over a period of time. The longer a hearing loss has been sustained, the longer will be the time needed for relearning and auditory training may be very beneficial, particularly in difficult cases.

12.5.4 Speech therapy We all normally use hearing to monitor our own voice; this is known as auditory feedback. Even a slight delay in hearing our own speech will cause us to stutter; this is demonstrated in the delayed feedback test sometimes used with non-organic deafness (section 13.4). With impaired hearing there may also be a deterioration in speech and voice production, resulting in either poor articulation or an alteration of

254

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

intensity level. If the loss is conductive, speech production is usually quieter. This is known as Paracusis Willisi and is because the speaker’s own voice sounds louder by bone conduction, while the voices of others and general background noises are all reduced because of the hearing loss. If the loss is sensorineural, speech is usually louder as hearingimpaired people cannot hear themselves speak (in addition to not being able to hear other people) and often this is accompanied by poor consonant articulation because high frequency hearing is generally most affected. Speech therapy may be provided by a speech and language therapist (SLT) to help maximize communication skills. The effect of congenital hearing loss on speech is more pronounced and the development of language may be delayed (Chapter 14).

12.6 THE ROLE OF OTHER SPECIALISTS 12.6.1 The social worker with deaf people Social workers with deaf people undertake a specialist training in addition to that required for generic social work. This specialist training enables them to communicate and work effectively with deaf people. The role of these specialist social workers involves: • maintaining a voluntary register of deaf (with and without speech) and hard-of-hearing people for the local authority; • providing information to the deaf about statutory rights and entitlement to benefits; • helping the deaf to resolve problems, whether these be physical, mental or financial. Most of the time of social workers for deaf people is taken up with helping the profoundly prelingually deaf, whose main avenue of communication is sign language. This is a small minority group but communication difficulties compound their problems. Social workers may therefore find themselves acting as interpreters in court, hospital, at job interviews and so on, and dealing with discrimination at work or home.

12.6.2 Hearing therapists Hearing therapists are generally hospital-based and work as part of a multidisciplinary team, which will include clinical and social work staff. The hearing therapist is involved in the rehabilitation of patients over the age of 16 with acquired hearing loss; they do not usually work with

Client management and rehabilitation

255

congenitally deaf people. The role is wide but includes the assessment of rehabilitative needs and the provision of programmes to maximize patients’ communication skills. Such programmes may include instruction in the use of hearing aids and assistive devices, counselling, hearing tactics, lip-reading and auditory training. Hearing therapists undertake a one-year full-time course.

12.6.3 Teachers of the deaf Teachers of the deaf are teachers who hold an additional certificate in education of deaf children. This specialist qualification may be gained after the successful completion of a one-year full-time or equivalent part-time course. Teachers of the deaf are involved with children from diagnosis to the end of their education (see Chapter 14). Many are peripatetic, working with a caseload of children based in different schools rather than being based with a class or unit in one single school. Peripatetic teachers of the deaf usually spend part of their time working with the class or subject teachers (or the parents in the case of a pre-school child), rather than necessarily in the direct teaching of the hearing-impaired child.

12.7 SUMMARY The hearing aid audiologist can make a significant contribution to the hearing-impaired client’s quality of life. The provision of hearing aids is only part of an overall rehabilitative process that should answer certain questions: • • • • • • •

Is remediation necessary? Is amplification appropriate? What are the client’s needs? Is medical referral necessary? What aids are needed? What counselling procedures are necessary? Has rehabilitation been successful?

The rehabilitation process may be handled entirely by the hearing aid audiologist, who must comply with the Hearing Aid Council Code of Practice, or it may involve a number of different specialists. The habilitation of children is undertaken by specialist teachers of the deaf, whereas adult rehabilitation may involve a hearing therapist within the health service. Ongoing support is provided for prelingually deaf adults by a social worker for the deaf.

256

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

FURTHER READING Davies H, Fallowfield L (1991) Counselling and Communication in Health Care. Chichester: Wiley & Sons. Egan G (1990) The Skilled Helper, Model Skills and Methods of Effective Helping. 4 edn. Pacific Grove CA: Brooks Cole. Hearing Aid Council (1999 or latest edition) Code of Practice, Examinations and Registration. Milton Keynes: Hearing Aid Council. Hosford-Dunn H, Roeser RJ, Valente M (2000) Audiology Practice Management. New York: Thieme. Hull RH (1997) Aural Rehabilitation. 3 edn. San Diego: Singular. Morgan-Jones R (2000) Hearing Differently. London: Whurr. Pollack M (1988) Amplification for the Hearing Impaired. 3 edn. Orlando FL: Grune & Stratton. Sandlin RE (1990) Handbook of Hearing Aid Amplification. Volume II. Boston: CollegeHill Press. Summers I (1992) Tactile Aids for the Hearing Impaired. London: Whurr. Tye-Murray N (1998) Foundations of Aural Rehabilitation. San Diego: Singular.

PART THREE Special Aspects of Hearing Aid Audiology

257

This page intentionally left blank

Chapter 13 Assessment and management of special problems 13.1 TINNITUS 13.1.1 Introduction Tinnitus is a relatively common complaint, which the Oxford Textbook of Medicine (Weatherall, Ledingham and Warrell, 1983) describes as: A sensation of noise in the ears or head. It may be related to disease of the cochlea or of the eighth nerve and can be produced by certain drugs of which quinine and the salicylates are the most important. It may be faint and perceived only in quiet surroundings, or it may be loud and continuous. It is variously described as a highpitched whistling or hissing sound or occasionally as a low-pitched rumbling or machinery-like noise.

Research in the UK suggests that over 17% of the population have had an experience of troublesome tinnitus and that as many as 300,000 people in the UK have such severe tinnitus that it interferes with work or social functioning (Sheppard and Hawkridge, 1987). Tinnitus is always a symptom of some pathology and the first course of action must be the referral of the client for medical advice, in line with the Hearing Aid Council Code of Practice (1999). In the vast majority of cases there is no cure and if medical and surgical treatment have been ruled out the hearing aid audiologist may try fitting maskers or hearing aids for relief from the tinnitus.

13.1.2 Hearing problems and tinnitus Tinnitus is frequently linked with hearing disorders and investigations may show a degree of similarity between the frequency of the tinnitus and that of the hearing loss. Where tinnitus accompanies a conductive loss it is most likely to be low frequency in nature (this also tends to be true of Ménière’s disorder). The tinnitus is often described as rumbling, 259

260

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

humming or like the noise of machinery. Common causes include wax, fluid and otosclerosis. With the possible exception of the latter, medical treatment tends to be very effective for tinnitus that is linked with a conductive hearing problem. The origin of tinnitus may be considered as: • conductive – linked with, for example, impacted wax, middle ear effusion, stapes fixation, cholesteatoma; • sensorineural – due to, for example, noise exposure, ototoxic drugs. Almost all pathologies with hearing loss can have associated tinnitus; • non-auditory – arising from normal or abnormal bodily function, for example, vascular causes, temporo-mandibular joint causes. Most tinnitus is linked to a physical disorder in the hearing system and it may be started by a ‘trigger’ such as stress, noise, drugs, syringing. In some cases, the tinnitus may also be accompanied by headaches and pain in the neck, ear or jaw, which may be due to muscle tension.

13.1.3 A theory of tinnitus The outer, middle and inner ears concentrate sound energy to the hair cells in the cochlea. The organ of Corti is not a purely passive structure but acts as a natural biomechanical hearing aid to focus sound energy efficiently on to the sensory (inner) hair cells. The inner hair cells appear to be passive receptors that fire the auditory nerve. The outer hair cells sharpen up the response of the basilar membrane, possibly utilizing: • contractile muscle proteins (actin and myosin, produced in the outer hair cells); • the cuticular plate that surrounds the outer hair cells; • the supporting cells of Deiters. Selective stiffening of the basilar membrane actively sharpens the response, particularly to low intensity sounds. With very low sound levels, the outer hair cells vibrate to enhance the movement of the basilar membrane and increase stimulation of the inner hair cells. Damage to the outer hair cells results in irregularities in the amplification effect. Inappropriate trains of nerve impulses result and the brain interprets these as sound. It may also be that if the organ of Corti is damaged in one area there is overactivity of the control mechanism, which may stimulate relatively healthy areas in close proximity. This could give rise to tinnitus, which would be close in frequency to the area of greatest hearing loss.

Assessment and management of special problems

261

13.1.4 Aids for the relief of tinnitus There are a number of possible methods of treatment for tinnitus, including the use of drugs, surgery and electrical stimulation, or utilizing cochlear implants for the profoundly deaf. The most common treatment, however, involves the use of masking instruments. These can be fitted by a hearing aid audiologist once medical and surgical intervention have been ruled out. Masking instruments do not ‘cure’ tinnitus and counselling, methods of relaxation and the support of self-help groups can be important if success is to be achieved. A tinnitus masker is a device, very similar to a hearing aid in appearance, which presents another, external, sound to the client. This other sound may fully or partially mask the tinnitus and some inhibition of the tinnitus may occur. Inhibition is the absence or reduction of the tinnitus after the masker is removed and may last for only a few seconds or for much longer periods. Hearing aids can be used in combination with masking devices or on their own. Hearing aids alone may provide some masking through the amplification of background noise but they do not appear to achieve residual inhibition. We do not know enough about tinnitus to do more than speculate about why maskers can be effective. It may be that they provide auditory masking because of phase cancellation of the tinnitus sound, or perhaps the masking noise restores ‘balance’ to the damaged part of the basilar membrane, reducing over-activity in adjacent areas. Whatever the reason, masking can in many cases be effective, although much rehabilitative counselling is usually needed. A correctly fitted masker, with or without a hearing aid as necessary, is the most effective method currently available for controlling sensorineural tinnitus.

13.1.5 Tinnitus assessment There are many ways of assessing tinnitus varying from recording the client’s subjective account to lengthy simulations, perhaps involving use of a music synthesizer to match the frequency content. The methods used by hearing aid audiologists will reflect their equipment, personal interest and knowledge, and the time they have available. A reasonable match of the pitch and loudness of the client’s tinnitus is important both for fitting and counselling. An audiometer can be used quite successfully for tinnitus matching, although some tinnitus sufferers do find the matching test very difficult to perform. The different stages involved in assessment (Figure 13.1) are as follows: (a) Pure tone audiometry A not-masked pure tone audiogram should be obtained prior to tinnitus matching. Uncomfortable loudness levels (ULLs) are important but should

262

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Figure 13.1. A suggested format for a tinnitus assessment form.

Assessment and management of special problems

263

not be attempted at this stage because loud sounds may exacerbate tinnitus. (b) Pitch matching A number of methods are available for pitch matching but perhaps the most useful for the hearing aid audiologist’s purposes is the adaptive (bracketing) method. The client is asked to indicate whether his or her tinnitus is higher or lower in pitch than the test tone presented through the audiometer. A suitable explanation in layman’s terms should be given, with examples or ‘practice’ as necessary. Ideally the test tone should be presented in the same ear as that in which the tinnitus occurs but in some cases it is necessary to test contralaterally. The tone should be introduced at one extreme of the available frequency range and at a level estimated to be comfortable. The selection of 8 kHz or 125 Hz is made on the basis of the client’s description of his or her tinnitus. The tone should be presented for about 2 seconds and repeated as necessary allowing time between presentations for the client to make the necessary comparison. A practical example may help to clarify this. Suppose the client has described his or her tinnitus as a high-pitched noise, but when an 8 kHz tone is presented he or she describes the tinnitus as ‘lower’. The next step is to present the lowest available frequency, usually 125 Hz. This time, the client describes their tinnitus as ‘higher’. A 6 kHz frequency tone is presented next and the extremes are gradually eliminated until the frequency or frequency range nearest to the tinnitus has been located. Some clients confuse loudness with pitch. If this occurs, it may be necessary to perform some loudness matching at each frequency to be tested. Normally loudness matching is performed only at the frequency nearest that of the tinnitus. (c) Loudness matching A possible method for loudness matching is as follows. At the frequency matched as the nearest to the pitch of the tinnitus, the tone is presented initially at threshold (based on the audiogram). The tone should be held for 2 seconds and increased in 5 dB steps until the client judges it to be of equal loudness to the tinnitus. It is important to realize that severe tinnitus may appear very quiet when matched to external sounds. Levels as low in intensity as 10 dB above threshold can be perceived as being very severe, perhaps because of its inescapability or possibly due in part to the effects of recruitment.

264

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(d) Masking evaluation An indication of the likely benefit of masking may be obtained using wideband masking noise from the audiometer; alternatively narrow band masking or pure tones may be used. The aim is to find the minimal level of masking that is effective. The masking noise is introduced at or below threshold and increased in 5 dB steps until the client indicates that he or she can no longer hear the tinnitus. At each step, the noise should be held for 5 seconds. This is followed by a rest period of a further 5 seconds so that the client can again hear the tinnitus. When the minimal masking level (MML) has been found, it is maintained for up to 3 min. If, during this time, the tinnitus becomes audible again, the masking noise may be raised in 5 dB steps until it becomes effective once more. The difference between the initial level and the level required after 3 min will indicate the masking decay. Where masking decays, partial masking should be used. ‘Tinnitus retraining therapy’ (based on the work of Jastreboff) always uses partial masking, with the aim that the client will eventually habituate to their tinnitus noise and not worry about it or even notice it any more. In all cases, masking should be used at low intensity levels (not much above the client’s threshold). (e) Uncomfortable loudness level (ULL) Uncomfortable loudness levels must be obtained after all tinnitus investigations are completed because loud sounds may heighten the tinnitus. If loud sounds do have this effect, the output of a hearing aid may be adjusted to minimize the problem, utilizing peak clipping or automatic gain control. Testing for the ULLs is carried out according to the British Society of Audiology (1987) recommended method. 13.1.6 The rehabilitation programme The ideal tinnitus programme, which can be offered by a hearing aid audiologist after the client has obtained medical advice (Figure 13.2) will include: • • • • •

consultation, assessment and impressions; fitting; follow-up, for example, after one month or sooner; further appointments as necessary for rehabilitation; further audiometry, especially if there is a progressive element to the hearing loss.

Assessment and management of special problems

265

Hearing aid dispenser

Refer to ENT consultant

Counselling: explanations, reassurance, treatment available, relaxation…etc

Need for hearing aid

Long-term follow-up

Figure 13.2. A possible route for tinnitus sufferers.

266

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(a) Consultation, assessment and impressions Tinnitus frequently causes stress, anxiety, and poor concentration. Clients may feel their tinnitus impairs their ability to hear clearly. Often this is due to an associated hearing loss, rather than the tinnitus itself. Careful history-taking and assessment are important. The case history may include such questions as: • How long have you had tinnitus? • What does it sound like? (For example, ringing/ whistling/ whining/ humming/ buzzing/ roaring/ rushing/ ticking/ clicking?) • Is it pulsating/continuous/occasional? • Is it in one or both ears or centrally in the head? • How severe is it and how does this affect you? (For example, does it stop you from sleeping/prevent you from concentrating/cause stress?) • When is it most troublesome? • What, if anything, makes the tinnitus worse? (For example, silence/loud noise/stress/certain foods?) • Have you received any medical advice or help with regard to your tinnitus? • Have you been exposed to any loud noise or taken any relevant medication? (For example, any ototoxic drugs, see section 3.4.2(d).) The assessment will provide an indication of the possible benefit of masking but, as with hearing aids, benefit may be greatest after a period of time has allowed the client to adjust to its use. The ideal is always to facilitate a trial period with hearing aids or maskers. Where tinnitus is bilateral, two instruments will often be required. Even where the tinnitus is monaural, there are many cases in which bilateral masking is still required. Impressions should be taken for both ears and the ear moulds obtained should be of the skeleton open ear type or have a vent that is as large as possible. Solid moulds tend to increase the effect of the tinnitus by occlusion. The use of non-wearable maskers (for example, clocks, tape recordings, under-pillow maskers) should also be explored. (b) Fitting If a combination hearing aid and masker is used, it is customary to fit the instrument as a hearing aid first. Masking is switched on at the lowest volume and raised until it is at threshold. It is then increased in small increments until the required level (low intensity) is reached. The lowest effective intensity should always be used. A masker that is adjustable by the

Assessment and management of special problems

267

audiologist permits trial with low, mid and high frequency noise to establish which is most effective. A frequency similar to the tinnitus may be most effective in inhibiting the tinnitus but in many cases the most effective masking noise is lower in frequency than the tinnitus. Selection of the noise to use generally involves an element of trial and error. Client preference is also very important. The client must like ‘his/her’ masking noise. The client needs to be instructed in the techniques of use, most of which are very similar to instructions for use of a hearing aid. The use of a masker, as of a hearing aid, is built up gradually. The client should be advised that, while a hearing aid may be used continuously, masking should be used only as much as required. A schedule for its use can be discussed with the client, for instance a period of masking at night is often helpful in relaxing the client ready for sleep. Other advice should include a recommendation to avoid both silence and loud sounds and to reduce intake of caffeine, alcohol and aspirin, since these can worsen tinnitus. Total abstinence, at least during the period of adjustment to masking, is the ideal. (c) Follow-up Hearing aid audiologists are well acquainted with the need for follow-up to establish the effective use of hearing aids. Counselling and support, often over a prolonged period, are even more crucial to the tinnitus client. Thorough rehabilitation should be normal practice for new users of both hearing aids and masking instruments. Relaxation training therapy may be particularly helpful for tinnitus sufferers. Relaxation does not act directly on the tinnitus and can be most successful if relaxation techniques are used generally by the client, not only when the tinnitus is bad. Relaxation tapes and classes are widely available. If the tinnitus seems intrusive during the quiet of relaxation sessions, a background of quiet music will usually help to overcome this problem. Masking of tinnitus has not been shown to cause any deterioration in hearing (Hazell, 1985), but high levels should not be used.

13.1.7 SUMMARY Tinnitus can be a troublesome condition from which some relief may be achieved through the use of masking instruments. Assessment and fitting are important aspects of the tinnitus programme but support and counselling are also very necessary to the vast majority of clients. The success of masking instrument use varies widely and success depends heavily on the techniques used by the hearing aid audiologist.

268

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

FURTHER READING FOR SECTION 13.1 Coles R, Davis A and Smith P (1990) Tinnitus: its epidemiology and management. In Jensen, JH (ed.) Presbyacusis and Other Age-related Aspects. 14th Danavox Symposium, Copenhagen. Feldmann H (ed.) (1987) Proceedings of III International Tinnitus Seminar. Karlsruhe, Munster, Germany: Harsch Verlag, pp. 121–8. Hazell J (1987) Tinnitus. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Moore BCJ (1998). Cochlear Hearing Loss. London: Whurr. Shulman A (1997) Tinnitus: Diagnosis and Treatment. London: Singular.

13.2 IMPEDANCE AUDIOMETRY 13.2.1 Introduction The role of the conductive pathway is to convey sound energy efficiently to the cochlea. If the sound wave finds it easy to set the eardrum into vibration, much energy is passed on and only a little is reflected. However, if it is difficult to set the eardrum into vibration, much energy is reflected. The difficulty or hindrance to the flow of energy is called impedance. The impedance at the eardrum tells us how well the middle ear is functioning. The aim of impedance measurements is to assess the efficiency of the middle ear mechanism at passing on sound energy.

13.2.2 The middle ear and acoustic impedance When a sound wave reaches the eardrum some of the energy sets the drum vibrating and some is reflected. The eardrum movements are carried by the ossicles in the middle ear to the cochlea. The function of the middle ear is to act as a transformer between the low pressure required to transmit sound through air and the relatively high pressure needed to transmit sound through the perilymph in the cochlea. In essence, the middle ear increases the pressure reaching the cochlea. This is achieved mainly by concentrating the sound energy arriving at the eardrum on to the much smaller stapes footplate. This is like the effect of a stiletto heel (Figure 13.3), which concentrates the weight of the body on to a small area such that it may make a mark on the floor whereas a larger heel area does not have the same effect. In the middle ear, there is a small additional effect from the lever action of the ossicles and a slight improvement, especially in the higher frequencies, due to the conical shape of the eardrum. Normally this system is very efficient and only a little sound is reflected by the eardrum. The major part of the sound energy is transformed into

Assessment and management of special problems

269

Figure 13.3. The transformer action of the middle ear is similar in concept to the effect of a stiletto heel.

powerful vibrations to stimulate the cochlea. However, if the middle ear system is altered, for example as a result of disease, the proportion of sound transmitted through it may alter. The efficiency of the system is reduced and more energy is lost either by reflection from the eardrum or friction in the middle ear. Consequently less sound reaches the cochlea and the patient experiences a ‘conductive’ hearing loss. The acoustic impedance of the middle ear is the term used to describe the resistance presented by the middle ear to the passage of sound. This varies according to the frequency of the sound passing through and at high frequencies the impedance is mainly due to the mass of the three bones. However, at low frequencies the acoustic impedance is mainly due to the stiffness of the eardrum and the ossicular chain. In most conductive conditions, the middle ear system becomes less mobile and the stiffness of the eardrum is increased. A greater than normal proportion of the acoustic energy is reflected by the stiffened eardrum and a smaller than usual proportion is passed on to the cochlea. Investigations into the proportion of sound reflected by the eardrum can give information about the acoustic impedance of the ear.

13.2.3 The concept of impedance Impedance in audiometry is simply the difficulty or hindrance to the flow of acoustic energy along the conductive pathway. Compliance or admittance is conversely the mobility or acceptance of the system. Impedance is not difficult to conceptualize. When you move a cricket bat through air it moves easily, but you would have to apply far more force to make the same stroke in a swimming pool. This is because air is a low impedance medium and water is a high impedance medium.

270

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

A similar principle applies in the ear where acoustic energy has to move from air to the liquid-filled inner ear. Only if the impedance of the two mediums is matched will energy pass readily from one medium to the other. Impedance can be viewed as being influenced by the resistance of the system and the way it reacts (that is, its reactance). Resistance removes energy from the system and converts it to another form, as in friction between the joints of the ossicles. This is a very small component of the impedance of the middle ear. Reactance is made up of two elements, stiffness and inertia. The inertia of the system relates mainly to the mass of the ossicles and is of consequence for higher frequency sounds above about 1.5 kHz. Although the proportion of energy accepted or rejected by the middle ear is the result of a complex interaction of the three elements that make it up, only stiffness is of clinical importance. Impedance = resistance + reactance Disorders of the conductive hearing mechanism generally cause changes in stiffness. Stiffness, like inertia, is frequency-dependent. Stiffness dominates in the low frequency region.

13.2.4 Principles and equipment The electro-acoustic impedance bridge or admittance meter (also commonly called a tympanometer) is an instrument that provides information on the functioning of the middle ear. Impedance is resistance to the flow of energy, while admittance is the efficiency of the system to absorb such energy. The term ‘immitance’ is sometimes used to mean the clinical application of impedance or admittance but it is not a preferred term. Two tests widely used in audiometry are: • tympanometry; • acoustic reflex measurement. Each is an objective measure requiring little if any co-operation from the subject; both are quick, easy and non-invasive and are thus applicable to every age group, from babies to the oldest of senior citizens, and every degree of hearing loss.

13.2.5 Tympanometry For the purposes of tympanometry, a small probe made up of three tubes (Figure 13.4) is sealed in the ear canal using a small plastic cuff or tip. The

Assessment and management of special problems

271

Figure 13.4. An electro-acoustic impedance meter.

first tube carries a continuous low frequency probe tone, which is passed into the ear canal by the miniature receiver. The second tube monitors the sound level and the third tube allows the pressure in the outer ear to be altered and measured. Tympanometry is the measurement of eardrum compliance as the air pressure is altered in the external ear canal. The eardrum is most compliant, that is, it moves most freely, when the air pressure in the middle ear is the same as that in the ear canal. This would normally be at atmospheric pressure but, for the purposes of tympanometry, the ear canal is blocked and the air pressure in the canal is artificially varied. When the pressure equalizes with that of the middle ear and the eardrum moves most freely, sound energy passes readily through the eardrum with little reflected. The level of reflected sound in the ear canal is recorded and will be at its lowest at the point of maximum compliance. Patients are usually told that the tympanogram is a record of how the eardrum moves, although it is really a graph showing how the SPL in the outer ear changes as the air pressure alters. From this we can draw conclusions about the mobility of the middle ear system. The compliance or mobility of the ear is usually expressed in cubic centimetres (cc) of equivalent volume. Sound pressure level is a function of a closed cavity volume. With a known probe tone, which in tympanometry is usually a 226 Hz tone at 65 dBSPL, the SPL will decrease as the cavity size increases. The compliance of the middle ear is therefore expressed as an equivalent cavity volume. The intensity of the probe tone is such that it will not produce a reflex contraction of the stapedius muscles. The procedure followed in tympanometry can be summarized in a series of steps:

272

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

1. The probe in the cuff is inserted into the ear canal so that an airtight seal is achieved. 2. The middle ear canal pressure is altered between +200 and –400 decapascals (daPa) or millimetres of water (mm H2O). (1 daPa ~ 1 mm H2O). 3. Compliance of the eardrum is measured as the relative change in sound pressure level in the ear canal as the air pressure is increased and decreased. 4. When the sound waves strike the eardrum, some of the energy will be reflected. If the eardrum is stiff, more of the energy will be reflected causing a greater SPL in the cavity. 5. Tympanometry starts with an increase in air pressure in the canal (+200 daPa), which pushes the eardrum so that it cannot move freely. Much sound is therefore reflected and a high SPL recorded. 6. The pressure is reduced and, as the eardrum begins to move more freely, little sound is reflected and a low SPL is recorded. 7. The point of maximum compliance occurs when the lowest SPL is recorded in the ear canal. 8. At the point of maximum compliance, middle ear pressure will be equal to the pressure in the ear canal. 9. Compliance is measured in cc of equivalent canal volume. A much larger than normal static canal volume can identify a perforated eardrum.

13.2.6 Characteristics of the tympanogram Two characteristics of the tympanogram are of interest: its shape and the air pressure at maximum compliance. The shape, rather than any absolute value, of the tympanogram is most important because wide variations occur within the various pathologies and only the overall pattern is useful. Common shapes related to certain ear conditions are reasonably easy to recognize by comparison with the shape of an average normal tympanogram. For example, if a client has fluid in the middle ear the eardrum will not move freely at any point and the resultant shape is a flat graph indicating high impedance. Where low pressure without fluid is present in the middle ear, the normal curve is displaced and such a condition may be responsible for slight ‘unexplained’ conductive hearing loss. If the ear is perforated or a grommet is in place it will be impossible to maintain pressure unless the Eustachian tube is blocked; in this case the cavity volume will be abnormally large and the graph will be very flat. Some common shapes are shown in Figure 13.5.

Assessment and management of special problems

273

Figure 13.5. Typical tympanogram configurations likely to be seen in a clinical population. Values of compliance from 0.3 cc to 1.3 cc obtained at a pressure between +30 daPa and –80 daPa are considered to be within the normal range.

13.2.7 The acoustic reflex The middle ear has two muscles. The stapedius muscle is approximately 6 mm long and is located in a vertical hole in the bulge in the posterior wall of the middle ear, known as the pyramidal fossa. It is attached to the neck of the stapes by a tendon that is about 2 mm long. On contraction it pulls the stapes outwards and backwards, which stiffens the ossicular chain increasing the acoustic impedance. The nerve controlling the stapedius muscle is the seventh cranial (facial) nerve. The tensor tympani muscle is about 20 mm long and lies in a bony canal alongside the Eustachian tube. It passes around a bony ledge before being attached to the upper part of the handle of the malleus by a 6 mm tendon. It is controlled by the fifth cranial (trigeminal) nerve, which is mainly responsible for reporting sensation over the face. When the muscle contracts, it tends to pull the malleus forward and inward to stiffen the ossicular chain. The acoustic reflex is mainly the result of the stapedius muscle’s contraction and it is therefore often referred to as the stapedial reflex. Very loud sounds may cause a startle response that will involve the tensor tympani. When the muscles contract, low frequencies are attenuated by up to 20 dB. The function of the reflex is not certain but it is probable that its

274

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

main purpose is to filter out the most intense sounds in one’s own speech. It also has a protective function but this is probably a by-product. A loud sound, usually 70 dB to 90 dB above threshold, in either ear will cause a reflex contraction of both left and right stapedius muscles. This causes a slight increase in acoustic impedance. The acoustic reflex test is a measure of the threshold at which the stapedial reflex occurs. The acoustic reflex threshold for pure tones is higher than the reflex threshold for white noise. Acoustic reflexes can be measured ipsilaterally (in the same ear) or contralaterally (in the opposite ear) because a signal applied to one ear causes a reflex contraction in both ears. The threshold of the tone used to elicit the reflex is always recorded for the ear to which the tone is presented. This is known as the stimulated ear. In order for an acoustic reflex to be obtained, the patient must: • perceive a ‘loud’ sound; • have a normal middle ear on the measuring probe side (the reflex response produces a small increase in impedance; if the eardrum already has a high impedance, due to glue ear for example, the reflex response will not be noticed); • have an intact reflex arc (Figure 13.6). A reflex becomes less likely if there is a conductive hearing loss. A conductive loss of 25 dB in the stimulated ear will usually abolish the reflex. A conductive loss of only 10 dB in the probe ear may prevent the reflex from being recorded because the eardrum is already stiffened. The acoustic reflex indicates the loudness of the signal. A conductive loss of 25 dB or more is likely to prevent the patient from perceiving the

Brainstem

Figure 13.6. The stapedial reflex arc.

Assessment and management of special problems

275

signal as sufficiently loud to elicit the acoustic reflex. However, in the case of cochlear pathology, the patient often hears the sound as if it was much louder, due to recruitment. The acoustic reflex threshold then occurs at less than the normal 70 dB to 90 dB above the threshold of hearing. The gap between the threshold of hearing and the reflex threshold is known as the span. Where there is a cochlear disorder, an acoustic reflex may occur with a span of less than 60 dB. A low acoustic reflex threshold is a simple objective test to identify a cochlear disorder. With a cochlear hearing loss of 60 dB or less there is a 90% chance of observing an acoustic reflex. Naturally, as the hearing loss increases, the chance of observing a reflex decreases. However, when such a reflex does occur it indicates severe recruitment. Reflex thresholds have little value on their own but aid diagnosis in conjunction with other results. A span between the threshold of hearing and the reflex threshold of 60 dB or less indicates a cochlear loss whereas a difference of greater than 15 dB between the reflex threshold of each ear may suggest a problem beyond the cochlea, that is a retrocochlear disorder. If hearing thresholds have not been obtained, perhaps due to a severe loss in a young child, or a non-organic problem, reflex thresholds can be used to confirm that hearing is present at that level. Reflexes may also be used to suggest an appropriate uncomfortable loudness level where one cannot otherwise be obtained, as discomfort usually occurs approximately 10 dB above the acoustic reflex.

13.2.8 Summary The role of the conductive pathway is to convey sound energy efficiently to the cochlea. The tympanic membrane and ossicular chain present an impedance to incoming sound waves. At low frequencies, the impedance is governed principally by the stiffness of the system. Most causes of conductive hearing loss affect the stiffness of the middle ear. If the stiffness can be measured it can provide valuable information about conditions of the middle ear. The function of tympanometry is to measure how the impedance alters with variation in air pressure in the ear canal. The shape of the compliance curve and the level of the middle ear pressure can be of great assistance in pin-pointing the nature of a middle ear disorder. An acoustic reflex is normally obtained at 70 dB to 90 dB above hearing threshold level. A sound stimulus applied to one ear will cause a bilateral reflex. A conductive loss in either ear reduces the likelihood of obtaining a reflex. Where there is a sensorineural hearing loss of cochlear origin, an acoustic reflex is likely to be present at sensation levels of 60 dB or less. This is because the acoustic threshold indicates the subjective loudness of

276

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

a sound, not the objective intensity. Recruitment is present with most, if not all, cochlear disorders and a reduced reflex threshold is therefore likely to be obtained.

FURTHER READING FOR SECTION 13.2 Arlinger S (1989) Manual of Practical Audiometry. Volume 1. London: Whurr. British Society of Audiology, (1992) Recommended procedure for tympanometry. British Journal of Audiology 26(25): 5–7. Jerger J (1980) Clinical Impedance Audiometry. 2 edn. Stuttgart: George Thieme.

13.3 SPECIALIZED AUDIOMETRIC TESTS 13.3.1 Introduction Conductive hearing loss can be separated from sensorineural loss relatively easily using pure tone audiometry but to differentiate the various types of sensorineural hearing loss is more difficult. A number of specialized audiometric tests are used to distinguish sensory (or cochlear) from neural (or retrocochlear) hearing disorders. There is also a test to find dead regions in the cochlea. These tests can provide powerful clues to the site and probable cause of sensorineural hearing loss. Individual test results are not always reliable and the results of a number of different audiometric tests are normally used in conjunction with information revealed from the case history and physical examination. Information that may help to distinguish cochlear disorders from those that occur beyond the cochlea (retrocochlear) may be obtained from acoustic reflex measurement, speech audiometry, Békésy audiometry (section 13.5.2) and evoked response audiometry. There are also a number of specialized audiometric tests that are used routinely in many clinics to aid diagnosis. These include the Short Increment Sensitivity Index (SISI) test, the Alternate Binaural Loudness Balance (ABLB) test and tests of auditory adaptation or tone decay.

13.3.2 Tests of cochlear function (a) The Alternate Binaural Loudness Balance (ABLB) test In the normal ear, a linear relationship exists between an increase in intensity and the related increase in perceived loudness. However, when damage has occurred in the hair cells of the cochlea, a loss of hearing

Assessment and management of special problems

277

sensitivity may be accompanied by an abnormality known as recruitment, in which the subjective sensation of loudness builds up at a more rapid rate than normal. For patients with recruitment, a small increase in intensity will produce an abnormally large increase in the subjective sensation of loudness. This abnormal growth in loudness is subjective and therefore cannot be directly measured. In cases of unilateral loss, the normal ear can be used as a reference for comparison. The Alternate Binaural Loudness Balance (ABLB) test compares loudness growth in the abnormal ear with loudness growth in the normal ear. There is no single recognized procedure and the following is an outline of one test method that may be used. A tone 20 dB above the air conduction threshold, is introduced in the good ear and held for one second. A tone of the same frequency and estimated to be of equal loudness is introduced to the poorer ear and also held for one second. The tone is presented to each ear alternately and the intensity in the poorer ear is raised or lowered until the patient indicates that the tones in each ear are equally loud. This balancing continues at 20 dB intervals in the good ear until full recruitment is reached or the test is discontinued, either because discomfort is experienced or because the maximum output of the audiometer has been reached. The test is performed at one or more frequencies, usually 1 kHz or 2 kHz and 4 kHz. The results may be plotted on a laddergram, in which case points are joined to illustrate sounds of equal loudness at each level tested. Laddergrams are helpful in understanding the principle of the ABLB test but graphs are most generally used to plot results in clinical practice. If, as in Figure 13.7, the left ear shows a hearing loss of 40 dBHL, a 40 dBHL tone should theoretically sound the same as a 0 dBHL tone in the normal ear. Taking these thresholds as a base line, any increase in intensity added identically to both left and right ears results in tones that are heard as equally loud in both ears. This is normal loudness growth. In cases of recruitment an increase in intensity, applied identically to both ears, may appear as a much louder increase in the impaired ear. Full recruitment is a symptom of cochlear damage. It is possible for loudness to increase so rapidly that, beyond a certain intensity, a tone may appear louder to the poorer ear than it does to the better ear. This is known as hyper-recruitment. Where the damage to the ear is retrocochlear almost any pattern of loudness growth may occur, including de-recruitment. De-recruitment is where loudness grows more slowly than normal and is most often found with eighth nerve damage. Some possible patterns of loudness growth are shown in Figure 13.8.

278

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

dBHL

Better ear

dBHL

dBHL

dBHL Poorer ear

Figure 13.7. Results of an ABLB test plotted both (a) as a laddergram and (b) as a graph.

A two-channel audiometer is required for the ABLB test, which may be carried out manually or automatically. The procedure is most useful if the loss is unilateral. When the loss is bilateral but each ear has normal hearing at some frequency, a monaural loudness balancing test can be attempted. This compares the loudness of a low frequency tone with the loudness of a higher frequency tone in the same ear. The intensity is raised

Assessment and management of special problems

279

Figure 13.8. Some possible outcomes of the ABLB test.

in 10 dB steps using a method similar to that in the ABLB test. However, judgement of equal loudness between different frequencies is much more difficult for the patient.

280

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(b) The Short Increment Sensitivity Index (SISI) Small changes in intensity cannot normally be detected at near threshold levels. A change in intensity of several decibels is required before the listener can detect any change in loudness. As the tone becomes louder, small changes are much easier to detect. This is true for all listeners. The smallest change that can be detected is termed the difference limen for intensity. Very small changes in intensity at near threshold levels can only be detected in cochlear disorders. Both loudness recruitment and the ability to hear very small changes in intensity may be observed in cases of cochlear damage. The Short Increment Sensitivity Index (SISI) is designed to test the patient’s ability to detect 1 dB changes in intensity superimposed on a tone presented 20 dB above threshold. The SISI test indicates the presence of cochlear damage but is not a direct indication of the presence of recruitment. A continuous tone is introduced at 20 dB above threshold. Every 5 seconds the tone rises by 1 dB and this rise is held for one-fifth of a second (Figure 13.9). The patient signals whenever he or she hears a rise in the tone. After 20 rises in the tone have been presented the patient’s score is multiplied by five to obtain a percentage. Patients with normal hearing, middle ear or retrocochlear disorders obtain very low scores, whereas patients with cochlear disorders usually score very highly. Typically, normal hearing, middle ear or retrocochlear disorders score between 0% and 30%, whilst cochlear disorders score between 70% and 100%. The higher the SISI score, the more likely it is that the pathology is cochlear. Frequencies tested are usually 1 kHz and 4 kHz, because lower frequencies are less likely to show positive results.

Figure 13.9. The SIS1 test. Every 5 seconds the tone presented jumps by 1 dB. This is repeated 20 times.

(c) Tests of auditory adaptation It is a normal phenomenon of hearing that sounds appear loudest when they are first heard. This is also known as the ‘on-effect’. A signal held for

Assessment and management of special problems

281

some time will appear to fade or decay. Extremely rapid tone decay may indicate a retrocochlear disorder. Retrocochlear hearing loss can be due to damage anywhere from the eighth nerve to the brain. Retrocochlear disorders are relatively rare but they may be very serious in nature. Several procedures exist for quantifying tone decay. In 1957, Carhart reported a tone decay technique that is still in use today. However, Carhart’s tone decay test is time consuming and a modified version of it, proposed by Rosenberg (1969), is more widely used in clinical practice. The Rosenberg modified procedure is carried out as follows. A tone is introduced at 5 dB above threshold and the patient is asked to signal whenever the tone disappears. Every time the tone fades and becomes inaudible, the intensity is raised by 5 dB. The test continues for 1 min. At the end of this time, the degree of tone decay is expressed as the number of decibels by which the tone has been raised. Decay is considered significant if the tone has had to be raised by 20 dB or more. Extreme tone decay of over 30 dB is often found in eighth nerve pathology, although it can also be present with some cochlear disorders. It is usual to test at two or more frequencies, as decay is sometimes more marked at one frequency than another. The frequencies most often used are 2 kHz and 500 Hz, or 1 kHz and 4 kHz. Retrocochlear disorders can be life threatening and as tone decay can be used to provide a screening test for retrocochlear pathology it is useful to include it in a battery of clinical tests. (d) Test for dead regions of the cochlea Areas in the cochlea where there are no surviving inner hair cells are known as ‘dead regions’ and basilar membrane activity in this region does not lead to any firing of the nerve fibres. Dead regions may be anticipated when the threshold is over 80 dBHL and there is a lower threshold at the adjacent half-octave frequency, especially where there is an abrupt drop (30 dB or more). Dead regions may also occur with moderate to severe hearing loss but this may not be apparent from the audiogram because a tone that falls in a dead region may be detected in adjacent regions of the basilar membrane due to the spread of basilar membrane vibration (see section 2.2.2). In effect, the client is hearing the tone but as a different frequency and there is no way of knowing this from the audiogram. However, it is very important to know as amplification of the frequencies within a dead region is not beneficial. The frequencies within the dead region should ideally be filtered out. The test for dead regions (Moore, 2000; Moore et al., 2000) uses ‘threshold equalizing noise’ (TEN), which is a spectrally shaped noise that gives equal masked thresholds (for normally hearing people) over the

282

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

frequency range. Pure tone thresholds are obtained for each ear using recorded test signals. Masked thresholds in threshold equalizing noise, at levels that produce significant masking, are then obtained for the same frequencies. Where inner hair cells exist, the pure-tone threshold in threshold equalizing noise remains much the same as for normally hearing listeners. Where there are dead regions, the pure-tone threshold in threshold equalizing noise will be much higher than normal because the signal is being detected only by inner hair cells in adjacent frequency areas. Dead regions are relatively common with hearing loss caused by: • sudden noise exposure, such as shooting; • Ménière’s disorder; • genetic disorder, especially low frequency moderate losses and those with a ‘cookie bite’ configuration.

13.3.3 Summary Pure tone thresholds provide a great deal of information about hearing loss, including the separation of conductive from sensorineural disorders. Specialized tests are used to provide further information on the location and extent of the damage within the auditory system. A number of specialized audiometric tests exist. Alternate Binaural Loudness Balance (ABLB) tests for recruitment in cases of unilateral hearing loss, by comparing the growth of loudness in the impaired ear with that in the normal ear. The Short Increment Sensitivity Index (SISI) determines the patient’s ability to detect very small changes in intensity at near threshold levels. Tests of tone decay consider the degree to which audibility is lost when the ear is continuously stimulated with a pure tone at near threshold levels. These tests help in the differentiation between cochlear and retrocochlear hearing losses. Moore’s test of dead regions indicates frequency areas where there is no inner hair cell activity. The tests described are examples of those that may be used. They are not infallible diagnostic indicators and are not intended to be used on their own. Clinical diagnosis consists of applying a number or ‘battery’ of tests and the results of specialized diagnostic tests are interpreted in the light of information provided during pure tone threshold tests and the case history.

FURTHER READING FOR SECTION 13.3 Arlinger S (1989) Manual of Practical Audiometry. Volume 1. London: Whurr. Jacobsen JT, Northem JL (1991) Diagnostic Audiology. Austen: Pro-ed.

Assessment and management of special problems

283

Katz J (1994) Handbook of Clinical Audiology. 4 edn. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Martin F (1994) An Introduction to Audiology. 5 edn. Englewood Cliffs, London: Prentice-Hall. Moore BCJ (1998) Cochlear Hearing Loss. London: Whurr.

13.4 NON-ORGANIC HEARING LOSS 13.4.1 Introduction Non-organic hearing loss refers to a condition in which there is no apparent organic (bodily) disorder to explain the hearing problem. Nonorganic hearing loss is also known as functional loss or pseudo-hypacusis. These are general terms that can be used to describe an apparent hearing loss which may be either psychogenic (genuine) or malingering (false).

13.4.2 Psychogenic hearing loss Psychogenic hearing loss is genuine but of psychological origin. It is usually due to hysteria and at one time was termed ‘hysterical deafness’. This kind of hearing loss is usually bilateral and profound; it persists even in sleep and the special tests for non-organic hearing loss are unlikely to provide much useful information.

13.4.3 Malingering Malingering is the deliberate faking of a hearing loss for personal gain, most commonly for compensation purposes. Many malingerers do have a genuine hearing loss but exaggerate the loss to increase their claim. Routine audiometry is of little value in obtaining correct thresholds but there are signs that should alert the audiologist to the possibility of nonorganic loss. The patient’s behaviour may raise suspicions, for instance if patients exaggerate their reliance on lip-reading, and test results are often inconsistent. A patient may have excellent speech discrimination despite a hearing loss that seems severe or there may be no evidence of crosshearing in an apparent unilateral hearing loss. ERA may be required to estimate thresholds. It is common for children to manifest non-organic hearing loss under certain circumstances. The attention centred on them and the excuse the loss provides may help a child to overcome problems that are unrelated to a hearing difficulty. The audiologist must establish true thresholds but should take care to obtain further investigation and treatment for the child’s underlying problems if this is required (Brooks and Geoghegan, 1992).

284

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Special ‘attention raising’ techniques are often used to obtain true thresholds. These are very simple: for example a child may be asked to say ‘yes’ when he or she hears a tone and ‘no’ when he or she does not. Many children will say ‘no’ to presented tones that are below their feigned threshold. As long as the audiologist is sure no visual or timing clues have been given, true thresholds may be obtained in this way. Older and more sophisticated children are less easy to deceive but often it is unnecessary to use the more complex tests required to ascertain true thresholds for the adult. Many (adult) tests for non-organic hearing loss exist; some are listed below. (a) Repeat pure tone threshold tests Many adults are unable to provide consistent false audiograms. If the thresholds on repeat tests vary by more than 10 dB, non-organic hearing loss may be suspected. (Children are often much better at maintaining consistent non-organic audiometric thresholds. This test is therefore unsuitable for children.) (b) The Lombard test This test is based on the principle that a normally hearing person will raise his or her voice in the presence of background noise. The patient is asked to read aloud and, at some unannounced time, masking noise is introduced and gradually increased in intensity. If the hearing loss is genuine, the noise will have no effect until it at least exceeds the deafness. If the hearing loss is fake, the patient may raise his or her voice without realizing it. (c) Doerfler–Stewart test It is usually possible to respond to speech even when masking noise is 10 dB to 15 dB greater than the intensity of the speech signals. The patient with a non-organic loss often assumes that any level of masking noise should prevent the hearing of speech. If a speech test is presented with masking, the non-organic patient will stop repeating words, sometimes even when the noise is less intense than the speech signal. A positive test suggests a non-organic loss but does not reveal the true threshold levels. (d) Delayed speech feedback test It is normal for speakers to monitor their own voices unconsciously as they speak, using their own hearing. If this auditory feedback mechanism is disturbed, speech is affected. This test involves the use of a tape recorder that has separate record and playback heads. The patient’s voice

Assessment and management of special problems

285

is recorded as he or she speaks and played back with a very slight delay of 0.1 to 0.2 seconds. The creation of delayed feedback disturbs the speaker’s speech pattern, causing slowing, stuttering or other difficulty. If the hearing loss is genuine, delayed feedback at intensities below threshold will have no effect on the speech. (e) The Stenger test

dBHL dBHL

dBHL

dBHL

dBHL dBHL dBHL dBHL dBHL dBHL

dBHL dBHL dBHL dBHL dBHL

Figure 13.10. The Stenger test procedure being used to determine whether an apparent hearing loss of 40 dBHL is true or non-organic.

This test is the most widely used to identify monaural non-organic hearing loss. It employs the principle that, where two tones of the same frequency are presented simultaneously, only the most intense one is heard. A two-channel audiometer is used to introduce a tone 10 dB above the threshold of the ‘better’ ear. The patient should respond. A tone is then presented to the ‘deaf ’ ear 10 dB below its given threshold. Tones are presented simultaneously to both ears, 10 dB above the threshold of the better ear and 10 dB below the threshold of the ‘deaf ’ ear. A patient with a genuine hearing loss will continue to respond to the tone that is 10 dB above threshold in the better ear. If the patient does not respond, this is because he or she can only hear the tone in the ‘deaf ’ ear, which he or she refuses to admit. The patient can only hear the loudest tone and does not realize there is still a tone above threshold in the ‘better’ ear.

286

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

The test can be continued to reveal approximate true thresholds. For instance, the tone is presented at 10 dB above the threshold of the better ear and at 0 dBHL in the ‘deaf ’ ear. The level in the ‘deaf ’ ear is raised in 5 dB steps. The patient should continue to respond because the tone that is 10 dB above threshold in the better ear will be readily heard (Figure 13.10). When the patient ceases to respond, the level in the ‘deaf ’ ear is usually within 10 dB of its true threshold.

13.4.4 Summary Non-organic hearing loss is one that is not of organic origin. It may be feigned or exaggerated, often for financial gain, but it may also be of psychological origin. Non-organic hearing loss should be suspected whenever results of the different parts of the hearing assessment are at variance. The audiologist has to determine whether a hearing loss exists and what are the true threshold levels. A number of tests are available for suspected cases of non-organic hearing loss, for example the Lombard test and the delayed speech feedback test, which are based on interfering with normal auditory monitoring. The most widely used test for unilateral nonorganic hearing losses is the Stenger test, which is based on the principle that it is only possible to hear the most intense of two tones of the same frequency presented simultaneously. Most tests set out to confuse the patient in order to provide evidence of non-organic hearing loss. Some tests also indicate the approximate hearing threshold.

FURTHER READING FOR SECTION 13.4 Arlinger S (1989) Manual of Practical Audiometry. Volume 1. London: Whurr. Northern JL and Downs MP (1991) Hearing in Children. 4 edn. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

13.5 AUTOMATIC AUDIOMETRY 13.5.1 Industrial screening Automatic audiometry allows the person under test to plot his or her own audiogram. The audiometer presents a tone that gradually increases in intensity. The patient presses a button as soon as the tone is heard and keeps it pressed for as long as the tone is heard. On pressing the button, the tone becomes fainter. As soon as the tone is inaudible the patient releases the button. When the button is released, the intensity increases. The level of the tone is automatically traced on an audiogram, either as the frequency gradually changes, or at certain fixed frequencies. The

Assessment and management of special problems

287

resultant zigzag line indicates the swing width, which is the difference between audibility and inaudibility. The threshold of hearing is taken as the mid-point between the extremes at each frequency and this produces thresholds that are almost identical to those obtained with manual audiometry. The width of the tracing is, on average, 6–10 dB but can vary. In extreme cases it may be as little as 3 dB or as much as 20 dB. Extremely narrow tracing widths were thought to be related to the difference limen for intensity and so, indirectly, to recruitment but most authorities now consider that the width of the tracing is really an indication of threshold doubt and certainty, although it may be suggestive of a cochlear lesion. Too large a deviation is usually due to incorrect patient response, e.g. holding the button down for too long or not reacting as soon as the tone is heard.

13.5.2 Békésy audiometry Békésy audiometry goes beyond automatic recording of audiograms and can provide diagnostic information, although it is not widely used. The audiometer presents tones that may be continuous (C) or interrupted (I), typically with 2.5 interruptions per second. The interrupted tracing obtained approximates to the pure tone threshold. Clinical interpretation involves comparison of the continuous with the interrupted tone. Jerger (1960) classified the types of audiogram that may be obtained (Figure 13.11). These are as follows: • Type I. A type I audiogram is where the continuous and interrupted tracings overlap. In this case, the threshold remains the same whether the tone is present continuously or pulsing on and off. Type I tracings are obtained in patients with normal ears or with middle ear disorders. • Type II. A type II audiogram shows the continuous and interrupted tracings often overlapping in the low frequencies. From approximately 1 kHz, the continuous tone appears to be more difficult to hear and the continuous trace drops below the interrupted trace. The continuous trace is rarely more than 20 dB below the interrupted trace, but the swing width may narrow. Type II audiograms are found mainly in patients with cochlear disorders. • Type III. At all frequencies the continuous tone falls dramatically below the interrupted tone. The patient appears to have marked adaptation and to find a continuous signal extremely difficult to hear. Type III audiograms are often found in patients with eighth nerve disorders. • Type IV. These audiograms are similar to type II except that the continuous tracing breaks away in the low frequency. These also tend to be obtained with eighth nerve disorders.

288

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

(dBHL)

(dBHL)

(dBHL)

(dBHL)

(dBHL)

• Type V. An audiogram in which the continuous tracing occurs above the interrupted tracing. This indicates a non-organic hearing loss.

Figure 13.11. Békésy audiogram types, classified by Jerger (1960).

Assessment and management of special problems

289

The Békésy audiogram types provide useful clinical information but are not sufficiently precise for diagnosis unless supported by other test results. In clinical practice, the frequency at which separation occurs tends to be ignored. No separation points to a conductive disorder, type II with a separation of up to 20 dB suggests a cochlear lesion, whereas an audiogram (excluding type V) with a separation of over 25 dB suggests a retrocochlear problem.

13.5.3 Summary Automatic audiometry allows patients to track their own pure tone thresholds by pressing a button when the tone is audible and releasing the button when it is not. A pen tracks the resulting audiogram as a series of zigzag lines on a special audiogram form. Automatic audiometers are often used in industrial hearing conservation programmes. Clinical Békésy audiometry provides diagnostic information through the comparison of the patient’s response to continuous and to pulsed or interrupted tones. Five different audiogram types may be observed. These help in the differentiation of cochlear, retrocochlear and non-organic hearing losses.

FURTHER READING FOR SECTION 13.5 Arlinger S (1991) Manual of Practical Audiometry. Volume II. London: Whurr Publishers.

Chapter 14 Paediatric provision

14.1 THE EFFECT OF HEARING LOSS IN CHILDREN 14.1.1 Introduction Language forms the basis of our communication and our education. We all use language to adjust to our world. Without language our experience would be very different and our lives would be very difficult. Children begin to learn language skills from the very earliest age and their ability to understand and to use speech develops naturally over a very short space of time. The normal baby progresses from babble to using complex sentences in a period of less than three years. However, this rapid natural development is interrupted if a child cannot hear normally. The age at which a hearing loss occurs is a critical factor in determining its effect on language development. Where a hearing loss occurs before the child has acquired speech it is termed ‘prelingual’. Prelingual therefore covers a range of cases from those who were born deaf to those who became deaf through illness, accident or other cause at an early stage – before about two years old. The term ‘postlingual’ is used where the child becomes deaf after learning to speak. Deafness from birth or acquired early in life has a serious effect on speech and language. The effect of a postlingual hearing loss on speech and language development is less serious but in terms of education and social development may still be very traumatic. In general terms, hearing loss acquired in childhood may affect: • • • • •

the development of speech and language; the ability to think abstractly; learning; social integration; social and emotional adjustment. 290

Assessment and management of special problems

291

Speech difficulties are often seen as the primary problem for hearing-impaired children but they are really a reflection of the more central problem of poor comprehension. Even with early diagnosis and appropriate remediation, hearing-impaired children’s progress may be very delayed. Their inability to understand explanations or to express their needs and feelings may lead to frustration and socially unacceptable behaviour. There is an understandable tendency for parents to be overprotective, and normally hearing siblings may become jealous of the time and money they feel is being diverted away from them. The terms ‘hearing-impaired children’ and ‘deaf children’ are often used interchangeably. Deafness includes all degrees of hearing loss from profound to very mild. As one would expect, the effects of such differing degrees of hearing loss may vary from marked to very slight. Many profoundly deaf children, for instance, fail to reach a reading level equivalent to that of an average eight-year-old by school leaving age (Conrad, 1977). The handicap of mild hearing loss is much less obvious. Approximately four in every 1000 children have a significant bilateral sensorineural hearing loss (Haggard and Pullan, 1989).

14.1.2 Unilateral hearing loss Approximately three in every 1000 school children have a unilateral hearing loss greater than 45 dBHL (Bess and Tharpe, 1986). Unilaterally hearing-impaired children have problems in: • hearing from the deaf side (head-shadow); • locating sound; • hearing in noise. They may be disadvantaged by as much as 19 dB (Giolas and Wark, 1968) in the noisy conditions of the classroom. Amplification in the form of a personal hearing aid and/or a radio hearing aid system may be appropriate. These children are more likely to be inattentive, distractible, lacking in confidence, withdrawn or anti-social. Preferential seating should be provided to give a good view of the teacher and to minimize interference from noise in the good ear. The child’s audiological, academic and social progress should be monitored so that if necessary intervention can occur at an early stage.

14.1.3 Tinnitus in children Tinnitus is common in hearing-impaired children. However very few children complain of tinnitus. This may be because children think it is

292

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

normal or because they cannot distinguish it from environmental sounds. Tinnitus may affect audiometric results as children do not realize when they are responding to tinnitus rather than test tones. It is possible for unreliable pure tone thresholds to lead to fitting of inappropriate hearing aids and consequent non-compliance with using aids. Children rarely receive help with their tinnitus (apart from hearing aids) and troublesome tinnitus amongst children is almost certainly underestimated. Tinnitus in children should be diagnosed and managed appropriately (see section 13.1).

14.1.4 Temporary conductive hearing loss The most common cause of hearing loss in children is a temporary condition known as secretory or serous otitis media. It is so common that most children are affected by it at some stage in their early years (British Association of Audiological Physicians, 1990). It is a self-limiting condition and most children grow out of it by about eight years old. The problem is caused by fluid in the middle ear, which prevents the efficient passage of sound from the eardrum. In normality, the middle ear cavity is air-filled and it remains so because it is ventilated by the Eustachian tube. This tube runs from the middle ear to the back of the throat. In infants the Eustachian tubes are shorter, narrower and less rigid than in adults and they are positioned more horizontally. Ventilation and drainage of the ear of a child is therefore less efficient. If the Eustachian tube becomes blocked, air cannot enter the middle ear. Air is gradually absorbed by the lining of the middle ear cavity and cannot be replaced. The result is relative negative pressure in the middle ear and a thin watery fluid is secreted into the cavity. If the condition is not resolved the fluid may thicken and eventually become glue-like, hence the name ‘glue ear’, which is sometimes given to the disorder. Blockage of the Eustachian tube may be caused by a number of factors, including upper respiratory tract infections, enlarged tonsils and adenoids, allergies and malformations. The resulting hearing loss often fluctuates dramatically between a mild and a marked impairment. It is usually bilateral and rarely more than 60 dBHL in degree. Fluctuating hearing loss may affect the ability to localize who is speaking and this may mean that the child misses some of the spoken message. The same words may also appear different from one occasion to the next and this may affect not only the child’s ability to process sound but also their development of reading and spelling. In general, temporary fluctuating losses create more difficulty in the noisy conditions of school than they do in the less adverse conditions of the home where speech can be clear and close to the child. Minor conductive losses may not require medical intervention but will usually be monitored. Tympanometry (see section 13.2) can provide a simple check

Paediatric provision

293

of middle ear function and if treatment is required this will usually be medical (see section 3.3.2) or educational. Behavioural problems are common as a result of misunderstanding and difficulty in following lessons. One possible solution to the problems of ‘slight’ hearing loss is the introduction of a sound field system into the classroom. This is a loudspeaker system for the class teacher (see section 14.4.3). Where speech and language development are delayed, a child may also be referred to a speech and language therapist. Personal hearing aids should only be fitted if medical advice has been sought.

14.2 ASSESSMENT AND DIAGNOSIS OF HEARING LOSS IN CHILDREN 14.2.1 Testing in sound field conditions (a) Stimuli used Sound field audiometric procedures are frequently used with young children and those who cannot tolerate headphones. They are also used to obtain measures (aided thresholds) from the child when wearing hearing aids. The stimuli used must be relatively frequency specific. Pure tones cannot be used because reflections would cause interference with the intensity of the signal. There could then be considerable variation in the signal strength at different locations in the room such that even a slight head movement could have a significant effect on the results (see Figure 14.1). The stimuli used must also be of some interest to the child under test. Warble tones and narrow-band noise are thought to be more interesting to children than pure tones. Stimuli used include: Intensity (dB SPL)

Figure 14.1. Intensity variation of a 50 dB SPL pure-tone due to standing waves. The diagram shows the sound level measured at various points in the room.

294

• • • •

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

frequency modulated or ‘warble’ tones (see section 1.1.8); narrow-band noise; noise makers – for example, chime bars; speech.

(b) The room acoustics The sound field in the test room is not a true free sound field (BS 7636:1993). A room with a true free sound field is one in which the direct field is the predominant influence in the room (an anechoic room). In a normal test room, the direct field only extends about 1 m from the sound source. The room in which testing is carried out is usually a quasi-free sound field. Its sound field is composed of direct and reverberant components. The type of room used for sound field measurements will affect the accuracy of the results. The room should be adequately sound treated. Furniture in the room should be kept to a minimum. Sound measurements must be obtained at the test position. Sound field audiometric equipment should be calibrated in the position in which it is to be used. Appropriate calibration is essential to obtain reasonably accurate hearing thresholds. Calibration involves measuring the sound pressure level at the test position and noting the difference between the audiometer dial setting and the measured values across the frequency range. A sound level meter with a remote microphone on a headband may be used to improve the accuracy of measurements, see Figure 14.2. (c) Conversion of dB(A) measurements Where testing is carried out via loudspeakers rather than using earphones, measurements may be taken in dBSPL or dB(A). An example of this is in distraction testing. The dB(A) scale is more generally used because it is less sensitive to low frequency background noise, which may interfere with recording low stimulus levels on the dBSPL scale. Measurements can only be made directly in dBHL if the speakers in the room are calibrated so that the dial reading is in dBHL. If the position of the speakers or the child being tested is changed, the set up must be re-calibrated. As we are generally most interested in results in dBHL, converting dBA results may assist in standardizing test results. Conversion of dB(A) to dBHL involves a degree of error as there will be some variation depending on:

Paediatric provision

295

Figure 14.2. A sound level meter with remote microphone used for measurements during sound field audiometry.

• • • •

the actual sound field in which the measurements take place; the stimuli used; the angle of the sound signal; the age of the children tested.

Conversion from dB(A) to dBSPL is straightforward and involves adding the figures shown in Table 14.2 to the dBA reading. Various studies have put forward results and in general differences are relatively small (Benyon and Munroe, 1993). Table 14.1 shows conversion figures.

296

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Table 14.1. Possible conversion figures (rounded to the nearest 5 dB) for dBA to dBHL. These figures should be subtracted from the dB(A) readings 250

500

1k

2k

4k

8k

Hz

5

0

0

0

5

10

dB SPL

Table 14.2. Conversion of dB(A) readings to dBSPL. These figures should be added to the dBA readings 250

500

1k

2k

4k

8k

Hz

5

0

0

0

5

10

dB SPL

14.2.2 Paediatric tests of hearing function Pure tone audiometry is not appropriate for very young children and different diagnostic tests may be used depending on the age and mental ability of the child. The principle tests in use are: • otoacoustic emissions; • brainstem evoked response (BSER) or auditory brainstem response (ABR); • distraction tests; • co-operative tests; • performance tests; • free-field visual response audiometry (VRA); • pure tone audiometry. Where ages are quoted these are intended only to provide a guide to the child’s approximate stage of development.

14.2.3 Otoacoustic emissions Otoacoustic emissions or ‘cochlear echoes’ are weak sounds produced by outer hair cell vibration of the cochlea (see section 2.2.2). The outer hair cells generate vibration that amplifies the peaks in the sound wave as it travels along the basilar membrane. A tiny amount of the vibration is ‘reflected’ back out of the cochlea and through the middle ear to the ear canal, where it can be measured as sound. Where there is an outer hair cell disorder, as is the case in most sensorineural hearing loss, otoacoustic emissions (OAEs) or cochlear echoes do not occur. Conductive hearing loss will also abolish the

Paediatric provision

297

otoacoustic emissions because a healthy middle ear is required to conduct them to the ear canal. The existence of otoacoustic emissions therefore indicates normal or near normal middle ear and cochlear function. Emissions can be absent even though hearing is normal but where there are no otoacoustic emissions and tympanometry has been used to rule out conductive loss, this is usually indicative of cochlear damage. Otoacoustic emissions are used in screening the hearing of newborn babies. A probe containing a microphone and a miniature loudspeaker is sealed in the ear canal, see Figure 14.3. The loudspeaker delivers a series of clicks (brief broadband signals) and the microphone picks up the evoked otoacoustic emissions. These are relayed to a computer for analysis and display of the results. The presence of evoked otoacoustic emissions (also called transient evoked otoacoustic emissions or TEOAEs) is a strong indicator of hearing thresholds better than 25 dBHL. However, otoacoustic emissions cannot be used to indicate hearing thresholds. The test usually used to obtain some indication of threshold is auditory brainstem response (ABR) testing also called brainstem evoked response (BSER) audiometry.

Figure 14.3. Otoacoustic emissions being used to screen a newborn baby. (Photograph courtesy of Otodynamics.)

298

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

14.2.4 Auditory brainstem response (ABR) or brainstem evoked response (BSER) audiometry Auditory brainstem response (ABR) or brainstem evoked response (BSER) is one type of evoked response audiometry (ERA) that can be used with young babies and other patients who are particularly difficult to test. Electrical potentials from the auditory pathways, in response to sounds, are recorded by electrodes attached to the baby’s head. All levels of the sensorineural part of the auditory system, from the hair cells in the cochlea to the cortex of the brain, respond electrically to sound. The auditory responses are processed by a computer and displayed as a multiwave form. Changes in electrical potentials due to auditory activity are so small that they must be ‘averaged’ over a period of time in order that they can be singled out from the random activity of the brain. Evoked response audiometry provides valuable objective results for a population that could not provide this information in any other way. Auditory brainstem response is the most widely used ERA for children. It may also be used in some cases of suspected non-organic hearing loss because no co-operation is required. The child has only to be still and may be sedated if necessary. Brainstem evoked response audiometry provides a good estimate of threshold, especially in the 2 kHz to 4 kHz region, and should be interpreted in the context of other clinical information.

14.2.5 Distraction tests Distraction tests are used both as a screening and a diagnostic test. They are suited to children between the ages of approximately six to eighteen months, that is from the time the baby can sit unsupported and turn its head towards a sound, until it ceases to be sufficiently interested in the sounds to continue to turn reliably. Two testers work as a team, one positioned at the front to attract and manipulate the child’s attention, the other stands behind the child and presents the sound signals (Figure 14.4). The object of the test is to record the quietest intensity at which the baby responds to a range of frequency-specific sounds. The sounds must be interesting to the baby and representative of low, mid and high frequency ranges. Examples of those in common use include: • low frequency – the voiced sound ‘oo-oo’ (approximately 500 Hz); • mid frequency – a G-chime bar (approximately 1600 Hz); • high frequency – a special high frequency rattle (above approximately 6.5 kHz) (Kettlety, 1987).

Paediatric provision

299

Figure 14.4. The position of two testers carrying out a distraction test. The baby sits upright on the mother’s knee. Tester 1 manipulates the baby’s attention while tester 2 presents the sound signals.

Responses must be obtained at 30 dB(A) to pass a screening test but in the diagnostic situation the intensity is raised until a response is obtained. The intensity is measured using a sound level meter. It is extremely important to be certain that the child is really responding to the auditory signal and not to other clues. Some children are very quick to respond to the touch of the tester’s breath, the sound of a footfall, the smell of perfume or the movement of a shadow. These are known, respectively, as tactile, auditory, olfactory or visual cues (Figure 14.5). Distraction tests appear very simple to the observer but they must be meticulously performed to be reliable.

Figure 14.5. A tester may obtain false positive responses during a distraction test if other cues are present, such cues may be auditory, visual, tactile or olfactory. (After Anon).

300

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

14.2.6 Co-operative tests Co-operative tests are used for children aged between about 18 months and two-and-a-half years, when the baby has become too ‘grown up’ to respond reliably to distraction techniques but is not yet able to perform the next level of test. This age group is, contrary to the name of the test, notoriously unco-operative. One tester is needed to carry out this simple speech test, which provides only limited low frequency information and is therefore used in conjunction with a brief high frequency distraction test. The child is supplied with bricks or similar toys and the tester gives simple instructions. There is a limited choice of instruction, such as ‘Give it to Mummy’, ‘Give it to Daddy’, ‘Give it to teddy’, and the lowest intensity at which the child can respond accurately is found. A child with normal hearing should be able to achieve this at a level of 40–45 dBA.

14.2.7 Performance tests Performance tests can be useful from the age of about two-and-a-half until the child is able to undertake pure tone audiometry. The child is trained or ‘conditioned’ to perform an action, such as placing a man in a boat, whenever he or she hears a ‘command’ sound, which for low frequencies is ‘go’ and for high frequencies is the sibilant ‘s’. The intensity of the command is gradually reduced until the child’s hearing threshold is obtained. The intensity is measured, as in all free-field tests, using a sound level meter.

14.2.8 Free-field visual response audiometry Visual response audiometry, often known as VRA, is a technique that requires more complex equipment than distraction tests but that can be used for the whole age range, from about six months until the child can perform pure tone audiometry. Loudspeakers are used to deliver frequencyspecific signals, in the form of warble tones or narrow-band noise. Young children do not find electronically produced tones very interesting and some form of visual reinforcement is therefore used, often in the form of a toy that lights up when the child responds correctly. If headphones are not worn, the information obtained will relate to the better ear and, when high intensifies are used, the signal can be distorted and no longer frequency specific. Nevertheless, a limited audiogram may be obtained in this way, usually providing points at 500 Hz, 1 kHz, (2 kHz) and 4 kHz.

14.2.9 Pure tone audiometry Pure tone audiometry should be used as soon as the child is able to cooperate reliably since the ears can be tested separately. Many children

Paediatric provision

301

from around the age of three can be trained to carry out a pure tone test if it is treated as a game. ‘Play techniques’ are used in which the child is taught to respond to the tones by performing some action, such as placing a peg in a board. A restricted range of frequencies is often tested, such as 500 Hz, 1 kHz, (2 kHz) and 4 kHz, because the child may lose concentration before a full test can be completed. Masking is also usually possible with children from about five years old, if the instructions are simplified and the ‘play-like’ nature of the test is retained.

14.3 HABILITATION OF HEARING-IMPAIRED CHILDREN 14.3.1 The habilitation process A multidisciplinary team is usually involved with the diagnosis and management of the hearing-impaired child. Such a team may include: • • • • • •

audiological physician or otologist; clinical or educational audiologist; teacher of the deaf; educational psychologist; social worker; other specialists.

In the initial stages, parents have to come to terms with the child’s impairment and it is usually the audiological physician or otologist who counsels the parents and who will answer any medical questions they may have. Parents may feel a sense of guilt, numbness, fear and isolation, feelings with which they have to come to terms before they can help their child (see section 12.1.4). After the initial diagnosis, support and counselling will be undertaken by a peripatetic teacher of the deaf, who will see the family on a regular basis, in the home and later in the school. The counselling needed to support parents is of great importance. The selection of appropriate hearing aids is central to the habilitation process in order to provide maximum use of residual hearing. The fundamental principles of hearing aid selection are the same for children as for adults but provision should be made as early as possible, with binaural fitting considered as the norm. It is also important that hearing aids are worn constantly from the beginning and that they are checked regularly by an adult to ensure they are working. Hearing aids must therefore be manageable for the family and child.

302

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Hearing aids for children usually need repairing at least once a year and replacing every three to four years (British Association of Audiological Physicians, 1990). In addition, new earmoulds are required several times a year and batteries need frequent replacement. There are three main types of personal hearing aid systems in use with hearing-impaired children at present: bodyworn, postaural and in-the-ear aids. The most widely used system is currently the postaural hearing aid. In-the-ear hearing aids are increasing in popularity but these have to be replaced or re-shelled at frequent intervals as the child grows. Where audiological and other factors allow for choice of the hearing aid system, parental feelings should be taken into consideration. If the parents of the child are not happy with the hearing aid system, the child is unlikely to make the best use of it. Many children are provided with commercial hearing aids under the National Health Service when it is felt there is a need that cannot be met by the standard range. Many deaf children are provided with radio hearing aids (see section 14.4.2) in addition to their personal aids. These overcome some of the problems of interference from background noise.

14.3.2 Fitting hearing aids to very young children The choice of hearing aids for very young children is difficult because audiometric information will be limited. The hearing aids must therefore be very flexible and the fitting must not be seen as being final. Frequent review appointments will be required in the early stages. The size of a small child’s ear canals has to be taken into account in the fitting, because there will be important differences from average adult ear canal data. A baby’s ear canal could have, for example, a volume of 0.5 cc whereas an ear simulator has a volume of 2 cc. The smaller ear canal volume will lead to a significant increase in sound pressure over that in the ear simulator. Insertion gain measurements using a probe tube microphone (see section 11.2) are very helpful in quantifying the baby’s real ear gain. The DSL (desired sensation level) prescription formula (Seewald, 1994 and 2000) is often used with children as it includes predicted values for children of varying age. Behind-the-ear or postaural hearing aids are routinely fitted to children. Where these are to be fitted to small children and babies, miniature postaural hearing aids should be used. Specific hearing aid features that may be desirable include: • • • •

direct audio input (for radio hearing aids); M-T switch (for hearing own voice as well as telecoil or audio input); locking battery drawer; locking volume control or automatic digital volume control.

Paediatric provision

303

Difficulties of fitting include creating satisfactory earmoulds and retention of the aids on tiny ears. Earmoulds should be made in a soft material and may need replacement as often as every 10 to 14 days in the early months when the baby is growing quickly. Impressions can be taken whilst the baby is asleep or being fed, as at this time the baby will be relatively still. Impressions should be taken slowly and carefully, using an addition cured silicone material (see section 10.1.2). Older children enjoy playing with the excess impression material; the task of making hedgehogs, worms and balls usually very successfully keeps them occupied while the impressions are setting. If children are not used to having impressions taken, it may help for them to watch first while the audiologist takes or pretends to take an impression of Mummy’s ear or even of a teddy bear’s or doll’s ear. Retention of the hearing aids on small ears can be facilitated using plastic rings or ‘huggies’ to which the hearing aids are attached – see Figure 14.6. The ring is fitted around the ear. Double-sided toupee tape is sometimes used to stick the aids to the head but this is not really suitable as a baby’s skin is very delicate.

(a)

(b)

(c)

Figure 14.6. (a) Hearing aid retention rings. (b) With the aid attached. (c) Placed on the child’s ear.

304

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

14.3.3 Children with complex needs The National Deaf Children’s Society (NDCS, 1996) suggests that up to 49% of children born with permanent bilateral hearing loss of moderate or greater degree will have additional needs such as visual problems or developmental delay. Most of these children can be assessed by modifying normal audiometric procedures. This could, for example, involve using play audiometry techniques at an older than normal age or accepting unusual responses. A response may be any change in the pre-stimulus state of behaviour. Extra and novel reinforcement of correct responses are often required to maintain the child’s attention, for example, using visual reinforcers such as colourful toys and puppets or flashing lights. It is also important to include ‘no sound’ trials to take account of any checking behaviour from the child. Tympanometry can be used to screen for middle ear problems and evoked response audiometry may be used where other forms of threshold testing are not possible. Sedation may be necessary and the results have to be interpreted cautiously as they may be influenced by sleep and sedation and also by neurological factors. Fitting and managing hearing aids may also call for creative thinking. Amplification must be seen in context and hearing aids must meet the needs of both the child and of his or her family.

14.3.4 Cochlear implants Cochlear implants are hearing aids that electrically stimulate the auditory nerve to produce a sensation of sound. Implantation involves a surgical procedure in which an electrode array is implanted into the cochlea. Different speech processing strategies are used in the various cochlear implants available, for example, the whole speech signal may be delivered or specific features of speech may be extracted. The components of the cochlear implant system are shown in Figure 14.7. The microphone of the unit is carried at ear level but the sound processor may be postaural or bodyworn. Following the operation and time for healing, the external parts of the implant system are attached and programmed. The programme is fine-tuned over several visits. The programme is often referred to as a ‘map’. This is really an electrical audiogram that shows electrical thresholds (T) and electrical comfort levels (C) for each electrode. The T and C levels may appear to change in the first few months after ‘switch-on’ as the child becomes accustomed to the signal and to the testing routine. When changes are made to the map these may alter the perceived sound quality of the implant signal. Young children are not able to give appropriate

Paediatric provision

305

Transmitter

Microphone

Magnet

Decoder Leads Electrodes

Speech processor

External parts

Implanted parts

Figure 14.7. Components of a cochlear implant. (After Maltby and Knight, 2000.)

feedback and, for these children, changes to the map will be based on behavioural observations made by parents and teachers. Sound field thresholds may also used to monitor the appropriateness of the map. Children who are implanted at an early age may develop speech and language in the same way as normal infants without active intervention. Older children and adults will need ongoing rehabilitation directed towards developing listening skills and spoken language. Each implant centre has guidelines as to who may benefit from implantation. Guidelines are continually being revised but currently (Archbold, 2000) children are being considered whose aided responses to sound field audiometry are worse than 55 dB(A) at 2 kHz and 4 kHz. Most centres require that children have worn hearing aids with well-fitting earmoulds for at least several months and that they show little functional benefit from their aids. Children with additional needs are considered by many but not all centres. Good educational support and a supportive motivated family with realistic expectations are both factors seen as likely to affect the longterm outcome. It is recognized that children born with profound hearing

306

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

loss need to receive an implant early and many centres implant children at less than two years old. Some older children are being implanted but these are generally children who were born hearing and then became profoundly deaf following an accident or illness such as meningitis. It is now evident that the majority of profoundly deaf children will hear more with a cochlear implant than with hearing aids and some centres are considering implants for severely deaf people.

14.4 CLASSROOM LISTENING 14.4.1 Classroom conditions The classroom presents a complex listening environment for children. They are expected to pay attention to the teacher’s speech and ignore irrelevant conversations and instructions, often in noisy conditions with several different activities going on simultaneously. The ‘soundscape’ (listening environment) is constantly changing. The signal-to-noise ratio changes as activities go from quiet to noisy and reverberation times vary as children move from classroom to, for example, hall or gymnasium. The signal children receive in the classroom may often be distorted by long reverberation times and masked by background noise. Children who have a hearing loss will have difficulty in interpreting speech in these difficult conditions. Even children with mild hearing losses may need a signal-tonoise ratio of as much as +30 dB to hear well. In a well-disciplined classroom the background noise is likely to be at least 60 dB(A) and the teacher would have to speak at around 90 dB(A) to achieve this. Personal or sound field radio hearing aid systems (see sections 14.4.2 and 14.4.3) can help to improve the signal-to-noise ratio and reduce strain on the teacher’s voice. The signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio is the ratio between the signal level and the level of the background noise. It is expressed in dB. A positive value indicates that the signal is higher than the background noise. A negative value indicates that it is lower than the background noise. An adult with normal hearing can usually discriminate speech adequately in situations where the signal-to-noise ratio is 0 dB and sometimes even less. However to discriminate speech comfortably a signal-to-noise ratio of approximately +15 dB is needed. When hearing aids are being used, a higher signal-to-noise ratio is required than with normal hearing. This is probably due to distortion in the hearing aids (see section 8.3.5) and loss of information due to hair cell loss in the cochlea (see section 2.2.2). Classrooms in which deaf children are being taught should provide a signal-to-noise ratio of at least +15 dB and a reverberation time no greater than 0.4 seconds. This is often not the case. For example, in a recent

Paediatric provision

307

survey of acoustic conditions in one particular secondary school (Maltby, 1999) the author found signal-to-noise ratios in normal classrooms were between +5 dB and +10 dB but the most destructive feature of the school acoustic environment was the high level of reverberation. Reverberation times measured in normal classrooms varied from 0.77 seconds to 2.2 seconds (in a science laboratory). Reverberation is the reflection of sound. With normal hearing, reverberation is only a problem if the reverberation time is very long. The ability to hear clearly is compromised if the direct signal and the reflected signal arrive at the hearing aid microphone at different times (see section 1.1.7). Reverberation time can be measured as the time it takes for a sound to cease reflecting and it can also be calculated mathematically using the Sabine formula to provide a fairly accurate measure of RT60. RT60 is the time taken for the sound level to drop by 60 dB. Reverberation time is dependent upon the volume of the room and the absorption of the materials within it. One sabin is equivalent to one square foot of material with perfect absorption. This is given a coefficient of 1. Absorption coefficients vary between 0, which is fully reflective, and 1, which is fully absorbent. The absorption is calculated as the sum of all the separate frequency absorption values of each surface material within the room. Reduction in reverberation time in the classroom may be achieved by: • Siting the classroom away from sources of noise. • Careful use of acoustic materials. Absorbent materials tend to absorb high frequencies to a much greater extent than low frequencies. Acoustic treatment of the floor and back wall of the classroom is usually very successful. Reflected sound from the ceiling and side walls generally have a positive rather than a negative effect. • Good classroom management by the teacher. • Appropriate hearing aid technology – for example, sound field amplification. Degradation of the speech signal for the individual can be measured to some extent using speech perception tests (see section 11.4.2). Alternatively, Bruel and Kjaer’s Rapid Speech Transmission Index (RASTI) can be used to measure the effect of the acoustic environment on a speech-like signal. Perfect reception of the RASTI signal is given a score of 1.0. Leavitt and Flexer (1991) took RASTI measurements at 17 seating positions in an occupied classroom. They demonstrated that a perfect RASTI score of 1.0 could only be achieved at about 15 cm from the teacher. The best seating position was the centre seat in the front row, which gave a

308

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

RASTI score of 0.83. In the back row, the RASTI score dropped to 0.55, which is equivalent to a loss of 45% in speech intelligibility.

14.4.2 Radio hearing aid systems Personal hearing aids depend for their effectiveness on being used close to the speaker, in order to achieve a high signal-to-noise ratio. When the speaker moves away the increasing distance quickly results in a weak signal that is lost in the masking effect of background noise. In schools, background noise and reverberation are often such as to reduce the effectiveness of hearing aids significantly (Figure 14.8).

Figure 14.8. As the distance away from the speaker increases, the intensity of the signal falls (according to the inverse square law). Background noise then interferes with the speech signal received by the hearing aid.

Radio frequency modulated (FM) systems are used to provide a short microphone distance. The teacher wears the microphone and the pupil wears a radio receiver, which is linked to a hearing aid. The signal is transmitted to the pupil (Figure 14.9), regardless of his or her position, up to a distance of about 100 m from the microphone. Radio hearing aids are used at school and at home but their use is restricted by their expense and their appearance, which is in most cases similar to a bodyworn hearing aid.

Figure 14.9. The basic format of a radio hearing aid.

Paediatric provision

309

There are two basic types of radio systems (Figure 14.10). Type 1 is a complete radio hearing aid, in which the radio receiver is also a bodyworn hearing aid. These tend to by used by some profoundly deaf children, although they could equally well be used for children with mild hearing losses who do not otherwise use a hearing aid. The main reason for not doing so is the expense, as radio hearing aids are very costly.

Figure 14.10. The child’s unit in each of the types of radio system.

Type 2 is a system in which the transmitted signal is fed directly from the radio receiver into the child’s individual hearing aid; this is known as ‘direct input’. This is the type most widely used because the child continues to use their own hearing aid and an unchanged frequency response. The radio receiver is usually linked directly into the personal hearing aid via a lead and shoe (although there are also some radio receivers that are housed in a large ‘shoe’ attached to the postaural aid – they do not have a lead or bodyworn unit). In some cases the type 2 system with the bodyworn receiver is used with a neck loop (instead of the connection via shoe and lead), which permits the whole receiving unit to be hidden under clothing. However, the performance of the induction loop tends to be inferior to that of direct input due to a reduced low frequency response and an increased tendency to interference, mainly from fluorescent lights and other electrical sources.

14.4.3 Sound field radio systems A sound field system is basically a miniature public address system for the classroom. Loudspeakers are positioned at various points to provide an equal sound level throughout the room. The teacher uses a radio microphone and transmitter, exactly as in the case of individual radio hearing aids but pupils do not have to wear any equipment as they receive the

310

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

signal via the loudspeakers. The improved sound level in the classroom can help all children to hear more clearly by improving the signal-to-noise ratio.

14.4.3 Educational provision Many hearing-impaired children will need educational support from the time of diagnosis throughout their education. Most hearing-impaired children are educated within the ordinary or ‘mainstream’ school system, with varying degrees of support. Ordinary schools provide an environment in which the child can gain experience of normal language and behaviour, benefit from a wide curriculum, make friends among local children and, in general, learn to adjust to being part of the hearing world. For children with a significant hearing loss, support is usually provided in the form of personal hearing aids, a radio system and the services of a peripatetic or visiting teacher of the deaf. However, ordinary schools tend to be large, noisy and often intolerant places and some children are unable to cope. Hearing-impaired children may be placed in: • normal ‘mainstream’ school; • special class, or ‘unit’, within the ordinary school; • special school. Children who need significant extra support may be provided with a ‘statement of special educational needs’, under the 1981 Education Act. A statement formalizes the child’s special needs and ways of meeting these, while reinforcing the parent’s right to be involved in the process. A special class or ‘partially hearing unit’ is an attempt to provide ‘the best of both worlds’, with children integrated into ordinary classes as far as possible but having an individual programme tailored to their needs and with access to a full-time teacher of the deaf. Special school provision has decreased as children are increasingly placed within the normal school environment. Most of the special schools that do remain cater for the needs of particular groups of severely and profoundly deaf children, such as those who are: • • • • •

in need of a high level of support; of a particular religion; academically very able; using an alternative method of communication; multiply handicapped.

Paediatric provision

311

Children in special schools have less access to ‘normal’ patterns of speech and of behaviour and may be less prepared for coping with the demands of everyday life but special schools can provide a concentration of specialist staff and facilities. Children are educated within a protected environment and in very small classes, consisting of not more than 10 children. Classrooms can be sound treated and specialist equipment often includes group hearing aids and speech training units. A group hearing aid is a hard-wired system in which each child wears headphones linked to a desk unit capable of providing high output over an extended frequency range (Figure 14.11) and, since the ear is not blocked, advantage is also taken of ear canal resonance. The teacher uses a microphone that is also wired into the system. Speech training equipment includes individual hard-wired hearing aid units, often with a visual display to help the child monitor his or her speech. Approaches to the education of very severely and profoundly deaf children vary markedly, especially between an ‘oral’ or ‘manual’ approach. All systems make use of hearing aids and strive to develop language and learning. Unfortunately, deep divisions exist between the supporters of the various approaches, which is often unhelpful to parents because they may receive conflicting advice. Most hearing-impaired children can learn to communicate by speech if their loss is diagnosed early and treated

Figure 14.11. A group hearing aid in use at a school for deaf children. (Photograph courtesy of St John’s School, Boston Spa.) The child on the right is wearing the headphones of the group aid. The child on the left is using the system with a cochlear implant.

312

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

promptly with effective hearing aids and skilled guidance. In essence, ‘oral’ methods seek to develop speech in a natural manner, while manual or ‘total’ communication provides support to the spoken pattern in one of a number of ways, namely using: • sign language – this is often said to be the natural language of the deaf community but unfortunately few hearing people are able to sign, except in a slow and clumsy manner; • finger-spelling – this can be likened to the written pattern and is of limited use until the child has achieved some proficiency in language; • cued speech – this is a method of communication in which hand positions are used to supplement the information available through lip-reading. Special consideration must be given to the education of hearing-impaired children. Hearing loss provides a starting point but is not a sufficient basis on which to make a decision. The child’s whole development and his or her family’s wishes should be considered in selecting an appropriate school placement.

14.5 SUMMARY Hearing impairment in childhood hinders development of the ability to communicate and to make normal progress in school. Early diagnosis and appropriate management are among the factors that can reduce the handicapping effect of hearing loss. Evaluation of hearing in early childhood necessitates the use of special techniques appropriate to a child’s age and stage of development. Educational placement should take full account of the child’s needs and the parents’ wishes. Great emphasis is placed on the full use of residual hearing through amplification in all educational environments and specialist teachers of the deaf provide support. Most hearing-impaired children are able to receive their education with the normally hearing in ‘mainstream’ school, with the necessary specialist support.

FURTHER READING Bess FH, Gravel JS, Tharpe AM (1996). Amplification for Children with Auditory Deficits. Nashville TN: Bill Wilkerson Center Press. British Society of Audiology (2000). Recommended Protocols for Neonatal Hearing Screening and Assessment. Reading: BSA. Davies H, Fallowfield L (1991) Counselling and Communication in Health Care. Chichester: Wiley & Sons.

Paediatric provision

313

Delta (2000) Deaf Children Talking. Deaf Education through Listening and Talking (Delta). Delta: Haverhill. Gregory S et al. (eds) (1998) Issues in Deaf Education. London: David Fulton. Maltby M, Knight P (2000) Audiology for Teachers and other Professionals. London: David Fulton. McCormick B (ed.) (1995) Paediatric Audiology 0–5 years. London: Whurr. McCormick, Archbold S, Sheppard S (eds) (1994) Cochlear Implants for Young Children. London: Whurr. McCracken W, Laoide-Kemp S (eds) (1997) Audiology in Education. London: Whurr. Murgatroyd S (1985) Counselling and Helping. London: Methuen. National Deaf Children’s Society (2000/2001) NDCS Quality Standards in Paediatric Audiology. London: The National Deaf Children’s Society. Northern JL, Downs MP (1991). Hearing in Children. 4 edn. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Stokes J (ed.) (1999). Hearing Impaired Infants. Support in the First Eighteen Months. London: Whurr. Watson L, Gregory S, Powers S (1999) Deaf and Hearing Impaired Pupils in Mainstream Schools. London: David Fulton Publishers.

Glossary

A-scale The weighting network used with a sound level meter for freefield sound measurements. The A-scale approximates to the inverted 40 phon equal loudness curve. Acoustic feedback The excitation of the microphone by sound generated from the receiver of the same system. Acoustic neuroma Benign eighth nerve tumour. Acoustic ohm Unit of acoustic impedance. Acoustic reflex Contraction of middle ear muscles in response to loud sound. Acoustic trauma Noise damage due to sudden impulse noise of high intensity. Acoustics Study of science of sound. Action potential Brief electrical discharge that occurs when a nerve cell is activated. Acute Short and severe, (of 21 days or less duration). Adaptation (auditory) Reduction in hearing sensitivity within a brief time of the sound onset. Adhesion New and abnormal tissue growth due to inflammation. Admittance The ease with which sound waves pass through. Air–bone gap The difference in dB between the air conduction reading on an audiogram and the bone conduction reading for the same ear. If 10 dB or greater indicates a conductive element. Algorithm A set of rules. Alport’s syndrome Kidney disorder combined with hearing and sight defects. Ambient Surrounding or background. Amplitude The maximum displacement of any wave from its equilibrium position. Analgesic Pain-killing drug, for example aspirin. Anechoic With no echoes or significant sound reflection: ‘dead’. ANSI American National Standards Institute. 314

Glossary

315

Anoxia Lack of oxygen. Aphasia Disorder of central nervous system causing difficulty with speech and language. Artificial ear A 6 cc coupling device used in audiometer earphone calibration. Artificial mastoid Calibration device for bone vibrators, which simulates the mechanical impedance of an average normal human mastoid. Atresia Absence of an opening. Atrophy Wasting away due to cell degeneration. Attenuation Reduction. Audiogram A graph showing a person’s hearing thresholds for pure tones. Audiometry The measurement of hearing. Auditory filters Overlapping band-pass filters representing filtering in the cochlea. Auditory training Teaching a hearing impaired person to make best use of residual hearing. Aural Of the ear. Aural–oral approach A method of teaching hearing impaired children using speech and hearing optimally. Auricle Pinna. Auropalpebral reflex (APR) Eyeblink in response to loud sound. Automatic gain control (AGC) Automatic reduction in gain of a hearing aid. Compression. Azimuth Distance in degrees, for example 0° azimuth = straight ahead; 90° azimuth = to person’s right. Barotrauma Fluid in the middle ear due to sudden pressure change. Behavioural audiometry Assessment of hearing by noting bodily responses. Békésy audiometry Automatic audiometry. Benign Not cancerous. Binaural summation Improvement in hearing threshold when hearing via both ears. Usually at least 3 dB and may be much more. Brief tone Tone of 500 ms or less. BSI British Standards Institution. Calibration Checking, and adjusting if necessary, the output of a measurement device, such as an audiometer. Capillaries Small blood vessels. Central In brain and/or spinal cord. Cholesteatoma Cyst-like growth in the middle ear containing shed skin.

316

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Chronic Having lasted a long time (over 8 weeks). Click A short impulse of sound, too short in duration for its characteristics to be fully perceived. CMV Cytomegalovirus disease. Cochlear microphonic Electrical output from cochlear hair cells, following input signal. Compliance Opposite of stiffness; ability to give. Compression (1) Limiting of maximum output, using automatic gain control to reduce the gain beyond a predetermined intensity level. (See also compression limiting and dynamic range compression.) (2) Air at more than atmospheric pressure (as in the compressions of a sound wave). Compression limiting A method of limiting output with low distortion. Compression limiting can be input or output compression but will have a high kneepoint and a high compression ratio in order to avoid saturation whilst maintaining linear amplification for as long as possible. Conditioning Rewarding of required behaviour – used widely in assessment of children. Congenital Present at birth. Contralateral On the opposite side. Critical band The narrow band of noise required to mask a pure-tone signal. Cross-hearing Sound presented to one ear is perceived in the other by vibration of the skull. Curvilinear compression Compression with a compression ratio that increases as the input increases. Derecruitment Abnormally slow growth of loudness, usually due to disorder of auditory nerve. Dichotic Affecting each ear differently. Difference limen (for example, of intensity or frequency) The smallest detectable difference between two signals. Digital hearing aid A hearing aid in which the electrical signal is converted to digital values for modification before being converted back to an electrical signal which is passed to the receiver. Diotic Identical signal to each ear. Diplacusis One pure tone appears to the listener as two or more tones. Directional microphone One that is more responsive to sound from one direction – normally the front. Distortion Any unwanted sound present in the output that was not present in the input. Diuretic Drug to increase urination.

Glossary

317

Down’s syndrome (also called Down syndrome) A congenital abnormality, formerly known as mongolism. Features include mental retardation, mongoloid eyes, flattened facial features, short, broad hands and feet, small pinnae, narrow ear canals and a high incidence of conductive and sensorineural hearing loss. Dynamic range The difference in dB between the threshold of hearing and the threshold of discomfort. Dynamic range compression Compression that allows for the client’s reduced dynamic range by amplifying low intensity input more than high intensity input and keeps output below uncomfortable loudness level. Earhook That part of a postaural aid that fits over the ear – also called the elbow. Earphone A loudspeaker at the ear. Ear simulator A coupler that simulates the acoustic characteristics of an average adult ear. Effective gain The difference between aided and unaided thresholds. Effusion An abnormal outpouring of fluid. Electro-acoustic device A device that converts electrical to acoustic signals and vice versa. Electrocochleography Recording electrical signals (action potentials) from the eighth nerve. Environmental microphone A microphone that picks up airborne sound – for example, an environmental microphone may be built into a radio hearing aid so the pupils can hear themselves and their colleagues as well as the teacher. Fall time The time needed for a signal to decay by 60 dB from its steady state. Feedback (acoustic) The whistling that occurs from a hearing aid when sound leaks from the receiver and is picked up and reamplified via the microphone. Feedback Information that is used to maintain or modify performance. Filter (acoustic) Allows some sounds to pass but attenuates others. Formant A special pattern of speech sounds, determined by the vocal cords and the resonant cavities of the vocal tract, giving each vowel its recognizable quality. Fossa Groove. Free-field Open space – or an area with boundaries that are negligible for the test. Frequency analyser A sound level meter with an octave band (or other)

318

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

filter. Displays amplitude versus frequency on graph of input. Fulcrum Pivot. Functional gain Real ear gain. Functional hearing Non-organic or psychogenic loss. Fundamental frequency The lowest frequency in a periodic waveform. Harmonic A frequency that is a whole number multiple of the pure tone to which it is related. Haematoma Blood clot due to a break in a blood vessel. Hertz A unit used in the measurement of frequency of sound, equivalent to the number of cycles per second. High compression ratio One that is 5:1 or more – having greater compression. High-pass filter Reduces low frequencies while allowing high frequencies to pass unaffected. Homeostasis Equilibrium – achieving a normal balance. Horn A tapered sound tube. Hyperacusis Abnormally sensitive hearing. Idiopathic Cause unknown. Immitance Impedance or admittance. Impedance (acoustic) Resistance to the passage of sound. Impedance match Making the resistance of two connecting parts equal. Incidence The number of cases in a given population (for example, as a number of live births). Incident wave Any wave that has its path interrupted by an object; the wave is then said to be incident on this object. Induction coil Picks up electromagnetic signals from a loop amplifier; activated in a hearing aid by the ‘T’ switch. Inflammation Sore, swollen, red area. The body’s response to injury or infection. Insertion gain The difference between the gain of the open ear and the gain of the ear wearing a hearing aid: aided – unaided real ear gain. Insertion loss The difference between the gain of the open ear and that of an occluded ear. In situ In the natural position. Intelligibility The degree to which speech can be understood. Interaural attenuation The degree to which sound is reduced as it crosses the head. Minimum interaural attenuation is 40 dB for air conducted signals and 0 dB for bone conduction. Intermodulation Frequencies in the output that are the sum and the difference of two or more input frequencies and their harmonics.

Glossary

319

Intonation Pitch variation. Ipsilateral On the same side. Isthmus A narrowed part of an organ or tissue. Labyrinthitis Inflammation of the labyrinth. Latency The time delay between a stimulus and the response to that stimulus. Lateralization When sound appears to be heard on one side although the signal was placed on the other side or in the centre of the head (as in certain tuning fork tests). Lesion An injury. Lexicon Vocabulary. Ligaments Join bone to bone. Linear A straight line, this applies when a change of input causes the same change in output. Localization Ability to pinpoint a sound source. Loop (amplifier) An amplifying system which uses electromagnetic induction. A loop of wire is placed around the room and a current is induced in a coil within the hearing aid. Helps to overcome interference from background noise. Loudspeaker Apparatus that converts electrical impulses into sound. Low-pass filter Allows low frequency sound to pass, but attenuates high frequencies. Mainstream Education within a normal school. Malignant Cancerous, may cause death. Mandibulofacial dysplasia Treacher Collin’s syndrome. Manometer An instrument to measure pressure. Manual audiometry As carried out by the hearing aid dispenser or audiologist by the normal methods. Masker An instrument used in the management of tinnitus; produces a continuous masking noise. Masking Raising of the threshold of hearing for one sound by the introduction of another. Maximum power Saturation or output sound pressure level. The greatest amount of sound pressure output or intensity that the hearing aid can produce under any circumstances. Ménière’s disorder Idiopathic episodic endolymphatic hydrops. A syndrome or disorder in which there is fluctuating sensorineural hearing loss, vertigo and tinnitus, due to excessive fluid pressure in the inner ear.

320

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Meningitis Inflammation of the brain lining. Mixed loss A hearing loss that is a combination of conductive and sensorineural loss. Monaural Of one ear. Monitored Regulated – often of live voice using a sound level meter. Morbidity Indicative of disease. Most comfortable level (MCL) There is an area, within the residual hearing area, in which sounds are perceived as comfortable. Tests exist to find the lower and upper limits of this area and the MCL is approximately half-way between these limits. No standardized procedure exists to find the MCL and it is therefore rarely used. Myringoplasty Surgery to repair a perforated tympanic membrane. Myringotomy Surgical incision of tympanic membrane. Narrow band A small range of frequencies. Neckloop A small loop of wire worn around the user’s neck, rather than having a loop placed around the room (see ‘Loop’). Neoplasm A new tumour (benign or malignant). Neuroma A benign tumour growing from the fibrous covering of a peripheral nerve. Noise (1) Unwanted sound or unwanted electrical signal. (2) Aperiodic or non-periodic sound. Non-invasive Not involving surgery. Non-organic Not of physical origin, as in psychological or fake. Null Negative (as in a negative response) or void. Nystagmus Involuntary beating movements of the eyes. Objective Able to be observed or measured; not subjective. Occluded Closed. Occlusion effect An apparent improvement in hearing by bone conduction when the external auditory meatus is occluded. Omnidirectional microphone Accepts sound equally from all directions. On-effect The greatest response, which occurs at the onset of a signal. Oscillator A sound source. Osteogenesis imperfecta Brittle bones. Otalgia Earache. Otitis Inflammation of the ear. Otitis media Inflammation of the middle ear. Otolaryngology Ear, nose and throat (ENT) medical specialty. Otology Ear medical specialty.

Glossary

321

Otorrhoea Discharge from the ear. Otosclerosis Bone growth disorder affecting stapes and causing conductive hearing loss. Ototoxic Potentially poisonous to the ear. Over-masking Too much masking, which may affect the test ear and worsen its threshold. Overshoot An initial level reached which is greater than the steady state of a signal. Paget’s disease Thickening and softening of bones, especially of skull. Palsy Paralysis. Paracusis Abnormal hearing (see Willis’ paracusis). Parameter A variable or attribute. Pascal Unit of pressure equivalent to 1 Nm2. Perinatal Around the time of birth. Peripheral Not within the central nervous system. Phase Part of the period of a sound wave – can be expressed in degrees. Phon A unit of equal loudness. Phoneme The smallest individual speech sound. Phonetic balance Having the same distribution of speech sounds as a random sample of everyday conversational English. Pip A pure tone with a rapid rise time and having a steady state that is no more than one cycle in length. Polarity Positive or negative (as in electricitv). Pontine In that part of the brainstem known as the pons. Postauricular Behind the ear. Postlingual After the acquisition of speech. Potentiometer Variable control in a hearing aid, adjusted using a screwdriver. Prelingual Before the acquisition of speech. Presbyacusis Loss of hearing with old age. Probe (tube) microphone Used in real ear measurements to measure sound from near the tympanic membrane. Prosthesis An artificial replacement for an impaired body part. Pseudohypacusis Non-organic or functional hearing loss. Psychoacoustics Concerned with the relationship between measured signals and their subjective attributes. Quiescent current Current in a transistor in the absence of a driving or input signal. Receiver A term coined by the hearing aid industry to mean ‘loudspeaker’.

322

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Recruitment Abnormal loudness growth, usually found with cochlear impairment. Redundancy Part of the speech message that can be omitted without loss of meaning. Rehabilitation Therapy to help restore (normal) functioning. Reliability Consistency – how repeatable is a test. Residual hearing That part of the normal dynamic range that the impaired person is left with. Resonance The reinforcement of sound by reflection. Resonant frequency The reinforcement of a particular frequency due to natural synchronous vibration Retrocochlear Beyond the cochlea. Reverberation Continuation of sound by reflecting or echoing. Rise time The time taken for a signal to reach its steady state. Roll off Rate of attenuation in dB per octave. Room acoustics How the design of a room affects the sound within it. Rubella German measles. Saturation Maximum – any further increase in input will cause no increase in output. Sensation level Amount in dB above the individual’s threshold. Sensorineural Impairment caused in or beyond the cochlea. Sequelae After effects of disease. Sibilant High frequency consonant of a hissing nature, for example ‘s’ as in sue, ‘S’ (or ‘sh’) as in shoe. Signal to noise ratio Signal level compared to the competing noise. Usually expressed as signal minus noise, for example, a signal of 60 dBA with a competing noise level of 50 dBA gives S/N of + 10 dB. Signs Signs of a disorder are whatever features are noted by the doctor, for example swelling, discharge, redness. Sintered mesh A filter made of partially fused metal. Sound field Containing sound waves, for example in a room. Sound level meter A device to measure sound pressure in dB. Sound pressure level SPL – a scale in which 0 dB = 20 micro Pascals. Spectrograph A three-dimensional display of the energy of speech. Frequency and time are represented by the two axes of the graph. Intensity is shown by the darkness of the trace. Speculum Examination tip used with an otoscope. Speech spectrum The average level of the speech sounds. Speech reception threshold The faintest level at which a person can identify 50% in a speech test. Speech reading Lip-reading – but includes use of all visual cues not just those visible on the lips.

Glossary

323

Spondee A two-syllable word with equal stress on each syllable, for example football. Stapedectomy Removal of the stapes and replacement with a prosthesis. Stenosis Narrowing of the canal, as in stenosis of the external auditory meatus. Submucous Below the skin and surface tissue. Supra-aural On (against) the ear. Suprasegmental Features of speech that add to the phonemes, for example time, intonation, pitch, loudness. Suprathreshold Above threshold. Sweep frequency A tone that gradually changes across a frequency range. Symptoms Features that are complained of by a patient, for example pain, throbbing, heat, noises. Syndrome A group of features that characterize a disorder. Telecoil Induction coil in loop amplification system. Temporal Concerned with time. Tendons Join muscle to bone. Tinnitus Noises in the ear or head with no external source. Tone burst Tone with rapid rise time and short duration. Tone decay Decrease in hearing sensitivity when a tone is held for a short time, for example 1 min or 3 min. Auditory adaptation. Transducer A device to change one type of energy to another, for example sound energy to electricity. Transient tone A brief tone, of 500 ms or less. Trauma Sudden injury. Trimmer An adjustable element. Potentiometer. Tympanometry Measurement of the ease or difficulty with which sound passes through the eardrum. Unilateral Of one side. Unoccluded Open. Upward spread of masking frequency sounds.

Low frequency sounds mask higher

Validity The degree to which a test measures what it was intended to measure. Vent A hole drilled through an ear mould, usually to release unwanted low frequency sounds. Vertex Crown or top of the head. Vertigo Disturbance of balance.

324

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Vibrotactile Feeling vibration. Viseme Phonemes that appear the same to a lip-reader, for example ‘p’, ‘b’ and ‘m’. Warble tone A frequency modulated tone; the tone varies around a central frequency. Used to avoid standing waves in free-field testing. Wavelength The distance covered in one cycle of a sound. White noise Broad band noise in which each frequency is presented at equal intensity. Willis’ paracusis An apparent ability to hear better in the presence of background noise. Also called paracusis Willisi. Zwislocki coupler One particular model of occluded ear simulator. Simulates the acoustic impedance of the average adult ear.

References

Allen JB, Jeng PS (1990) Loudness growth in half octave bands (LGOB); a procedure for the assessment of loudness. Journal of Acoustic Society of America 88: 745–53. ANSI (1987) ANSI S322: Specification for hearing aid characteristics. American Standards Institute. Archbold S (2000) Personal communication. Ashley J (1991) The silent house. In Taylor G, Bishop J (eds) Being Deaf: The experience of deafness. Milton Keynes: The Open University. Bench J, Kowal A, Bamford JM (1979) The BKB (Bamford–Kowal–Bench) Sentence lists for partially hearing children. British Journal of Audiology 13: 108–12. Benyon G, Munro K (1993) A discussion of current field calibration procedures. British Journal of Audiology 27: 427–35. Berger KW (1988) A hearing aid fitting method. Audiology in Practice 5: 1. Berger KW, Hagberg EN (1989) An examination of binaural selection criteria. Hearing Instruments 40: 1(32), 44–6. Berger KW, Hagberg EN, Rane RL (1980) A re-examination of the one-half gain rule. Ear and Hearing 1: 223–5. Berger K, Hagberg E, Rane R (1984) Prescription of Hearing Aids, Rationale, Procedures and Results. Revised edition. Kent, Ohio: Herald Publishing House. Bess FH, Tharpe AM (1986) An introduction to unilateral hearing loss in children. Ear and Hearing 7(1): 3–13. Boothroyd A (1968) The Arthur Boothroyd (AB) Word Lists. Manchester: Manchester University. British Association of Audiological Physicians (1990) Paediatric Audiological Medicine – Into the 1990’s, policy document. The British Association of Audiological Physicians. British Society of Audiology (1981) Recommended procedure for pure-tone audiometry using a manually operated instrument. British Society of Audiology 15: 213–16. British Society of Audiology (1986) Recommendations for masking in pure-tone threshold audiometry. British Journal of Audiology 20: 307–14. British Society of Audiology (1987) Recommended procedure for Rinne and Weber tuning fork tests. British Journal of Audiology 21, 229–30. British Society of Audiology (1987) Recommended procedure for uncomfortable loudness level (ULL) British Journal of Audiology 21: 231.

325

326

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

British Society of Audiology (1989) Recommended format for audiogram forms. British Journal of Audiology 23: 265–6. British Society of Audiology (1991) Proposals for Recommendations for a Room for Hearing Aid Fitting. Reading: British Society of Audiology. British Society of Audiology (1998) Recommended Minimum Standard for Cleaning Specula. Reading: British Society of Audiology. British Standards Institution (1995) BS EN 60645-1. Audiometers – Part 1: Pure tone audiometers. London: British Standards Institution. British Standards Institution (1995) BS EN 60645-2. Specification for Audiometers. London: British Standards Institution. British Standards Institution (1998) BS EN 60118-4. Hearing Aids: Magnetic field strength in audio-frequency induction loops for hearing aid purposes. London: British Standards Institution. British Standards Institution (1999) BS EN ISO 389-4. Specification for Reference Levels for Narrow Band Masking Noise. London: British Standards Institution. British Standards Institution (2000) BS EN ISO 389-1: 2000: Acoustics- Part 1: Standard reference zero for the calibration of pure-tone air conduction audiometers. London: British Standards Institution. Brookes DN, Geoghegan PM (1992) Non-organic hearing loss in young persons: transient episode or indicator of deep-seated difficulty. British Journal of Audiology, 26(6): 347–50. Byrne D, Dillon H (1986) The National Acoustic Laboratory (NAL) New procedure for selecting the gain and frequency response of a hearing aid. Ear and Hearing 7: 4. Byrne D, Parkinson A, Newall P (1991) Modified hearing aid selection for severe/profound hearing losses. In Studebaker GA, Bess FH, Beck LB (eds) The Vanderbilt Hearing Aid Report II. Parkton MD: York Press Inc. Carhart R (1957) Clinical determination of abnormal auditory adaptation. Archives of Otolaryngology 65: 32–9. Carhart R (1965) Monaural and binaural discrimination against competing sentences. International Audiology 4: 5–10. Conrad R (1977) The reading ability of deaf school leavers. Journal of British Society of Educational Psychology 47: 138–48. Cornelisse LE, Seewald RE, Jamieson DG (1994) Fitting wide dynamic range compression hearing aids: the DSL [i/o] approach. The Hearing Journal 47(10): 23–9. Cox RM, Alexander GC (1995) The abbreviated profile of hearing aid benefit (APHAB) Ear and Hearing 16: 176–86. Csermak (2000) A primer on a dual microphone system. The Hearing Review, 7(1): 56–60. Davis H, Silverman SR (1978) Hearing and Deafness. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston. Department of Health (1994) Building note 12, Supplement 3, ENT and Audiology Clinics/Hearing Aid Centres. Leeds: NHS. Department of Health and Social Security (1974) Hospital ENT Services. A design guide. London: Department of Health and Social Security. Department of Health (1994) Building note12, supplement 3, ENT and Audiology Clinics/Hearing Aid Centres, NHS, Leeds. Dermody P, Byrne D (1975) Loudness summation with binaural hearing aids. Hearing Instruments 26: 22–3.

References

327

Dillon H (1988) Compression in hearing aids. In Sandlin R (ed.) Handbook of Hearing Aid Amplification. Volume 1. Boston: College-Hill. Dillon H (1999) NAL-NL1: A new procedure for fitting non-linear hearing aids. Hearing Journal 52(4): 10–16. Duncan B (1988) Which Amplifier Technology? Studio Sound (December): 60–2. Duracell (1990) Guide for Designers. Crawley: Duracell. Fisch L (1983) Integrated development and maturation of the hearing system. British Journal of Audiology 17: 137–54. Fry D (1961) Word and sentence tests for use in speech audiometry. Lancet 2: 197–9. Gatehouse S (1990) Acclimatisation and auditory deprivation as explanations for changes in speech identification abilities in hearing aid users. Proceedings of the Institute of Acoustics 12(10): 31–7. Giolas TG, Wark DJ (1968) Communication problems associated with unilateral hearing loss. Speech and Hearing Disorders 41: 336–43. Goldstein DP, Stevens SDG (1981) Audiological rehabilitation: management model I. Audiology 20: 432–52. Green R (1988) The relative accuracy of coupler and behavioural estimates of the real ear gain of a hearing aid. British Journal of Audiology 23: 201–6. Green R, Day S, Bamford J (1989) A comparative evaluation of four Hearing aid selection procedures II – Quality judgements as measures of benefit. British Journal of Audiology 23: 201–6. Haggard MP, Gatehouse S, Davies AC (1981) The high prevalence of hearing disorders and its implications for services in the UK. British Journal of Audiology, 15: 241–51. Haggard MP, Pullan CR (1989) The staffing and structure for paediatric audiology services in hospital and community units. British Journal of Audiology 23(2): 99–116. Hallberg LRM, Carlsson SG (1991) Qualitative study of strategies for managing a hearing impairment. British Journal of Audiology 25(3): 201–11. Health and Safety Executive (1989) Noise at Work. London: HMSO. Hearing Aid Council (1999) The Hearing Aid Council Code of Practice, Examinations and Registration. Milton Keynes: Hearing Aid Council. Hickson F (1986) The Manchester Picture Test. Manchester: Manchester University. HMSO (1969) The Post Office Act: Guidelines. London: HMSO. International Collegium of Rehabilitative Audiology (1997) ICRA Noise Signals Version 3. Hearing Aid Clinical Test Environment Standardization work Group. Jastreboff PJ, Hazell JWP (1993) A neurophysiological approach to tinnitus: clinical implications. British Journal of Audiology 27: 1–11. Jerger J (1960) Hearing tests in otologic diagnosis. American Speech and Hearing Association 4: 139–45. Katz J (ed.) (1994) Handbook of Clinical Audiology. 4 edn. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Kendall DC (1954) Audiometry for young children. Teacher of the Deaf, L1, 307. Kettlety A (1987) The Manchester high pitch rattle. British Journal of Audiology 21: 73–4. Kiessling J, Schubert M, Archut A. (1996) Adaptive fitting of hearing instruments by category loudness scaling (ScalAdapt) Scandinavian Audiology 25(3): 31–6. Killion MC (1994) Fig6 WQ1: Loudness-based fitting formulae. Elk Grove Village IL: Etymotic Research.

328

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology

Killion MC, Fikret-Pasa S (1993) The three types of sensorineural hearing loss: Loudness and intelligibility considerations. Hearing Journal 46(11): 31–6. King PF, Coles RRA, Lutman ME, Robinson DW (1992) Assessment of Hearing Disability: Guidelines for medicolegal practice. London: Whurr. Launer S (1995) Loudness Perception in Listeners with Sensorineural Hearing Impairment. Unpublished doctoral thesis, University of Oldenburg. Leavitt R, Flexer C (1999) Speech degradation as measured by the rapid speech transmission index (RASTI) Ear and Hearing 12: 115–18. Libby R (1986) The insertion gain hearing aid selection guide. Hearing Instruments 37(3): 27–8. Ludvigsen C, Topholm J (1997) Fitting a wide range compression hearing instrument using real ear threshold data: a new strategy. The Hearing Review 4(11): 37–39. Lutman ME, Brown EJ, Coles RRA (1987) Self-reported disability and handicap in the population in relation to pure-tone threshold, age, sex and type of hearing loss. British Journal of Audiology 21(1): 45–58. Lybarger SF (1985) Earmoulds. In Katz J (ed.) Handbook of Clinical Audiology. 3 edn. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Lybarger SF (1963) Simplified fitting system for hearing aids. Cannonsburg PA: Radioear Corp. Revised from 1953 publication. Maltby M (1999) Acoustic Conditions in St Edward’s Secondary School. Unpublished report. Maltby M (2000) A new speech perception test for profoundly deaf children. Deafness and Education International 2(2): 86–100. Maltby MT, Knight P (2000) Audiology for Teachers and Other Professionals. London: David Fulton Publishers. Madison TK, Hawkins DB (1983) The signal-to-noise ratio advantage of directional microphones. Hearing Instruments 34(18): 49. Martin M, Summers I (1999) Dictionary of Hearing. London: Whurr. McCandless G, Lyregaard P (1983) Prescription of gain and output (POGO) for hearing aids. Hearing Instruments 34(1): 16–21. Moore BCJ (1998) Cochlear Hearing Loss. London: Whurr. Moore BCJ (2000) Development and evaluation of a test for identification of ‘dead regions’. BSHAA News: The Newsletter of the British Society of Hearing Aid Audiologists (February): 11. Moore BCJ, Huss M, Vickers DA, Glasberg BR, Alcántara BR (2000) A test for the diagnosis of dead regions in the cochlea. British Journal of Audiology 34(4): 205–24. Moore BCJ, Alcántara JI, Glasberg BR (1998) Development and evaluation of a procedure for fitting multi-channel compression hearing aids. British Journal of Audiology 32: 177–95. Mueller HG, Ebinger KA (1997) Verification of the performance of CIC hearing aids. In Chasin M (ed.) CIC Handbook. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group. Mueller HG, Killion MC (1990) An easy method for calculating the articulation index. The Hearing Journal 43(9): 14–17. NDCS (1996) Quality Standards in Paediatric Audiology. Vol. II: The audiological management of the child with permanent hearing loss. London: National Deaf Children’s Society. Nolan M, Combe EC (1985) Silicone materials for ear impressions. Scandinavian Audiology 14: 35–9.

References

329

O’Donoghue GM (1993) Acoustic neuroma: triumph and disaster. British Journal of Hospital Medicine 49(2): 86–7. Pavlovic C, Studebaker G, Sherbecoe R (1986) An articulation index based procedure for predicting the speech recognition performance of hearing-impaired individuals. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 80: 50–7. Pollack M (1988) Amplification for the Hearing Impaired, 3 edn. Orlando FL: Grune & Stratton. Rosenberg PE (1969) Tone Decay. Maico Audiological Library Series, Report 6. Ruggero MA, Rich NC (1991) Furosemide alters organ of Corti mechanics: evidence for feedback of outer hair cells upon basilar membrane. Journal of Neuroscience 11: 1057–67. Seewald RC (1988) The desired sensation level approach for children: selection and verification. Hearing Instruments 39: 18–22.. Seewald RC (1992) The desired sensation level method for fitting children: version 3.0. Hearing Journal 45(4): 36–41. Seewald RC (1994) The Desired Sensation Level Method for Selecting and Fitting Amplification in Children. Proceedings of the Hearing Aid Audiology Group (HAAG) Spring Meeting. Hearing Aid Audiology Group, British Society of Audiology, Reading. Seewald RC (2000) The DSL Report 2000. National Centre for Audiology, London Ontario. Seewald RC, Ross M (1988) Hearing aid selection and evaluation with young children. In Bess FH (ed.) Hearing Impairment in Children, Parkton MD, York Press. Sheppard L, Hawkridge A (1987) Tinnitus – Learning to live with it. Bath: Ashgrove Press. Somerfield Q (1987) The Musician’s Guide to Acoustics. London: Dent. Sullivan R (1989) Custom canal and concha instruments; a real ear comparison. Hearing Instruments 40(4): 20–9. Tate M (1990) The application of real ear probe tube measurements to hearing aid fitting. Acoustic Letters 14(1): 1. Tate M (ed.) (1994) The Earmould, Current Practice and Technology. Reading: Hearing Aid Audiology Group, British Society of Audiology. Taylor G, Bishop J (1991) Being Deaf, The Experience of Deafness. London: Pinter. Tucker I, Nolan M (1984) Educational Audiology. London: Croom Helm. Weatherall DJ, Ledingham JGG, Warrell DA (1983) Oxford Textbook of Medicine. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Wernick JS (1985) Use of hearing aids. In Katz J (ed.) Handbook of Clinical Audiology, 3 edn. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Woolley M (1991) Acquired hearing loss: acquired oppression. In Taylor G, Bishop J (eds) Being Deaf: The experience of deafness. Milton Keynes: Open University. Wright A (2001) Personal communication. University College, London. Wright D (1992) Signal Processing Hearing Aids: A review. Hearing Aid Audiology Group (HAAG) Reading: British Society of Audiology.

This page intentionally left blank

Index

ANSI, see American National Standards Institute antrum, 27–8 aperiodic, 9, 72–3 articulation index, 78 areal ratio, see Middle ear function artificial mastoid, 177–8 A scale, 13–5, 294–6 ASP, see automatic signal processing assistive devices, 239, 245–7 atresia, 46, 50 attack time, 97–8, 102, 114, 169–70 audiogram, interpretation, 76–8, 146–51, 287 pure tone, 134–8, 146–7, 229–30 speech, 230–2 symbols, 143–4, 146–7, 196 audiological assessment, audiogram interpretation, 146–51 case history, 125–8, 266 masking, 137–45, 146–7, 150, 229–30, 261, 264–7 otoscopy, 129–31 pure tone audiometry, 15, 134–7 referable conditions, 127–8 tuning fork tests, 132–4 audiological reference pressure, 11, 13 audiometer, calibration, 15 daily checks, 16–7 speech, 229–30 standards, 15–6

ABLB, see alternate binaural loudness balance test AB word list, 226 acoustic filters, 152, 216–7 acoustic impedance, 35, 268–70, 273–4 acoustic neuroma, 62 acoustic reflex, 35, 270, 273–6 acoustics, 1–19 acquired conditions of the ear, 47–50, 51–4, 57–62 adaptation, 276, 280–1, 287 addition cured silicone, 205–6 aditus, 27 afferent nerve fibres, 31–2 AGC, see Automatic Gain Control aided thresholds, 222–3, 293 air-bone gap, 127, 136, 147–149 air conduction, hearing aids, 155–9, 181, 186–7, 194 output transducer (hearing aid), 90–1, 104 threshold testing, 135–44, 150, 277 algorithms, prescriptive, 107, 112–3, 115–9, 195–9 aliasing, 108 alternate binaural loudness balance test, 276–9 American National Standards Institute, 171 amplifiers, 86–90, 97, 179 analogue hearing aids, see also hearing aid(s); 102, 106–7, 242 anatomy, 21–32

331

332 audiometric, symbols, 143–4, 146–7, 196 test frequencies, 135–7, 146, 301 tests, 15, 134–44, 276–82, 284–5, 286–9 audiometric room requirements, 151–2 audiometry, automatic, 286–9 impedance, 268–75 masking, 137–44, 146, 150, 229–30, 261, 264–7 paediatric, 293–301 pure tone, 15, 134–7 speech, 224–32 auditory, adaptation, 280–1 deprivation, 190–1 feedback, 78–9, 253, 284 training, 252–5 auditory pathways, see central connections of cochlear nerve auditory tube, see Eustachian tube aural rehabilitation, see rehabilitation auricle, see pinna automatic, gain control, 97–102, 169, 200–1 signal processing, 103, 104, 113 volume control, see automatic gain control automatic audiometry, 286–9 auxiliary aids, see assistive devices average speech spectrum, 76, 120, 150, 196, 223 background noise reduction, see also bass cut; venting; 102–3, 113–4 bacterial conditions of the ear, see infections BAHA, see bone anchored hearing aid balance, organ of, 29, 31 band, digital, 102, 113 basilar membrane, 29–31, 37–8, 260, 261, 281 bass cut, see also automatic signal processing; venting; 94–5, 102–3, 216 batteries, hearing aid, 178–80, 242 battery,

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology characteristics, 178–80 storage, 181 behind-the-ear hearing aid, 156–7, 181 Békésy audiometry, 287–9 Békésy’s travelling wave theory, 37–8 Bell’s palsy, 54 bi-CROS hearing aids, 193–4 binary numbers, 106, 110 binaural hearing, advantages over monaural, 188–91 bit processing, 110–1 bodyworn hearing aid, 155–6, 157, 160, 181 bone anchored hearing aid, 187–8 bone conduction, hearing aid, 159–60, 177, 186–8 output transducer, 91–2 threshold testing, 136–7, 139–42, 144, 149–50 bone vibrator, see bone conduction output transducer bone vibrator output measurement, 177–8 brain stem evoked response audiometry, 297–8 British Standards Institution, 171 BTE, see Behind-the-ear hearing aid calibration, see audiometer canal hearing aid, see in-the-canal hearing aid Carhart’s notch, 36, 54, 55, 137 case history, 125–8, 266 causes of hearing loss, see medical aspects of hearing loss central connections of cochlear nerve, 42–3 channel, digital, 102, 113–4 cholesteatoma, 52–3 chorda tympani, 26 chromosomes, 45 clicks, 297 cochlea, anatomy of, 28–31 dead regions, 276, 281–2 cochlear, echoes, see otoacoustic emissions fluids, 28, 29, 30

Index hearing loss, see also sensorineural hearing loss; 275, 276–7, 280 hearing loss, tests of, 276–82, 287–8 implants, 201–2, 304–6 innervation, 31–2, 42–3 potentials, 41–2 code of practice, Hearing Aid Council, 248–51 referable conditions, 127–8, 249 complex needs, children with, 304 complex sound, 8 compliance, 269, 271–2 compression, 97–102, 118, 201 condensation reaction silicone, 205, 206 conductive hearing loss, 46–54, 136–7, 142, 269–70, 292–3 congenital conditions of the ear, 45–6, 50–1, 54–7 consonants, 68, 73–4, 76, 77 contralateral routeing of signals, 158, 192–4 corti, organ of, 30–1, 36–7, 260 Costen’s syndrome, 64 counselling, see rehabilitation coupler, 2cc, 174–5 couplers, 173–8, 200 cranial nerves, 23, 25, 26, 27, 31, 273 CROS hearing aid, 158, 193–4 cross-hearing, 133–4, 137–41 Crouzon’s syndrome, 50 current, electrical, 93–4 cytomegalovirus, 54,57 daily checks, see audiometer dBHL, see decibel, hearing level dBSPL, see decibel, sound pressure level dead regions in the cochlea, see Cochlea, dead regions decibel, hearing level, 13–4 scales, 7, 11–3 sound pressure level, 11–3 delayed speech feedback test, 284–5 desired sensation level algorithm, 118 difference limen, 287, 287 digital, hearing aids, 106–7, 113, 119–20, 195–6

333 signal processing, 106–15 directional microphones, 81, 84–6, 114 disease, see pathology discharge, ear, see also otitis externa; otitis media; 53, 127, 130 distortion, 166–9 Doerfler-Stewart test, 284 Down’s syndrome, 50 drugs, see ototoxic drugs DSL I/O, see desired sensation level algorithm DSP, see digital signal processing dynamic range of hearing, 12, 154 ear, anatomy, 21–32 canal, see external auditory meatus canal resonance, 34, 220–1 examination, see also otoscopy; 207 physiology, 32–43 plugs, see ear protection protection, 57–8 simulator, 173–4, 175, 176–7 earache, 63–4 earmould, materials, 211 types, 211–3 earmoulds, 204–18 ear impression, equipment, 206 open jaw, 209–10 technique, 207–9 echo, 10 eczema, 49 efferent nerve fibres, 31–2 electret microphone, 84, 104 electricity, elementary theory, 92–4 electro-acoustic impedance, see impedance endolymph, 28, 29, 30 endolymphatic, duct, 29 sac, 29, 62 equal loudness contours, 18 equivalent input noise level, 168 ERA, see evoked response audiometry Eustachian tube, 27, 51–2, 292

334 evaluation of hearing aids, 119–20, 176, 219–24, 232–3 evoked response audiometry, 298 excessive wax, 48 external auditory meatus, see also otoscopy; 22–3, 34 facial nerve, 22, 25, 26, 27 fall time, 16,17 feedback, acoustic, 156, 187, 194, 199, 243 auditory, 78–9, 253 filters, acoustic, 217 fluctuating hearing loss, 61, 128, 292–3 formants, 72–3, 75, 77 free-field, 10, 13, 173, 294 frequency, audible range, 6, 19 fundamental, 8–9 of sound, 5, 19 of speech, 71–2, 77 of vocal cords, 73 frequency response, hearing aid, 100–1,102–3, 161–2, 165, 198–9, 213–7 modification, 94–5, 213–7 fricatives, 73–4, 77 Fry speech test, 225 functional gain, 197, 222–3 fundamental frequency, see frequency furunculosis, 49 gain functional, 197, 222–3 insertion, 177, 197–8, 219–22 open ear, 197, 220–1 gain control (volume), 92 genetic conditions of the ear, 46, 50–1, 56 genetics, 45 german measles, 54, 57 glue ear, see also otitis media; 51–2, 292 grommet, 52, 63 HAC code of practice, see Hearing Aid Council code of practice HACTES test stimuli, 120

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology hair cells, 30–1, 37–42, 260, 296 HAIC standards, 171 half gain rule, 196, 197 half peak level (HPL), 230, 231 half peak level elevation (HPLE), 230, 231 hard acrylic earmould, 211 harmonic distortion, 16, 166–7 harmonics, 8–9 head shadow effect, 34, 189–90 hearing aid(s), advantages of binaural, 188–91 care and cleaning, 243–4 components, amplifier, 86–90 battery, 178–80, 242 microphone, 80–6, 104 output transducer, 90–2 transistor, 87, 88 digital, 106–7, 113, 119–20, 195–6 evaluation, 119–20, 176, 219–24, 232–3 fitting, 115–9, 185–6, 195–210, 302–3 fitting room requirements, 195 modification, 94–8, 213–7, 232–3 National health service, 181–3 performance, frequency response, 100–1, 102–3, 165, 198–9, 213–7 gain, 163–4 maximum output, 95–6, 164–5, 199–200 specification sheets, 160–3 practical instruction to patients, 241–5 purpose, 185 selection and fitting, 185–201, 302–3 standards, 120, 169–71 test box, 173 types, air conduction, 155–9, 181, 186–7, 194 behind-the-ear, 156–7, 181 bi-CROS, 193–4 bodyworn, 155–6, 157, 160, 181 bone conduction, 159–60, 186–8 CROS, 158, 193–4 in-the-canal, 158–9

Index in-the-ear, 158–9 spectacle, 157–8 Hearing Aid Council code of practice, 127–8, 248–51 hearing loss, causes, see medical aspects of hearing loss in children, 46, 47, 51–2, 283–4, 290–301 classification, 150–1 conductive, 46–54, 136–7, 142, 269–70, 292–3 description, 150–1 fluctuating, 61, 128, 292–3 noise induced, 55, 57–8 sensorineural, 54–62, 133, 147–50, 231, 276 and speech perception, 70–1, 76–8 and speech production, 78, 253–4 unilateral, 128, 133, 192–4, 291 hearing range in humans, 6, 19 hearing screening, 39, 286, 297, 298–9 hearing tactics, 245–6 hearing therapist, 253, 254–5 herpes, simplex, 49 zoster, 59, 64 hereditary conditions, 45, 46, 50–1 hertz, 5 high frequency emphasis, see also venting; horns; 94–5, 100–1, 214, 233 hi-pro box, 112 horn, 214, 215 hydrops, see Ménière’s disorder ICRA noise, 120 IEC, see International Electrotechnical Commission impedance, acoustic, 268–70, 273–4 audiometry, 268–75 electrical, 94 middle ear, 35, 268–9, 273 impression, of the ear, 204–5, 266, 303 equipment, 206 materials, 205–6

335 techniques, 207–10 incus, 24, 25, 26, 34 induction loop system, 243, 246–7 industrial hearing loss, see noise induced hearing loss industrial screening, 286–9 infection, inner ear, 54, 57, 59–60 middle ear, 27, 51–3 outer ear, 48–9, 64 inner ear, anatomy, 21, 28–32 congenital conditions, 54–7 pathology, 54–62 physiology, 36–43 inner hair cells, 30–1, 260, 281–2 innervation of the cochlea, 31–2, 42–3 intermodulation distortion, 166, 167 internal noise, 168 International Electrotechnical Commission, 169, 171 in-the-canal hearing aid, 158–9 in-the-ear hearing aid, 158–9 inverse square law, 3, 4, 10, 308 ITE, see in-the-ear hearing aid KEMAR (Knowles Electronic Manikin for Acoustic Research), 176 Kendall toy test, 226–7 labyrinth, 28–9 labyrinthectomy, 63 laryngopharynx, 32 Libby horn, see horn lip-reading, 70–1, 252–3 localization of sound, 33–4, 39, 192 logarithms, 11–2 Lombard test, 284 long-term average speech spectrum, 120, 150, 196, 223 loop system, 246–7, 309 loudness, see also intensity; 11, 18 loudness mapping, 117, 121 loudspeaker, see receiver low frequency emphasis, 94–5, 100–1 LTASS, see long-term average speech spectrum

336 MAF, see minimum audible field malingering deafness, 283–5 malleus, 24, 25, 26, 34, 131, 273 Maltby speech perception test, 228–9 MAP, see minimum audible pressure maskers, tinnitus, 261, 266–7 masking, air conduction, 139, 140, 143 bone conduction, 139–40, 144 need for, 137–8 noise, 144–5, 229 procedure, 140–3 rules, 139–40 symbols, 143–4, 146 tinnitus evaluation, 264 mastoid, 23–4, 26, 27–8 mastoidectomy, 63, 207 mastoid simulator, 177–8 maximum output, 95–6, 98, 164–5, 199–200 maximum power output, see maximum output MCL, see most comfortable level meatal projection of earmould, 213, 214–5 meatus, see external auditory meatus medical aspects of hearing loss, inner ear pathology, 54–62 middle ear pathology, 50–4 outer ear pathology, 46–50 medical referral, 127–8, 207, 249 mel, 19 Ménière’s disorder, 61–2, 63 microphone, capacitor (condenser), 83–4, 104 carbon, 82 directional, 84–6 dynamic (moving coil), 82–3 electret, 84, 104 hearing aid, 80–6, 104 piezo-electric (crystal), 82 pressure, 81 middle ear, anatomy, 23–8 function, 34–6 muscles, 25, 26, 35–6, 273–4 pathology, 50–4 physiology, 34–6

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology transformer action, 35, 268–9 minimum audible field (MAF), 13–4 minimum audible pressure(MAP), 13 modiolus, 28, 29, 30 Moore’s test of dead regions in the cochlea, 281–2 most comfortable level, 196, 320 multi-channel hearing aids, 102, 104, 113–4, 201 myringotomy, 52, 62–3 NAL-NL1, see National Acoustics Laboratory non-linear algorithm nasopharynx , 32 National Acoustics Laboratory non-linear algorithm, 115–6, 118–9 National Health Service hearing aids, 181–3 nerve supply, see cochlear innervation; cranial nerves NIHL, see noise induced hearing loss NOAH, 112 noise induced hearing loss, 55, 57–8 noise reduction in hearing aids, see automatic signal processing; bass cut; venting non-organic hearing loss, 283–5 Nyquist frequency, 108 occluded ear simulator, 173–4, 175, 176–7 occlusion effect, 36, 137, 216 octave, 9, 15 Ohm’s law, 93–4 on-effect, see auditory adaptation open ear gain, 197, 220 open jaw impressions, 209–10 operations on the ear, see also cochlear implants; 62–3 organ of Corti, 30–1, 36–7 oropharynx, 32 ossicles, 24–6 otalgia, see pain in the ear otitis externa, 49 otitis media, 51–2, 53, 292–3 otoacoustic emissions, 39, 296–7 otorrhoea, see discharge of the ear otosclerosis, 54, 55

Index otoscope, 129–30 otoscopy, 129–31 ototoxic drugs, 60 outer ear, anatomy, 22–3 excessive wax, 48 foreign bodies, 47–8 furunculosis, 49 infection, 48–9, 64 pathology, 46–50 physiology, 32–4 tumours, 50 outer hair cells, 30–1, 37–40, 42, 260, 296 output, compression, 98–9 limiting, 95–9 transducer, 90–2, 104 output sound pressure level, see maximum output paediatric hearing loss, 290–301 Paget’s disease, 51 pain in the ear, 63–4 pascals, 7, 12 pathology, inner ear, 54–62 middle ear, 50–4 outer ear, 46–50 pathways to the auditory cortex, see central nervous system patient management, see rehabilitation PB words, 225 PC, see peak clipping perilymph, 28 period, 6 periodic sound, 8–9 pharynx, 32, 33, 70 phase, distortion, 168 of sound, 8, 34 phon, 18 phonemes, 68, 225, 253 phonetically balanced (PB) words, 225 physiology of the ear, inner ear, 36–43 middle ear, 34–6 outer ear, 32–4

337 pink noise, 9, 144–5 pinna, anatomy, 22 injury to, 47 physiology, 33–4 pitch, matching, 263 of sound, 5, 9, 19 see also frequency plosives, 74, 77 polar plot, 86 prelingual deafness, 290 presbyacusis, 55, 58–9 prescription formulae, 115–9, 195–200 pressure, audiological reference, 11, 13 minimum audible, 13 sound, 7, 11–4 profound deafness, 150, 198, 201–2, 228–9, 291 pseudohypacusis, see non-organic hearing loss psychoacoustics, 18–9 psychogenic hearing loss, 283 pure tone, audiogram, 147–50, 196 audiometry, 134–146 pure tones, 5, 8, 19 push-pull amplifier, 88, 90, 179 quantization, 110–2 radio hearing aid, 308–9 RASTI, 307–8 real ear measures, 220–2 receiver, 90–2, 159 recommended equivalent threshold sound pressure levels, 13–4 recovery time, 169, 170 recruitment, see also cochlear hearing loss, tests of, 18, 38, 196 reference coupler, 174–5, 176 reference test, frequency, 164 gain, 163–4, 167 referable conditions, 127–8, 207, 249 reflex arc, 274 rehabilitation,

338 attitude types, 236–7 practical aspects of, 240–6 process, 235–6 tinnitus, 264–7 see also hearing aid fitting; subjective evaluation of hearing aids release time, 97–8, 102, 169 residual hearing, 154 retention rings for hearing aids, 303 retrocochlear disorders, 230–1, 275–6, 277, 280–1, 289 RETSPL, see recommended equivalent threshold sound pressure levels reverberation, 10, 307 reverberation time, for audiometric rooms, 152 for classrooms, 306 Rinne test, 133–4 rise time, 17–8 room requirements, for audiometry, 151–2, 294 classrooms, 306–7 for hearing aid fitting, 195 rubella, 57 sampling, digital signals, 107–9 saturation sound pressure level, see maximum output semicircular canals, 28–9, 31 sensorineural hearing loss, 54–62, 133, 147–50, 231, 276 shadow curve, 138–9 short increment sensitivity test, 280 signal processing, 94, 102–3, 106, 107–15 signal to noise ratio, 230, 306 sine waves, see pure tones SISI test, see short increment sensitivity test social worker, 254 soft acrylic, 211 sone, 18 sound, aperiodic, 9 complex, 8 field, 293, 294 field radio system, 293, 306, 309

Principles of Hearing Aid Audiology frequency, 4, 5, 8–9 generation, 3 intensity, 7, 10, 11, 18, 19 localisation, 33–4, 39, 168, 194, 292 measurement, 14, 19, 294 perception, see also speech perception; 18, 19, 36, 115 periodic, 5, 8–9 pressure, 7, 11–4 psychological properties of, 18–9, 185 speed of, 3, 6 transduction, 40–2 transmission, 37–40 wave, 3, 5–10 wavelength of, 6 sound level meter, 14–6, 18, 294–5 specification sheets, hearing aid, 160–3 spectacle hearing aid, 157–8, 159, 187 specula sterilisation, 129–30 speech, audiogram, 230–1 audiometry, 224, 229–32 ‘banana’, see long-term average speech spectogram frequency, 73, 77 intelligibility, 67–9, 70–1, 76–8 intensity, 76, 196 perception, 67–8, 76–8 production, 67, 69–70, 78–9 reading, 70–1 sounds, 71–9 tests, 191, 224–9, 300 therapy, 253 time factors, 75–6 speed of sound, 3, 6 spondees, 225 standing waves, 10, 152, 293 standards, see ANSI; British Standards; HAIC stapedectomy, 54, 56, 63 stapedial reflex, see acoustic reflex stapedius muscle, 26, 273–4 stapes, 25–6, 34, 35, 268 startle reflex, 36, 273 Stenger test, 285–6 sterilisation of specula,129–30 subjective evaluation of hearing aids, 219, 232–4

Index surgical treatment, see operations on the ear syndromes, 45, 50–1, 56 syphilis, 57 tactics for new hearing aid users, 245–6 teacher of the deaf, 255, 301, 310 telecoil system, 246–7, 309 temporal integration, 19 temporary threshold shift, 57 tensor tympani muscle, 25–6, 35–6, 273 test box, hearing aid, 171–3 test frequencies, audiometric, 135–6 tinnitus, assessment, 261–4, 266 and associated hearing problems, 259 in children, 291 conditions involving, 47, 48, 58, 60, 61, 64–5 maskers, 261, 266–7 rehabilitation, 238, 264, 267 relief, 63, 190, 192, 261 tone controls, hearing aid, 94–5 tone decay, see auditory adaptation transient distortion, 167 transistor, 87 transposition hearing aids, 194 travelling wave theory, 37–8 Treacher Collins’ syndrome, 46, 50 treble cut, 95, 232 trigeminal nerve, 25, 273 ‘T’ switch, 92, 243, 302 TTS, see temporary threshold shift tubing modification, 213–4 tuning curves, 38–9, 40 tuning fork, 4, 8, 132 tuning fork tests, 132–4 Turner’s syndrome, 56 twin channel hearing aids, 102, 201 tympanic cavity, 23–7 tympanic membrane, anatomy, 24, 25

339 injury to, 47, 127, 207 physiology, 35 see also otoscopy tympanometry, 270–3 tympanoplasty, 63 ULL, see uncomfortable loudness level uncomfortable loudness level, 145–7, 196, 264, 275 unilateral hearing loss, 128, 192–3, 291 upward spread of masking, 77, 197 Usher’s syndrome, 56 venting, 215–7 vertigo, 61–2, 128 vestibular system, see semicircular canals vestibule, 28, 29 vestibulo-cochlear nerve, 31, 32, 281 vibrotactile levels, 147, 149 viruses, 49, 54, 57, 59, 62 vocal, cords, 69–73 folds, see Vocal cords tract, 69–70, 71–3 voltage, 93 volume, see gain; intensity; loudness volume control, 92, 97, 198, 242 vowels, 68, 71–3, 75–6, 77, 150 Waardenburg’s syndrome, 56 warble tone, 10–1 wavelength of sound, 6 wave motion, 10 waves, sound, 5, 6, 8, 9 standing, 10, 152 wax, excessive, 48, 207 Weber test, 132–3 white noise, 9, 229 zinc air batteries, 180, 242